Patricia Y.
How to reset the central unit to resolve persistent errors?
The device features a dedicated reset button located in the switches and buttons section. To address deeper system issues, a cold start or warm start procedure can be performed.
Kieback&Peter DDC4000 DDC Documentation
The DDC4000 is a decentralized control system that provides a plant with new options. It features Ethernet communication between the DDC4000 Central Units and BMS, a flexible and user-friendly touchscreen interface, BACnet native communication, structured parameterizing, and remote control via any Windows PC without additional software.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Documentation DDC4000
Documentation DDC4000
Documentation to set up and maintain the DDC4000.
Version released for DDC4000
0.10 v. 14.10.2004 ß test
0.11 v. 21.10.2004 -
0.12 v. 13.12.2004 ß
0.13 v. 05.01.2005 ß
-
-
-
-
Released by Comment
0.14 v. 10.03.2006 Version 1.0.xx PAW
0.15 v. 21.3.2006
Version 1.0.xx PAW
0.16 v. 04.04.2006 Version 1.1.xx PAW
1.0 v. 23.05.2006
Version 1.1.xx PAW
To use as part of the ß test.
Updating
Manual influence in DDC, network settings for PPP,
Directory structure reworked, expression corrections initiated by Wlk/FE
System objects reworked (FAX, EMAIL, Config)
Software objects reworked (additions on the basis of the specifications) general revision, system objects added first variant for export
1. Introduction
2. Operation
3. Plant components and bus systems
4. Software structure
Version 05/06
Introduction
1. Introduction
1. - 2
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1. The idea behind the DDC 4000 ................................................................................................... 3
1.2. Structure of the DDC 4000 system ............................................................................................. 5
Version 05/06
Introduction The idea behind the DDC 4000 1.1. - 3
1.1. The idea behind the DDC 4000
The DDC4000 Central Units and bus modules are extensions to the Kieback&Peter product range providing a plant with new options.
The following objectives were aimed at and achieved with the development of the DDC4000 system:
Ethernet communication between the DDC4000 Central Units and BMS
The central station communication of the DDC4000 system is implemented over the Ethernet.
Through the use of current network technology it is possible to connect to the service laptop, BMS or customer networks as well as to network various DDC4000 Central Units cost-effective.
If an existing JY(St)Y cabling is to be used there is still the option of communicating via this traditional "telephone cable". But for this it is not possible to use the Ethernet's data rate.
Flexible, user-friendly user interface
The use of a touch screen TFT color display provides a flexible, future-oriented interface that is easy and intuitive to operate and does not have restrictions for future extensions.
BACnet native
The DDC4000 communicates via the standardized protocol BACnet. BACnet operates in the DDC
Central Unit down up to the database structure. This is called a native BACnet implementation.
Each parameter is administrated as a BACnet object and for example transported to the BMS. This means unproblematic connection to BACnet clients and therefore minimal projecting effort.
Structured parameterizing
By illustrating individual plants and their classification in groups, a clearly structured, re-usable projecting is possible. On that ground existing plant elements can be combined with new ones with the lowest effort.
Remote control via any Windows PC without additional software
To operate and project a DDC4000 central unit you only need a network connection and Internet explorer. No plug-in or additional programs are required. The usual port 80 is used for communication.
As a result of the Internet integration, access is possible from almost anywhere in the world.
checked controls for plant elements
The hardware objects, commented later, provide all the usual functions to control the common plant parts, such as pumps, valves, burners etc. The processing of many functions such as operating hour counting and command execution check has already been integrated and is ready for use.
2 CAN buses for each DDC4000 central station (each can be switched as a control cabinet
or field bus)
Both CAN buses can be used as either a field bus or control cabinet bus. This permits higher flexibility for utilizing resources. Many of the known bus devices from the DDC3000 system can still be used; new modules will receive additional functions.
Switch modules on the touch screen
With the depiction of switches, lamps and values you can easily and effectively implement the individually produced manual operating level.
separate customer and service interface
The service interface is separate from the intuitive operating interface. It provides a structured and fast access to all functions. The complete plant functionality can be produced or changed from this interface.
Integration in the planning tool
For fast and effective DDC4000 projecting the planning system PS4000 provides all kinds of support. A flexible database structure ensures that the new DDC4000 functions can be used immediately in the planning system.
Version 05/06
Introduction The idea behind the DDC 4000 1.1. - 4
high computing power
Through the use of modern processors, new memory components and the use of the futureoriented and apparently virus-free Linux operating system very powerful DDC Central Units are created.
Version 05/06
Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1.2. - 5
1.2. Structure of the DDC 4000 system
The DDC4000 system is designed hierarchically. The DDC Central Units are as processing units connected with each other via the central bus. The plant was designed for Ethernet operation with
10/100MBit. If existing cable has to be used it is also possible to communicate via J-Y(St)Y.
Superior, but in the same bus system (Ethernet) are the BMS and PCs with visualization via Internet
Explorer.
The bus modules and field bus controllers are located under the DDC Central Units. Modules on two different bus systems are used to input and output information.
The control cabinet bus can accept and transfer data at very high speeds. It is used to input a lot of information in the control cabinet and can be used for distances up to 200 meters. Typical modules in the control cabinet bus are BMD4064 and SBM42.
The field bus can transfer data at very high speeds. It is used to collect and output distant information. The amount of transportable information is lower than at the control cabinet bus. It can be used for distances up to 2000 meters. The field bus modules FBM are typical for the field bus.
Version 05/06
Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1.2. - 6
DDC400 central units model variants
DDC4200: Color 5.7" TFT touch screen
DDC4100: Black and white screen with single button operation
DDC4400: Black box: DDC4000 Central Unit without operating elements
Displaced displays
DDC4001: touch screen to operate the complete DDC network
Structure of planning and user guidance
The functions in the DDC Central Unit are strictly classified by plant. This may for example be a heating plant with 3 heating circuits. Within one plant parts may be grouped according to logically related functions. One such group for example is a heating circuit with the pump, valve and temperature sensor elements. The function of a plant component within a group and group control functions themselves are described by objects.
An object usually comprises input parameters, function and output parameters.
Sample plant in preparing the planning with a number of aggregate.
Structure of information points for later planning.
Version 05/06
Introduction Structure of the DDC 4000 system 1.2. - 7
The plants are classified into groups with logically related functions.
e.g. a heating register or a fan with guard.
The DDC4000 objects are sub-divided for better clarity:
Software objects
The software objects have functions that control the DDC-central unit. These include for example the basic programs heating, ventilation and separate objects such as arithmetic. The basic programs were summarized by function. All software functions that are directly related to the basic ventilation program are found under object number S238. This includes for example the cascade or
Y_limitation.
Hardware objects
The hardware objects describe summarized functions that are used to control plant parts. (for example: operating pumps, fans, burners etc.)
Basic objects
Simple basic functions are implemented with basic objects as timers, markers, lamps, switches and module clamps - the PINs.
Attached objects
Parameters may contain attached objects that change them or extend their function. For example you can attach a "F001 scaling" function object to the "control variable sensor" parameter if this parameter shall to be read in and scaled as a 0 ... 10V signal.
system objects
This includes functions that are processed in the DDC Central Unit. In general they are not directly related to a plant. For example date and time settings or configuring network connections, modems etc. are system objects.
Sub-objects
These objects are used to describe an object more precisely. A key example is a PIN. Each clamp in the system is represented by a PIN. This PIN can be determinated by a sub-object to a digital or analog input or output.
Therefore the parameterizing is very structured and clear.
Version 05/06
Operation
2. Operation
2. - 8
2. Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 8
2.1. Introduction to operation ............................................................................................................ 9
Version 05/06
Operation Introduction to operation 2.1. - 9
2.1. Introduction to operation
Please refer to the DDC4000 instruction manual for detail information.
The user interface is created exclusively with the PS4000 parametering tool. Already by structuring into plants the first operating page is determinated. Therefore there is a summary of the plants in the
DDC4000 Central Unit and a quick start bar on the first page.
Depiction of opening page with summary of all plants and the quick start bar
You can obtain a quick overview of the plant's status with the aid of the quick start bar located on the right.
Green means - plant running, white - plant is off, flashing red - plant has produced an unconfirmed malfunction, red constant on - plant has a malfunction, hand symbol - a plant element was switched to manual operation.
In addition it is also possible to select the desired plant very quickly with the aid of the plant indicator shown in the middle of the screen.
Via "log in" each user can be registered on the DDC Central Unit. Depending on the code level entered, this enables changes to the set points and times.
If one of the plant sensors located centrally on the screen is pressed the first "switch" page is opened. This page contains the name that the group has in the DDC. All binary information that have a tick under "visualization" in the PS4000 planning tool are found under this title, e.g. "delivery air fan". Switch groups or LEDs are blend correspondingly. If not all switches, LEDs etc. can be depicted on the first page it is possible to scroll forward using the "arrow keys".
Version 05/06
Operation Introduction to operation 2.1. - 10
The formation of the "Values" page(s) is similar. All parameters that are also selected for visualization in the PS4000 planning tool are displayed in succession (e.g. current and set points).
If times have been installed in a plant (e.g. weekly program) these are offered for selection and editing via the "times" button.
As the depiction is set in the DDC Central Unit a change to the visualization regulations can only be made via the PS4000 planning tool. The page settings are generated here and stored as a data backup.
The "image" button is for version 1.0.x and 1.1.x without function. It is planned to display plant images to make the plant easier explainable for the customer.
Status information can be displayed in the quick start bar.
This makes it visible whether a plant is on, off or in manual mode. Plant malfunctions are also visible.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems
3. Plant components and bus systems
3. - 11
3. Plant components and bus systems ......................................................................................... 11
3.2. central unit bus (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................ 12
3.2.1. DDC Central Units .................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1.1. DDC4200 ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1.1.1. Connection occupancy ....................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1.1.2. Technical data .................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.1.1.3. LV help (bids) ...................................................................................................................... 14
3.2.2. Touch panel .............................................................................................................................. 16
3.2.2.1. DDC4001 ............................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.2.1.1. Connection occupancy ....................................................................................................... 16
3.2.2.1.2. Technical data .................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.3. Central communication Ethernet .............................................................................................. 16
3.2.3.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 16
3.2.3.2. Ethernet ................................................................................................................................. 17
3.2.3.2.1. Network settings Sy_Network ............................................................................................. 17
3.2.3.2.2. Other DDC Central Units in the network ............................................................................. 19
3.2.3.2.3. Ethernet tests ...................................................................................................................... 19
3.2.3.3. PC operation with a browser .................................................................................................. 20
3.2.3.5. BMS connection ..................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.3.6. BACnet ................................................................................................................................... 25
3.4. control cabinet bus .................................................................................................................... 29
3.4.1. General ..................................................................................................................................... 29
3.4.1.1. Installation .............................................................................................................................. 29
3.4.1.3. Power supply ......................................................................................................................... 29
3.4.2. BMA4024 .................................................................................................................................. 29
3.4.3. BMD4032 .................................................................................................................................. 32
3.4.4. BMD4064 .................................................................................................................................. 33
3.4.5. SBM51_04 ................................................................................................................................ 35
3.5. Field bus ..................................................................................................................................... 41
3.5.1. General ..................................................................................................................................... 41
3.5.2. Modules .................................................................................................................................... 41
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet)
3.2. central unit bus (Ethernet)
3.2.1. DDC Central Units
3.2.1.1. DDC4200
3.2.1.1.1. Connection occupancy
3.2. - 12
Contact occupancy, device viewed from behind, to the right: D-sub plug, to the left: Ethernet socket
Please note:
Kk means a software switching option between a contact input and an output.
BY means a software switching option between an analog input and an output.
When connecting a field bus no 12 V DC voltage must be set to the DDC4200.
The SMC1 bus connection (RS232) is used for internal diagnosis purposes.
Only DDC4000 Central Units can communicated with each other via the RS485 (Z bus connection with JY(St)Y). It is not possible to exchange data with a DDC3000 via this.
For the DDC4200 central unit a mini-UPS is available; this requires a longer starting time as the internal energy store has to be charged. The mini-UPS can bridge power breaks of maximum 5 seconds and ensures the system software is switched off properly.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 13
3.2.1.1.2. Technical data
DDC control circuits
Within the DDC4200 are 12 control circuits available. This matches the range of functions in the
DDC3200.
Bus connection
Ethernet
99 DDC4000 Central Units can be administrated, networked globally via active network components,
10/100 Mbits/s
2 CAN busses, can be switched individually as a field or control cabinet bus
–
Field Bus; F Bus:
63 FieldBusModule FBM (in future there are plans for 99 FBMs);
2000m; 20kBaud, CAN, J-Y(St) Y 2x2x0,8mm²
–
At the point furthest from the central unit a termination resistance of 180 Ohm must be attached between "BUS+" and "BUS-".
Control Cabinet Bus; SBM Bus:
16 ControlCabinetBusModules SBM;
200m; 40kBaud, CAN
Interfaces
serial RS232
Modem, printer
CompactFlash
for CompactFlash card; update, data backup / file recovery (behind the front panel)
Inputs and outputs
32 binary inputs (BE), can be switched individually as binary outputs (BA) by the software
Transistor output: Contact load 24V DC; max. 50mA
Input: to be attached through potential-free contact, of which 8 BE for counting pulses to 80Hz
24 analog inputs (AE), can be switched individually as analog outputs (AA) by the software
Sensor type Value range and unit
0..10V
0 to 100%
KP10
Pt100
-50 to +150°C
-50 to +150°C
Pt1000
Ni100
-50 to +150°C
-50 to +150°C
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 14
Sensor type Value range and unit
Ni1000 (DIN) -50 to +150°C
Ni1000 (L&G) -50 to +150°C
KP250 -50 to +150°C
ML2 -50 to +150°C
Operating voltage
for DDC Central Unit
24V AC +/-10%; 50..60Hz; 33 VA; 1,4A or
24V DC +/-10%; 14,4 VA; 0,6A or
12V DC +/-10%; 12 VA; 1,0A
For inputs and outputs
24V DC +/-10%
More data:
Fuses
Displays
Switches/ buttons
Processor
Mains fuse, T 3.15A
Back-lit color TFT LCD display
1 button to reset the device
MPC855T; 32 Bit; 80 MHz
Memory
Operating plant
128 MByte Flash Disc, 48MByteSDRAM;1 MByte Flash-PROM (boot)
Embedded Linux
Power outage data backup 10 years, clock component battery-buffered enclosure type
Ambient temperature
Environmental humidity
Housing
Front panel cutout
Weight
Designation
IP30
0..45°C
In service: 20..80%rF, non-condensing; inoperative: 5..90%rF, non-condensing
19" short plastic cassette, 4-way cassette with a base and special connections for
Ethernet and RS232 W x H x D; 202mm x 132mm x 137mm
200.4mm x 112.0mm
2,200kg
CE
3.2.1.1.3. LV help (bids)
To complete service directories (SD)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 15
Automation station
Processor type: MPC 855T
Word length (bit): 32
Max. cycle time (ms): 100
AD/DA converter (bit): 16
Max buffer time, real time clock: At least 5 years
Max buffer time, data: Compact Flash unlimited
Size and type
(MB)
read-only memory: 128 MB Compact Flash main memory: 48 MB RAM
Max. number of control circuits that can be processed: 21
Max. number of information points that can be processed
Physical: 2 x 16 x 24 binary inputs communicative: approx. 5000
Max. number of connectable physical input/output components: 2 x 63
Basic software functions can be extended
Type of expansion: Software objects
Local operating and display unit
Variation 1:
Does the Modular AS have an integrated operating and display unit as standard? Yes
Variation 2:
Can the Modular AS be extended with an integratable operating and display unit? Yes
Type: DDC4001
Variation 3:
Can an external operating and display unit be connected? Yes
Type: PC with browser
Which services can be carried out with the operating and display unit in the variants promted above?
Variants 1, 2 and 3 can be operated, observed and parameterized.
Is bus-wide access to other Modular automation stations possible? yes
Can an I/O component be deleted from the component bracket without affecting other AS components
? yes (even under voltage)
Is the deletion of an I/O component from the AS detected and is this information available for further processing? yes
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 16
3.2.2. Touch panel
3.2.2.1. DDC4001
3.2.2.1.1. Connection occupancy
3.2.2.1.2. Technical data
The DDC4001 includes a PC with touch screen functions. All depictions are made in full-screen mode with Internet Explorer.
External size of DDC4001
Total dimensions W x H: (300 x 217.5) mm
Section in control cabinet W x H: (280 x 197.5) mm
Display cut-out (171 x 128) mm
Display diagonals: 213.6 mm (8.4")
3.2.3. Central communication Ethernet
3.2.3.1. General
The communication between the DDC Central Units is designed for an Ethernet connection. For this the DDC Central Units have a socket into which the Cat cable with the RJ45 plug is inserted.
To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units and a BMS port #BAC0 is used (BACnet communication).
To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units and a PC with Internet Explorer only port 80 is used.
To exchange data between the DDC4000 Central Units ports 19280 and 19281 are used.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 17
3.2.3.2. Ethernet
To use the Ethernet interface the socket on the back of the device is connected with a network cable type Cat.5 (or Cat.6, Cat.7). A difference is made between 1:1 connection (so-called patch cables) and cross-over cables. Cross-over cables are for directly connecting two devices, e.g. a DDC4000 and a service PC. In all other cases a patch cable should be used for example in combination with a switch.
For communication each DDC4000 can use up to 3 IP addresses:
1. for all services when using Ethernet cabling
2. if J-Y(St)Y cabling is used and
3. for connecting via the modem (PPP)
The IP addresses and sub-network mask and any essential gateway address are provided by your system administrator. If a closed network is to be set up, that has no connection to the outside world, the IP addresses can be assigned freely.
The recommendation in this case is to use the addresses 192.168.1.nnn for the Ethernet connection.
This address is set by default.
3.2.3.2.1. Network settings Sy_Network
In the service interface plant "00" and group "00" must be opened. The system objects are found there.
The Sy_Network object contains all parameters that are important for TCP/IP communication.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 18
The selection which of TCP/IP interfaces are to be set is made here. The following are available for selection: Ethernet, RS485
(JY-(St)Y) and RS232 (modem).
If you type in the middle column; the relevant parameters are displayed.
The address is made up of 3 components.
1. The first two numbers
2. the sub-network (preset to 1 for Ethernet, 2 for RS485 and 3 for RS232)
3. central control unit address
The active IP address is made up of this.
In the IPAdrSet you can also state an independent number.
This is required for example if the last number shall be > 99.
Function summary
This object contains the setting parameters for the Ethernet TCP/IP interface.
Function description
The "Ethernet IP Parameter" contains the device's TCP/IP address. If the device ID for BACnet is not set separately in the "Sy_Module" system object ("BACnet DeviceId" parameter) the last number in the RCP/IP address applies to the BACnetDeviceID.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 19
Example: 192.168.0.42 as an IP address, no separately assigned BACnetDeviceID, then "42" is the BACnetDeviceID.
The network is switched on with the aid of the "Ethernet active" parameter. This starts the TCP/IP and BACnet drivers.
Parameters
No.
Gateway
name of parameter parameter typ min max
Gateway
Gateway Addr.
set point text
---
MACAdr MACAdr ---
Port UI-Server actual value text set point integer
0 65535
init
192.168.1.100
00:0B:64:00:00:00
80
--
--
unit
-projNo
PN
Project Number projSub
PS
Project SubNetwork set point text set point text
--
--
--
--
000-00-00000
1
--
--
3.2.3.2.2. Other DDC Central Units in the network
TCP/IP addresses of the DDC central control units
System object Sy_Host is used to set up the network.
The TCP/IP addresses of the other DDC Central Units found in the central bus are entered in the parameters.
The PS4000 makes the entry.
Refer to objects -> system objects -> Sy_Host
3.2.3.2.3. Ethernet tests
Communication test
In order to for example check the connection between a laptop and a DDC4000 Central Unit you enter the following at the MS DOS entry request (Start --> Run... --> cmd.exe): ping 172.20.11.75
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 20
The address of the DDC4000 to be addressed has to be used. (in the above example 172.20.11.75)
A positive answer may look like this:
Ping was carried out for 172.20.11.75 with 32 Bytes data:
Response from 172.20.11.75: Bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=127
Response from 172.20.11.75: Bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=127
Response from 172.20.11.75: Bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=127
Response from 172.20.11.75: Bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=127
Ping statistics for 172.20.11.75:
Packages: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approx. time in milliseconds>
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 1ms, Average = 0ms
Other helpful commands in the MS DOS entry request:
ipconfig ipconfig /all
Ipconfig is a Windows program to read network data - indicates IP address, sub-network mask, standard gateway.
Ipconfig/all displays additional information.
3.2.3.3. PC operation with a browser
The DDC Central Units can be operated remotely with the aid of a browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
For this the Ethernet must be connected to the PC.
Only port 80 can be used for operation. As a result no extra ports need to be released.
After selecting the DDC Central Unit a java applet is loaded. This means that the J2RE (java runtime environment) must be installed on the PC.
Is normally found on all Windows PCs but can also be loaded onto intranet.
Prerequisites
Laptop with network card, RJ45 connection
Cross-over network cable (for a 1 to 1 connection from laptop to PC) or patch network cable (when connecting the DDC4000 e.g. via switches)
Pre-selections
The DDC4000 and laptop must be in the same network. For this it is necessary to set the IP addresses of the DDC 4000 and the laptop to the same sub-network.
Laptop settings (using Windows XP as the example)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 21
In the Windows taskbar click on <Network connections> via the following path:
Start --> Settings> --> Control panel --> Network connections
Select the corresponding connection from network connections (e.g. LAN connection) and right click on
<Properties>.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 22
In the properties window displayed click on the <Internet protocol (TCP/IP)> element under <General> and click on properties.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 23
A properties window for the internet protocol (TCP/IP) opens. Click on the "Use following IP address" option.
Enter the relevant IP address (e.g. 192.168.0.30) and the appropriate sub-network mask (e.g.
255.255.255.0).
For the example above the DDC4000's IP address may only contain 192.168.0.xxx for communication to be established.
After changing a firmly assigned IP address the laptop must be restarted.
DDC4000 settings
In the DDC4000 the IP address and sub-network mask must be adapted in the following parameters:
xx central unit
000 Module (Module 000)
00 plant (plant 0)
00 group (group 0)
SY_Network.01 Object.Index
EtIPAddr Parameter (IP address)
EtMask Parameter (Sub-network mask)
EtActive Parameter (switching the Ethernet to active in the DDC4000)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 24
The sub-network mask must be the same as in the laptop. The IP address must not be the same as in the laptop but must match the sub-network mask. The Ethernet must still be switched on via the
<EtActive> parameter.
Now it is possible to access the DDC4000 from the laptop via Explorer. To do so enter the
DDC4000's IP address in the address field in Explorer. If it is not possible to access the DDC4000 this may be due to the "Java 2 Runtime Environment" software not being installed on the laptop. This software must be installed and can be downloaded from the intranet from the following path:
Documents --> Technical --> DDC4000 system --> Network technology
It can also be found on the Internet by entering the search term "j2re".
The following link structure is used for opening:
1. http://
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 25
2. DDC TCP/IP address
Sample central unit address 192.168.0.60:
In Internet Explorer window http://192.168.0.60
3.2.3.5. BMS connection
A BMS is connected via Ethernet to the DDC4000 system. As the BACnet communication is used for this ensure that Port #BAC0 is switched freely throughout (router...).
Caution! Version 1.0 and 1.1 do not contain BBMD (BACnet broadcast management device). This means that communication via a router is not possible without an external BBMD.
As a result of the native abilities of the DDC4000 it is also possible to switch to third party products.
BACnet/IP is used.
Please refer to the "Ethernet" chapter for the details of the Ethernet cabling and setting up BACnet communication.
Please refer to the BMS documentation on installing and setting up the BMS.
A modem can be connected to the serial interface. A connection to the BMS can be established via the modem with PPP (point to point protocol).
It is not possible to directly connect the BMS via the serial interface.
3.2.3.6. BACnet
A DDC4000 system parameter becomes a transportable parameter through a BACnet attachment function. This occurs for example by selecting the desired parameters in the BMS or the relevant stipulations in the parameterizing tool.
What the DDC4000 can do
Medium: BACnet via Ethernet
Ethernet (ISO8802-3)
Ports: For hexadecimal range BAC0-BACF (47808 - 47823 dec.)
The DDC4000 is a B-BC. The current PICS are found on the intranet.
Initial start-up
Ensure connection:
Ethernet cable (1:1, patch cable) on the DDC to switch or router
Ethernet cable (1:1, patch cable) from laptop to switch or router
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 26
or
Ethernet cable (cross-over) direct from DDC to laptop.
Network settings:
The customer must provide the settings even if the DDC network is not initially connected to the customer network it is advisable to obtain the setting data from the customer so that no address conflicts occur when connection is made later.
IP address: e.g. 192.168.8.60
Network mask: e.g. 255.255.0.0
Gateway: e.g. 172.20.11.75
Details on IP address:
Certain addresses and address ranges are assigned special functions:
127.0.0.1 - always the local computer/DDC 4000
10.x.x.x; 172.16.x.x - 172.31.x.x; 192.168.0.x - 192.168.255.x - private addresses that cannot make direct connect with the Internet. In corporate networks addresses are normally selected from this range. These addresses require a gateway (networked computer with Internet connection) to be able to communicate with the Internet.
Details on network mask:
This depends on the customer's corporate network and must be provided by him.
Gateway details:
The DDC4000 contacts the Internet or other networks via this computer or if this is not required the entry remains empty.
Use of routers
BACnet/IP works with so-called UDP telegrams. These are not fed through by routers and firewalls.
Thus no direct connection between BACnet clients in different network sections that are connected via routers or firewalls is possible.
The use of a BBMD (BACnet Broadcast Management Device) can resolve this problem. A BBMD packages broadcast messages in IP packages and sends these to a distance BBMD. Then a (local) broadcast is transmitted.
The same procedure applies as appropriate for the response telegram - here the remote BBMD sends an IP package to the local BBMD.
Only one BBMD may be used for each network section.
Caution! No BBMD is contained in version 1.0.x and 1.1.x. Access to an external device is necessary for this.
BACnet settings
BACnet network number: e.g. 1
Device name: e.g. DDC4000 server
Device name client: e.g. DDC4000 client
Vendor name: Kieback&Peter (fixed entry)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 27
Vendor ID: 39 (fixed entry)
Device ID: e.g. 1
Device ID Client: e.g. 2
Model name: DDC4200
Communication: o UDP/P, o Ethernet
Operating mode: o Server, o Client, o Both
UDP port: 0xBAC 0
Details on BACnet network number:
The BACnet network number is assigned by the plant administrator and is in the range 1...65535.
The BACnet network number is used to logically differentiate between various BACnet networks.
As 6 different data link layers are supported the BACnet network number is used to differentiate for example a BACnet/IP network from a network based on RS485. So-called routing takes place between the various networks in order to transport information via various layers.
Device name:
Name of the BACnet server to be integrated in the DDC, must be unique.
Device ID must be unique.
Operating mode
The DDC4000 Central Unit is currently working as a server.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems central unit bus (Ethernet) 3.2. - 28
Summary
As early as the plans it should be ascertained who stipulates the required network and BACnet settings. These should be queried and documented using the following list:
Devices
1. DDC4200
2. DDC4200
...
BMS
IP address Mask Gateway BACnet network number
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 29
3.4. control cabinet bus
3.4.1. General
3.4.1.1. Installation
One peculiarity must be observed during installation:
For the BMD and BMA bus modules the electricity supply and the CAN bus can be looped through the modules using a cascade plug.
3.4.1.3. Power supply
Performance data DDC4000
Device AC
BMD4032 90 mA
BMD4064 90 mA
BMA4024 280 mA
DC
100 mA
130 mA
24 V DC inverse-polarity protection for all existing
3.4.2. BMA4024
Function summary
All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type.
Below the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub-issues in the bus module.
The module is usually created via planning. This may also take place by logging on such a module to the control cabinet or field bus.
After creating a BMA4024 other objects are installed automatically.
This results in the following object structure:
01 <central unit>
101 <Module> BMA4024
00 <plant> (always 00)
00 <group> (always 00)
P.01 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 1
P.02 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 2
...
P.24 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 24
SY_Module.01 <Object.Index> (general information on the module)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 30
For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined. For example this switches a contact input to a contact output.
Function description
Module address
The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its object. Modules on the CAN bus
1 of the central control unit occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116, according to the bus addresses 1 to 99. The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 - they occupy the technical addresses 201 to 216.
Please note: The issues of the 1st CAN bus are handled by the system object under //
000/00/00/SY_CAN.01. SY_CAN.02 is responsible for the 2nd CAN bus.
Clamp depiction
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
All functions of a logical terminal are handled from the corresponding Pin object.
The logical contact connections (logical terminals 1 to 24 (b1 to b24 or Y1 to Y24) match the Pin objects P.01 to P.24. The number of the physical contact connection (screw terminal number) does not match a Pin object.
(e.g.: screw terminal number 55 = logical terminal 1 = P.01)
P.xx/Pin type selection determines which function objects are attached to the Pin object.
Analog input P.xx/CAI.01, Analog output P.xx/CAO.01
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
Each terminal can be configured to an analog input for various sensor types or to an analog output with acknowledgement.
The sensor type is selected from P.xx/CAI.01/SType. The selection parameter provides all the options for the bus module. The terminal's sensor value is available via P.xx/CAI.01/b.
The unit depends on the sensor type set and the current module firmware. The value is "invalid" for a sensor break or short circuit. Possible values for the BMA4024 (details under "sensor types"):
Sensor type
Value range and unit
0..10V, KP10, Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000 (DIN), Ni1000 (L&G), KP250, ML2
The output value is expected on P.xx/CAO.01/Y. Unit is "%".
The returned output value is available onP.xx/CAO.01/y, unit is %.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 31
General parameters SY_Module.01
(Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module.)
In SY_Module.01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored.
Peculiarities:
899 = Version number of the firmware module
Active = The module is reachable and has full function. (If the central unit loses contact with the bus module, SY_Module.01/Active is set to 0.)
DubAdr = The module notifies a double address.
malfunction = The module notifies a malfunction. (If the module detects a malfunction itself sets
SY_Module.01/malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module.01/Err No.)
ErrNo = malfunction code. Warnings and malfunction messages are coded here. The importance can only be queried in the R&S.
Terminal occupancy
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus
3.4.3. BMD4032
3.4. - 32
Function summary
All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type.
Below the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub-issues in the bus module.
The module is usually created via planning. This may also take place by logging on such a module to the control cabinet or field bus.
After creating a BMD other objects are installed automatically.
This results in the following object structure:
01 <central unit>
101 <Module> BMD
00 <plant> (always 00)
00 <group> (always 00)
P.01 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 1
P.02 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 2
...
P.30 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 30
...
SY_Module.01 <Object.Index> (general information on the module)
For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined. For example this switches a contact input to a contact output.
Function description
Module address
The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects. Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116, as per the bus addresses 1 to
16. The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 - they occupy the technical addresses 201 to
216.
Note: The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under//000/00/00/SY_CAN.01. SY_CAN.02 is responsible for the second CAN bus.
Clamp depiction
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
All logical terminal functions are handled from the corresponding Pin object.
The logical contact connections (logical terminals) 1 to 32/64 (k1 to k32/64 or K1 to K32/64) match the Pin objects P.01 to P.32/64. The number of the physical contact connection (screw terminal number) does not match a Pin object.
(e.g.: screw terminal number 4 = logical terminal 1 = P.01)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 33
P.xx/Pin type selection determines which function objects (sub-objects) are attached to the Pin object. The module object depends on a CDI (digital input function) and a CDO (digital output function).
Digital input P.xx/CDI.01, Digital output P.xx/CDO.01
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
Each terminal is configurable to the digital input or digital output with acknowledgement.
The digital input value is available from P.xx/CDI.01/k. The output value is expected on
P.xx/CDO.01/K. The returned value from the output is available on P.xx/CDO.01/k.
General parameters SY_Module.01
(Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module.)
In SY_Module.01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored.
Peculiarities:
899 = Version number of the firmware module
Active = The module is reachable and has full function. (If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module.01/Active is set to 0.)
DubAdr = The module notifies a double address.
malfunction = The module notifies a malfunction. (If the module detects a malfunction itself it sets
SY_Module.01/malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module.01/Err No.)
ErrNo = malfunction code. Warnings and malfunction messages are coded here. The importance can only be queried in the R&S.
Terminal occupancy
3.4.4. BMD4064
Function summary
All functions of a bus module are summarized under a module of this type.
Below the module several objects and their parameters exist to handle the sub-issues in the bus module.
The module is usually created via planning. This may also take place by logging on such a module to
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 34
the control cabinet or field bus.
After creating a BMD other objects are installed automatically.
This results in the following object structure:
01 <central unit>
101 <Module> BMD
00 <plant> (always 00)
00 <group> (always 00)
P.01 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 1
P.02 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 2
...
P.30 <Object.Index> Pin object for contact 30
...
SY_Module.01 <Object.Index> (general information on the module)
For this a PIN object represents a container in which the contact is defined. For example this switches a contact input to a contact output.
Function description
Module address
The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects. Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116, as per the bus addresses 1 to
16. The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 - they occupy the technical addresses 201 to
216.
Note: The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under//000/00/00/SY_CAN.01. SY_CAN.02 is responsible for the second CAN bus.
Clamp depiction
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
All logical terminal functions are handled from the corresponding Pin object.
The logical contact connections (logical terminals) 1 to 32/64 (k1 to k32/64 or K1 to K32/64) match the Pin objects P.01 to P.32/64. The number of the physical contact connection (screw terminal number) does not match a Pin object.
(e.g.: screw terminal number 4 = logical terminal 1 = P.01)
P.xx/Pin type selection determines which function objects (sub-objects) are attached to the Pin object. The module object depends on a CDI (digital input function) and a CDO (digital output function).
Digital input P.xx/CDI.01, Digital output P.xx/CDO.01
(Refer also to the description of the Pin object.)
Each terminal is configurable to the digital input or digital output with acknowledgement.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 35
The digital input value is available from P.xx/CDI.01/k. The output value is expected on
P.xx/CDO.01/K. The returned value from the output is available on P.xx/CDO.01/k.
General parameters SY_Module.01
(Refer also to the description of the system objectSY_Module.)
In SY_Module.01 the general parameters that each module offers are stored.
Peculiarities:
899 = Version number of the firmware module
Active = The module is reachable and has full function. (If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module.01/Active is set to 0.)
DubAdr = The module notifies a double address.
malfunction = The module notifies a malfunction. (If the module detects a malfunction itself it sets
SY_Module.01/malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code to SY_Module.01/Err No.)
ErrNo = malfunction code. Warnings and malfunction messages are coded here. The importance can only be queried in the R&S.
Terminal occupancy
3.4.5. SBM51_04
The module object MO_SBM51_04 is a special type of object MO_SBM51. It is produced when subgroup /04 is assigned to object MO_SBM51.
Special behavior for malfunctions
If the module detects a malfunction itself sets SY_Module.01/malfunction to 1 and provides and malfunction code "1" to SY_Module.01/Err No.
If the central unit loses contact with the bus module SY_Module.01/Active is set to 0.
Logical address structure
Technical address
Example:
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus
103 SBM51_04
00 plant
00group
SY_SBM51.01 SY_SBM51
Parameter for bus release and cyclical reading
...
SY_Module.01 SY_Module
...
b1 plant
00group
H004.01 H004
Parameters for counting medium, device query
H004.02 H004
Para
...
H004.32 H004
Para
Dialing SBM51
3.4. - 36
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus
Configuring the SBM51
3.4. - 37
System object SY_SBM51.01 summarizes the special requests of the SBM51 family. Bus release and cycle time are placed here.
Each H004 is responsible for precisely one of the maximum 32 M bus counters.
The counter type can be stipulated in H004. This stipulation creates the parameters that belong to the connected counters etc.
Third party devices on the
SBM51 are fond in Appendix
"b1". In this example H004 for counter.
System object SY_Module.01 is responsible for a module's general issues. For details refer to the description of the SY_Module.
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 38 technical bus address
Module bus address on the SBM bus
//xxx
The bus module address corresponds to the technical address of its objects. Modules on the CAN bus 1 of the central device occupy the technical addresses 101 to 116, as per the bus addresses 1 to
99. The same applies to the modules on CAN bus 2 - they occupy the technical addresses 201 to
216.
Note: The issues of the 1st CAN buses are handled by the system object under//000/00/00/SY_CAN.01. SY_CAN.02 is responsible for the second CAN bus.
Selection of specific SBM51
//xxx/00/00/SY_SBM51.01/Config
Module SBM51/04 is selected. Another device can be selected. This should be done carefully as it is not possible to check for an appropriate SBM device! The SBM device itself only supplies the information that it is a SBM51 but not whether it is a SBM51/04 or another device.
M bus counter bus address
//xxx/b1/00/H004.yy
32 gateway objects type H004 are created as a SBM51/04 can process up to 32 M bus counters.
Each gateway object is responsible for one M bus counter.
The bus address is expressed in the gateway object index. The SBM51/04 only supports the M bus counters with addresses from 1 to 32 although the M bus knows addresses from 1 to 250.
Function description of object //xxx/00/00/SY_SBM51.01
Special SBM51 parameter: SY_SBM51.01
In SY_SBM51.01 all parameters are stored that are important for the SBM51 as a whole but are too special for the SY_Module.
Config = Select the specific SBM51 for which the module object is responsible.
The selection is now on SMB51/04.
Enable = Bus release
Cycle = Bus cycle time. 0 = 24h, 1 = 2min.
(Compare description of the system objectSY_SBM51.)
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 39
Function description of the device objects //xxx/b1/00/H004.yy
M bus counter with bus address yy: //xxx/b1/00/H004.yy
Each object is responsible for exactly one M bus counter.
Config = Selection of consumption medium.
After selection a second Config parameter is visible from the following one.
Config EL = Selection of an electricity counter from a list.
Parameter becomes visible if the medium "electricity" is selected with Config.
Config WM = Selection of a heat volume counter from a list.
Parameter becomes visible if the medium "heat" is selected with Config.
Config WA = Selection of a water counter from a list.
Parameter becomes visible if the medium "water" is selected with Config.
(Compare description of gateway object H004.)
Function summary
Jedes installierte Objekt ist für genau ein Gerät am M-Bus zuständig. Der Objekt-Index der technischen Adresse ist mit der Busadresse am M-Bus identisch. Über den Parameter Config wird die Geräte-Klasse des konkreten M-Bus-Zählers ausgewählt, woraufhin ein zweiter Config-Parameter
"ConfigYY" installiert wird, über den der Geräte-Typ ausgewählt wird. Aufgrund beider Auswahlen wird ein passendes Subobjekt installiert. ConfigYY steht für ConfigEL, ConfigWA oder ConfigWM.
Siehe dort. Die Subobjekte CD_WM und CD_WA stehen für die "Generischen Parameter" der
Geräte-Klasse, das sind die Parameter, die wirklich jeder Wäremzähler bzw. jeder Wasserzähler bieten sollte. Alle anderen Subobjekte haben mehr Parameter als nur die generischen.
Parameters
No.
Active
Anfrage
name of parameter aktiv
Device active
Counter inquiry
Config
Medium
Counting medium
ConfigEL
Elt-Typ
Elt-Counter type
parameter typ
actual value boolean set point boolean set point multistate
min max init unit
--0 --
--
--
--
5
0
0 set point multistate
-2 0
-value,text
0,none
1,Electricity counter
2,Heat counter
3,Water counter
4,DDC3000-Menu value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems control cabinet bus 3.4. - 40
No.
ConfigWA
name of parameter
H²O-Typ
Water counter type
ConfigWM
WMZ-Typ
Heat counter type
parameter typ
set point multistate set point multistate
min max init unit
-3 0 value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum
2,Allmeas ISWZ
-2 0 value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum
Version 05/06
Plant components and bus systems Field bus 3.5. - 41
3.5. Field bus
3.5.1. General
3.5.2. Modules
The field bus modules of the DDC3000 system are integrated step by step into the DDC4000 system.
They are subject to the same connection conditions and wiring guidelines. These modules only
"understand" an address assignment up to 63.
The circular or intranet state which modules have already been integrated.
Version 05/06
Software structure
4. Software structure
4. - 42
4. Software structure ....................................................................................................................... 42
4.1. General, background ................................................................................................................. 48
4.1.1. Addressing ................................................................................................................................ 48
4.1.1.1. Addressing examples ............................................................................................................ 53
4.1.2. Parameter types ....................................................................................................................... 56
4.1.3. Object principles ....................................................................................................................... 60
4.2. Basic functions .......................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.1. central unit address .................................................................................................................. 62
4.2.2. Time administration .................................................................................................................. 62
4.2.2.1. S118 Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.3. Behind the front cover ............................................................................................................... 64
4.2.4. Units .......................................................................................................................................... 66
4.3. Objects ........................................................................................................................................ 72
4.3.1. General ..................................................................................................................................... 72
4.3.2. Software objects ....................................................................................................................... 72
4.3.2.1. What are software objects? ................................................................................................... 72
4.3.2.2. All software objects ................................................................................................................ 74
4.3.2.3. S066 limiting value ................................................................................................................. 77
4.3.2.4. S083 Arithmetic ..................................................................................................................... 79
4.3.2.5. S126 MMM storage ................................................................................................................ 82
4.3.2.9. S238 Basic program PID (ventilation) ................................................................................... 84
4.3.2.9.1. S301 Y limitation ................................................................................................................. 90
4.3.2.9.2. S302 Y set .......................................................................................................................... 97
4.3.2.9.3. S303 Cascade .................................................................................................................. 100
4.3.2.9.4. S304 start up switching ..................................................................................................... 105
4.3.2.9.5. S305 Optimization ventilation ........................................................................................... 109
4.3.2.9.6. S306 Free night cooling .................................................................................................... 112
4.3.2.9.7. S307 Constant frost protection ......................................................................................... 117
4.3.2.9.8. S308 Minimum room temperature .................................................................................... 120
4.3.2.9.9. S309 Standstill .................................................................................................................. 122
4.3.2.9.10. S310 Energy selection .................................................................................................... 125
4.3.2.9.11. S311 Sequence change ................................................................................................. 129
4.3.2.9.12. S312 Limitation ............................................................................................................... 130
4.3.2.9.13. S313 SP switching .......................................................................................................... 136
4.3.2.9.14. S314 Set point glide ........................................................................................................ 139
Version 05/06
Software structure 4. - 43
4.3.2.9.15. S315 Set point correction ............................................................................................... 142
4.3.2.9.16. S316 Set point remote control ........................................................................................ 145
4.3.2.9.17. S317 XP switching .......................................................................................................... 148
4.3.2.10. S239 Basic program heating ............................................................................................. 150
4.3.2.10.1. Graphical summaries ...................................................................................................... 158
4.3.2.10.2. S300 Optimization .......................................................................................................... 161
4.3.2.10.3. S301 Y limitation ............................................................................................................. 168
4.3.2.10.4. S302 Y set ...................................................................................................................... 175
4.3.2.10.5. S312 Limitation ............................................................................................................... 178
4.3.2.10.6. S313 SP switching .......................................................................................................... 184
4.3.2.10.7. S315 Set point correction ............................................................................................... 187
4.3.2.10.8. S316 Set point remote control ........................................................................................ 190
4.3.2.10.9. S317 XP switching .......................................................................................................... 193
4.3.2.10.10. S318 Room correction .................................................................................................. 195
4.3.2.10.11. S319 Standby ............................................................................................................... 198
4.3.2.10.12. S348 Adaptive heating curve ........................................................................................ 201
4.3.2.11. S321 Enthalpy ................................................................................................................... 204
4.3.2.12. S322 Sequence ................................................................................................................. 205
4.3.2.13. S323 Binary valuation ........................................................................................................ 208
4.3.2.14. S324 Scaling ...................................................................................................................... 210
4.3.2.15. S325 MinMaxAverage ........................................................................................................ 213
4.3.2.16. S326 Time gliding .............................................................................................................. 215
4.3.2.17. S327 Pulse counting .......................................................................................................... 218
4.3.2.18. S328 Operation hours ........................................................................................................ 220
4.3.2.19. S329 Heat volume P .......................................................................................................... 221
4.3.2.20. S330 Heat volume DT ....................................................................................................... 223
4.3.2.21. S333 Ring counter ............................................................................................................. 226
4.3.2.22. S334 Spreadsheet function ............................................................................................... 229
4.3.2.23. S335 Sensor switching ...................................................................................................... 232
4.3.2.24. S337 Basic program fixed value ........................................................................................ 233
4.3.2.25. S338 Gliding ...................................................................................................................... 237
4.3.2.26. S342 Pulse output ............................................................................................................. 238
4.3.2.27. S343 E-Max ....................................................................................................................... 240
4.3.2.28. S344 Degree daily figure ................................................................................................... 251
4.3.2.29. S347 E-Max French ........................................................................................................... 252
4.3.2.30. S901 Signal generator ....................................................................................................... 264
4.3.3. Hardware objects .................................................................................................................... 266
4.3.3.1. What are hardware objects? ................................................................................................ 266
4.3.3.2. All hardware objects ............................................................................................................ 268
Version 05/06
Software structure 4. - 44
4.3.3.3. Priorities and signals ............................................................................................................ 270
4.3.3.4. Command execution check CEC ......................................................................................... 271
4.3.3.5. Operating hours ................................................................................................................... 272
4.3.3.6. Malfunction catch ................................................................................................................. 273
4.3.3.7. Malfunction message output ................................................................................................ 274
4.3.3.8. H301 Steam moistening unit constant ................................................................................. 275
4.3.3.10. H401 Electrical air heater single stage .............................................................................. 281
4.3.3.11. H402 Electrical air heater 2 stage ..................................................................................... 286
4.3.3.12. H403 Electrical air heater 3 stage ..................................................................................... 293
4.3.3.13. H404 Electrical air heater constant .................................................................................... 300
4.3.3.14. H501 Cover open/closed ................................................................................................... 305
4.3.3.15. H502 Fire protection cover with drive ................................................................................ 309
4.3.3.16. H503 Cover 3-point ............................................................................................................ 314
4.3.3.17. H504 Cover constant ......................................................................................................... 317
4.3.3.18. H601 Fan single stage ....................................................................................................... 320
4.3.3.19. H602 Fan 2 stage .............................................................................................................. 326
4.3.3.21. H604 fan constant FC/bypass ........................................................................................... 334
4.3.3.22. H611 Valve open/closed .................................................................................................... 341
4.3.3.23. H612 Valve bus drive ......................................................................................................... 346
4.3.3.24. H613 Valve 3-point ............................................................................................................ 349
4.3.3.25. H614 Valve constant .......................................................................................................... 353
4.3.3.26. H701 Burner single stage .................................................................................................. 356
4.3.3.27. H702 Burner 2 stage .......................................................................................................... 363
4.3.3.28. H703 Burner modulating 3 point ........................................................................................ 371
4.3.3.29. H704 Burner modulating .................................................................................................... 379
4.3.3.30. H801 Volume flow regulator constant ................................................................................ 387
4.3.3.31. H802 Volume flow regulator constant ................................................................................ 391
4.3.3.32. H901 Pump single stage ................................................................................................... 394
4.3.3.33. H903 Pump variable transformer ....................................................................................... 401
4.3.3.34. H904 Pump BUS ............................................................................................................... 409
4.3.3.35. H905 Double pump ............................................................................................................ 413
4.3.4. Basic objects (flags, timers, AE, AA, BE, BA) ........................................................................ 421
4.3.4.1. BO L - Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 421
4.3.4.2. BO M - Markers ................................................................................................................... 422
4.3.4.3. BO P - Pin ............................................................................................................................ 424
4.3.4.4. BO S - Switches ................................................................................................................... 426
4.3.4.5. BO S_11 - Switch single stage ON/OFF ............................................................................. 426
4.3.4.6. BO S_12 - Confirmation switch ........................................................................................... 427
4.3.4.7. BO S_21 - 2 push-button MANUAL/AUTO, ON/OFF .......................................................... 427
Version 05/06
Software structure 4. - 45
4.3.4.8. BO S_22 2 push-buttons AUTO, Manual On ....................................................................... 428
4.3.4.9. BO S_23 (as 22) .................................................................................................................. 428
4.3.4.10. BO S_31 - 3 push-buttons AUTO, Manual off, Manual on ................................................ 429
4.3.4.11. BO S_32 - 3 push-buttons AUTO/manual, Level1 ON/OFF, Level 2 ON/OFF ................. 429
4.3.4.12. BO S_41 - 4 Push-buttons AUTO, OFF, Manual Level 1, Level 2 .................................... 430
4.3.4.13. BO S_42 - 4 Push-buttons AUTO, DAY, NIGHT, OFF ..................................................... 431
4.3.4.14. BO S_51 - 5 Push-buttons Auto, off, Manual Level 1, 2, 3 ............................................... 431
4.3.4.15. BO T - Timer ...................................................................................................................... 432
4.3.5. System objects ....................................................................................................................... 433
4.3.5.1. System objects .................................................................................................................... 433
4.3.5.2. SY_Module Module settings general ................................................................................... 435
4.3.5.3. SY_Config plant configuration ............................................................................................. 436
4.3.5.4. SY_CAN CAN bus ............................................................................................................... 438
4.3.5.7. SY_Host ............................................................................................................................... 440
4.3.5.8. SY_FAX ............................................................................................................................... 441
4.3.5.9. SY_MsgMan ........................................................................................................................ 442
4.3.5.10. SY_EMAIL ......................................................................................................................... 442
4.3.5.11. Sy_Clock ............................................................................................................................ 443
4.3.5.12. SY_Serial ........................................................................................................................... 444
4.3.5.13. Sy_ModConf ...................................................................................................................... 445
4.3.5.14. SY_Network ....................................................................................................................... 446
4.3.6. Attachment functions .............................................................................................................. 448
4.3.6.1. F001 Scaling ........................................................................................................................ 449
4.3.6.3. F003 Limitation .................................................................................................................... 451
4.3.6.4. F004 catch ........................................................................................................................... 451
4.3.6.5. F005 Command execution check ........................................................................................ 451
4.3.6.6. F006 Damping ..................................................................................................................... 452
4.3.6.7. F007 Delay ........................................................................................................................... 453
4.3.6.9. F017 Object status .............................................................................................................. 453
4.3.6.12. FSelMO Selection message set ........................................................................................ 454
4.3.6.13. FAIMO Sensor monitoring ................................................................................................. 456
4.3.6.14. Set parameters .................................................................................................................. 457
4.3.6.14.1. FSource .......................................................................................................................... 457
4.3.6.14.3. F013 Simulation value .................................................................................................... 457
4.3.6.14.4. F014 Test value .............................................................................................................. 458
4.3.6.15. BACnet function objects .................................................................................................... 458
4.3.6.15.1. FB_AI analog input ......................................................................................................... 458
4.3.6.15.2. FB_AO analog output ..................................................................................................... 459
4.3.6.15.3. FB_AV analog parameters ............................................................................................. 459
Version 05/06
Software structure 4. - 46
4.3.6.15.4. FB_BI binary input .......................................................................................................... 460
4.3.6.15.5. FB_BO binary output ...................................................................................................... 460
4.3.6.15.6. FB_BV binary parameters .............................................................................................. 460
4.3.6.15.7. FB_MI multistate input .................................................................................................... 461
4.3.6.15.8. FB_MO multistate output ................................................................................................ 461
4.3.6.15.9. FB_MV multistate parameters ........................................................................................ 462
4.3.7. Sub-objects ............................................................................................................................. 462
4.3.7.1. Sub-objects .......................................................................................................................... 462
4.3.7.2. CAI analog input .................................................................................................................. 464
4.3.7.3. CAO analog output .............................................................................................................. 464
4.3.7.4. CDI binary input ................................................................................................................... 465
4.3.7.5. CDO binary output ............................................................................................................... 465
4.3.7.6. CModMO .............................................................................................................................. 465
4.3.8. Device objects ........................................................................................................................ 466
4.3.8.1. Gateway Objects ................................................................................................................. 466
4.3.8.2. Volume counter .................................................................................................................... 466
4.3.8.2.1. CD_WA volume counter ................................................................................................... 466
4.3.8.2.2. CD_WA Volume counter 01 ............................................................................................. 467
4.3.8.2.3. CD_WA Volume counter 02 ............................................................................................. 467
4.3.8.3. Electrical counter ................................................................................................................. 468
4.3.8.3.1. CD_WM Electrical counter ............................................................................................... 468
4.3.8.3.2. CD_WM Electrical counter 01 .......................................................................................... 468
4.3.8.4. SBMs ................................................................................................................................... 469
4.3.8.4.1. SBM51 .............................................................................................................................. 469
4.4. parameterizing ......................................................................................................................... 471
4.4.1. Plant structuring ...................................................................................................................... 471
4.4.1.1. Plants ................................................................................................................................... 471
4.4.1.2. Groups ................................................................................................................................. 471
4.4.2. Malfunction message management ........................................................................................ 471
4.4.2.1. Plant messages ................................................................................................................... 471
4.4.2.1.1. Messages ......................................................................................................................... 471
4.4.2.1.3. Message memory SY_MsgMan ........................................................................................ 474
4.4.2.1.4. Output definition SY_MsgOut ........................................................................................... 475
4.4.2.1.5. Selection message set FSelMO ....................................................................................... 476
4.4.2.1.6. Sensor failure message FAIMO ....................................................................................... 478
4.4.2.1.7. Modem configuration SY_ModConf .................................................................................. 479
4.4.2.1.10. Plant status - signalizing ................................................................................................. 481
4.4.2.1.11. SMS ................................................................................................................................ 482
4.4.2.1.12. Email ............................................................................................................................... 483
Version 05/06
Software structure 4. - 47
4.4.2.1.13. Fax recipient SY_FAX .................................................................................................... 484
4.4.2.2. Plant messages ................................................................................................................... 485
4.4.3. Creating the customer interface ............................................................................................. 486
4.4.4. Integrating touch screen switches .......................................................................................... 488
4.4.5. Manual analysis ...................................................................................................................... 490
4.4.6. Converting multistate to binary ............................................................................................... 491
4.4.7. Network return ........................................................................................................................ 493
4.5. Service level, data (restore) backup, updates ...................................................................... 495
4.5.1. Service level ............................................................................................................................ 495
4.5.1.1. Service level, access to parameterizing .............................................................................. 495
4.5.1.2. User administration .............................................................................................................. 496
4.5.2. Import data, backups, software updates ................................................................................ 497
4.5.2.1. Cold start, warm start, reset ................................................................................................ 497
4.5.2.2. Import data - PS4000 .......................................................................................................... 498
4.5.2.3. Data (restore) backup CF card ............................................................................................ 504
4.5.2.4. Data format .......................................................................................................................... 507
4.5.2.5. Plant software update .......................................................................................................... 507
4.5.2.6. Update bootloader ............................................................................................................... 508
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 48
4.1. General, background
4.1.1. Addressing
Address structure
In the DDC4000 system a technical address is used to structure and administrate data. This is based on the structure for administrating technical plants (heating, cooling and control units) and their individual components. It represents logical and physical units and their dependencies.
The functions in the DDC central unit are strictly classified by plants. This may for example be a heating plant with 2 heating circuits (stat. heating circuit, WWB). Within one plant parts may be grouped according to logically related functions. One such group for example is a heating circuit with the pump, valve and temperature sensors. The function of such a plant element within the group is described by objects. An object usually comprises input parameters, function and output parameters.
A technical address in the DDC4000 system usually has the following structure:
(Address components marked in blue are not available for parameters.)
The slash "/" is always used as a separator in the address.
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 49
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 50
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 51
More detailed explanation
Address element <central unit>
The central unit is the first element in the technical address. It can have a value in the range between
1 and 99. If this address element is not stated the own central unit is addressed. The "/" separator is retained before the individual central unit and module address elements. This results in the address:
"//Module"
Value Notes
01...99 If your own central device is to be address "//" is enough for central addressing
Address element <Module>
The second address element in the technical address is the module address. There are various value ranges for this element and their meaning is shown in the following table. Each module has a unique number within its central device.
Value
000
Notes
Address the central unit module DDC4000 itself (controls, regulators, plant information)
001...099 internal modules e.g. I/O card 1 = 001
101...199 Module addresses for the 1st CAN bus; 101...116 for S-Bus; 101...163 (future plans 101...199) for
F-Bus
201...299 Module addresses for the 2nd CAN bus; 201..0.216 for S-Bus; 201..0.263 (future plans 201..0.299) for F-Bus
Address element <plant>
The plant is the third element in the technical address. It can have a value in the range between 0 and 99.
Value Notes
00 Used to transfer to the DDC4000's plant information or to achieve lower hierarchy addresses.
01...99
Stating the plants within the module.
Address element <Group>
The group address is an organizational criterion within one module. It can be used in any way. Values between 0 and 99 are permitted here. The number of a group is unique within a module. Each module has as standard the group with number 00.
Values Notes
00...99
Free order unit (containers). It contains one or more objects.
Address element <Object.Index>
The unique address of an object is combined out of the address of the object type and the object index. The address element "object" describes the object type. The object type can be available repeatedly in one group. The uniqueness of the object within the group is guaranteed by the object
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 52
index "Index". The object index always follows the object, separated by a point.
A difference is made between basic objects, hardware objects, software objects and system objects.
The differentiation is made by the first letter of the object type:
Value Notes
L, M, P,S,T... Basic objects lamp, marker, pins, switches, timers. Further characters may follow after the relevant starting letter. In any case the term ends with a period followed by a two digit index number (01...99).
Hxxx.yy
Sxxx.yy
Hardware object. "H" code followed by a three-digit number (x) and subsequent index code (y).
Software object. "S" code followed by a three-digit number (x) and subsequent index code (y).
SY_...
system object. Other characters my follow after the "SY_" code. In any case the term ends with a period followed by a two digit index number (01...99).
Address element <Sub-object>
This address element is only provided for certain objects. It is integrated under the object.
The sub-object is used to specify objects and is available only once in an object.
It contains no index.
An example for an object that provides a sub-object, is the basic object "PIN". This object implements access to the parameters, e.g. a connection terminal for a BMD. In this, for example, a contact connection can be set as an input or output.
Please note:
A "screw number" (i.e. a number of the physical contact connection), e.g. on a BMD must not be the same as the PIN number. A PIN is not a physical but rather a logical contact connection.
Example: Screw 4 is PIN no. 1 because screws 1 to 3 are for the CAN bus.
The following table lists examples of sub-objects.
Value Notes
CAI Analog input
CAO Analog output
CDI Digital input
CDO Digital output
Address element <Parameter>
The parameter is a property of an object or sub-object. An object or sub-object comprises one or more parameters whose values influence the behavior of the object/sub-object. For this the parameter must be unique in its object/sub-object. The parameter is an alphanumeric chain of characters (e.g. "5891", "b", or "TAUdown")
Address element <Function object.Index>
Parameters may contain function objects that change them or extend their function. A function object may occur several times under a parameter. The unique nature of the function object within the parameter is guaranteed by an index. So for example you can attach to parameter "Source outside
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 53
temperature" (5103) in the basic heating program a "Source" (FSource) function object in order to transfer the source value to parameter 5103.
Address element <parameter> of the function object
The parameter is a property of the function object. A function object is comprised of one or more parameters whose value influence the behavior of the function object. For this the parameter must be unique in its function object. The parameter is an alphanumeric chain of characters (e.g. "s")
4.1.1.1. Addressing examples
Example 1:
access to parameter "command" e.g. for backing up data
Central unit
For central unit 01:
/01
Module
Access to data backup is provided in the DDC4000 system information:
/01/000
Plant
Access to the data backup is through plant 00:
/01/000/00
Group
Access to data backup is through group 00:
/01/000/00/00
Object.Index
Access to data backup is guaranteed by object SY_Datsi:
/01/000/00/00/SY_Datsi.01
Sub-object
No sub-object is required for access to the "command" parameter. Therefore no sub-object is used.
Parameters
Access to the "command" parameter:
/01/000/00/00/SY_Datsi.01/Command
Function object.Index
A function object is not required for access to the "command" parameter
Parameter (of the function object)
A function object parameter is not required for access to the "command" parameter
Example 2:
Access to the "s" parameter as the source address for a "Q TO" parameter in basic heating program
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 54
Central unit
For central unit 02:
/02
Module
Access to the basic heating program is by regulating/controlling the DDC4000 and thus via Module
000:
/02/000
Plant
Access to the basic heating program is via the selection of for example a heating plant (01):
/02/000/01
Group
Access to the basic heating program is via the selection of for example a group control (01):
/02/000/01/01
Object.Index
Access to the basic heating program :
/02/000/01/01/S239.01
Sub-object
The source is located in the function object of the "Q TO" parameter in the basic heating program object. Therefore no sub-object is addressed.
Parameters
Access to the "Q TO" parameter of object S239.01 (Basic heating program):
/02/000/01/01/S239.01/5103
Function object.Index
A function object that extends or changes the properties or includes additional functions is attached to this "Q TO" parameter (e.g. stipulating a source for the value in the "Q TO" parameter):
/02/000/01/01/S239.01/5103/FSource.01
Parameter (of the function object)
You can stipulate the properties of the function object etc. with these parameters. In the example parameter "s" is access and this contains the source address of the analog value :
/02/000/01/01/S239.01/5103/FSource.01/s
Example 3:
Access to a "b" parameter in the PIN object as analog input from the DDC4000 analog card
Central unit
For central unit 03:
/03
Module
Access to the analog card of the DDC4000 is via the module address 001:
/03/001
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 55
Plant
The analog card itself has no plants so plant 0 is selected (access to the PINs always via plant 0):
/03/001/00
Group
The analog card itself has no group so group 0 is selected (access to the PINs always via group 0):
/03/001/00/00
Object.Index
Access to the PIN object and therefore to the logical contact connection:
/03/001/00/00/P.01
Sub-object
The PIN object contains a sub-object. This PIN is therefore defines as an analog input (CAI):
/03/001/00/00/P.01/CAI
Parameters
Access to the "b" parameter where the analog value is located:
/03/001/00/00/P.01/CAI/b
Function object.Index
A function object is not required for access to the "b" parameter
Parameter (of the function object)
A function object parameter is not required for access to the "b" parameter
Example 4:
Access to the "101" parameter (message output) of the function object "message set" of a PIN on e.g. a BMD4032
Central unit
For central unit 04:
/04
Module
Access to the BMD 4032 that is installed on the 1st CAN bus and as the first module:
/04/101
Plant
A BMD itself has no plant so plant 0 is selected (access to the PINs always via plant 0):
/04/101/00
Group
A BMD itself has no group so group 0 is selected (access to the PINs always via group 0):
/04/101/00/00
Object.Index
Access to the PIN object and therefore to the logical contact connection (e.g. pin 1):
/04/101/00/00/P.01
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 56
Sub-object
The pin object contains a sub-object. This pin is therefore defined as a digital input (CAI):
/04/101/00/00/P.01/CDI
Parameters
Access to the parameter "k" in which the digital logical contact status is displayed:
/04/101/00/00/P.01/CDI/k
Function object.Index
A function object is attached to this "k" parameter that extends or changes the properties or contains additional function (e.g. outputs a message in the DDC4000 if the binary value changes from "0" to
"1"):
/04/101/00/00/P.01/CDI/k/FSelMO.01
Parameter (of the function object)
You can stipulate for example the properties of the function object with these parameters. In the example parameter "101" is accessed and this contains the source address of the analog value:
/04/101/00/00/P.01/CDI/k/FSelMO.01/101
4.1.2. Parameter types
For parameterizing each object has a certain number of parameters. These parameters are shown in tabular form. The types used are described in greater detail here.
Can the parameters be deleted?
In many cases a function is switched to inactive in this way.
Source or not?
A source can be linked to each parameter in the DDC4000. The value of the source then replaces the parameter value.
In line with the importance some typical parameters always require source parameterizing. The names of these are marked with the supplement "source" or "Q". This should make locating them easier.
Summary
Integer
Floating comma digit
Binary value (Boolean)
Multistate
Selection list
String
Reference
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 57
Integer
The integer type has a maximum range of -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647. As this size can not be achieved in practice the value "infinity" is given in the table if this value range is not restricted.
A typical example of the integer type is operating hours. These are only recorded in full hours.
Example:
Par.No Parameter name Description
9
Bh
Operating hours
Operating hours counter level 1 and/or level 2
Parameter type
Set point
Integer
Min Max
0
Init Unit
+infinity 0 h
Explanation of statements:
Par.No
9
Parameter number: This number is used to address the parameter within the object. This number is not unique in the whole system!
Parameter name
Bh
Bh ges.
Parameter name: A difference is made between basic text (here "Bh") and default text (here
"operating hours"). The basic text can be a maximum of 8 characters and can be used for addressing. The default text is 15 characters long and provides a longer description. This description can be adapted to the customer's wishes.
Description set point/actual value for counting operating hours level 1 and/or level 2
The description gives information on the importance and use of the parameter as well as any peculiarities to be observed.
Parameter type
Set point
Integer
Two pieces of information are included in the "parameter type". In the top line the term " set point" or
"actual value" is found. This states whether it is a stipulated (target) value or a calculated (actual) value. As a result actual values can not be changed directly by the user.
The second line contains the parameter type, e.g. "integer" or "string".
Min
0
Min states the minimum value permitted (here 0). Sometimes this states the limitation from the DDC's technological perspective and thus not every permitted value is always appropriate.
Max
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 58
+infinity
Max state the maximum permitted value (here +infinity = 2,147,483,647 which corresponds to
245,000 years) that is permitted for this parameter.
Init
0
The value stated under "Init" matches the default for the first installation of the relevant object. Here the "0" means that the operating hours counter starts to count at "0" if it is not overwritten with a different value.
Unit h
The unit is only stated when this is appropriate. In this case "h" stands for "hours". This document also includes a list of units.
Float
The float (or floating point) type has a maximum range of -3.402823466E38 to 3.402823466E38 (E38 stands for 10 to the power of 38 or seen in a different way the comma is shifted 38 positions to the right). As this size can not be achieved in practice the value "infinity" is given in the table if this value range is not restricted.
A typical example of the float type is outside temperature. This is only recorded in °C with 3 characters after the decimal point (as for all floating numbers) and is indicated with one character after the point (varies with parameter).
Here a fictitious example:
Par.No Parameter name Description
5103
TO
TO
Parameter type
Outside temperature Actual value
Floating comma number
For general information on the states, refer to integer (above).
Min Max Init Unit
-999.000 999.000 0.000 ---
Binary value / Boolean
A binary value can only have the value 0 "false" or 1 "true". The corresponding meaning can be very different and must be taken from the documentation.
Multistate
A multistate value can depict several statuses in a parameter. So for example a controller can have the status ON, OFF or AUTO.
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 59
Par.No Parameter name
5175 Source remote control
Description Parameter type Min Max Init Unit
-Actual value
Status value
-4 1 BACnet,DDC_No.,Text
4, 0, OFF
2, 1, day
1, 9, Auto
3, 35, night
The information on the status value are more complex and so they are worth handling in greater detail:
The "unit" column lists a small table that shows the potential statuses. Here the first column
("BACnet" title" states the numbering of the statuses as used in BACnet. The BACnet standard prescribes the numbering of the available statuses from 1 consecutively to n (number of statuses).
This does not match the approach at Kieback&Peter.
The Kieback&Peter numbering is found in the second column (title "DDC no."). For Kieback&Peter numbering the same numbers always have the same meaning, which can mean that the number 0,1 and 9 (for OFF, ON, AUTO) are used.
The importance is to be read in the third column (status text).
The table is sorted by the Kieback&Peter numbering.
The "Init" column states the preset status. This is BACnet numbering!
The "Max" column indicates the highest BACnet index.
Selection list
A selection list enables you to choose from several statuses for a parameter.
Example:
Par.No
Parameter name
5127 Uncontrolled condition
Description Parameter type
-Set point pull list
Min Max Init Unit
--0 Selection list
BitPos,Text
0, YL1
1, YL2
2, YL3
3, YL4
For this the parameter is viewed in its binary depiction form. A bit (bit position) is used for each status.
In this example this means when YL2 and YL are to be selected: binary: 0110 = decimal: 6
If YL1, YL2 and YL3 are to be selected this looks as follows: binary: 0111 = decimal: 7
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 60
If you are unfamiliar with this depiction of numbers the Windows calculator (found under accessories) may help as long as it is switched to "scientific".
The default setting (column "Init") "0" means that no status is selected.
String
The "string" parameter type is always used when none of the other types offer adequate options. So this is used for telephone numbers (e.g. "+49-30-60095-0") or IP addresses (e.g. 192.168.0.1).
Source/Reference
In a reference parameter type addresses that point to other parameters from where the value is to be obtained are entered.
4.1.3. Object principles
The following image presents the key objects with a potential type of connection and use.
Version 05/06
Software structure General, background 4.1. - 61
On all inputs analog and binary sources are parameterized. These inputs initiate a regulation in the software objects; links are processed in the hardware objects. The output signals are then sent to the terminals via PIN objects.
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.2. Basic functions
4.2.1. central unit address
Basic functions 4.2. - 62
4.2.2. Time administration
Please refer to the user manual for entering and operating the time control, the description is written here from the object perspective.
4.2.2.1. S118 Schedule
Activation
Function summary
Mit Hilfe des Software-Objektes „SO_ScheduleSE“ ist es möglich, sowohl täglich wiederkehrende
Ereignisse (Wochenprogramme) als auch einmalige Zeitpunkte (Sondernutzungszeiten) zu beschreiben.
Der Zeitplan besitzt eine Schaltzeittabelle, die die Schaltzeiten aller Ausgänge (z.B. Regler, Schalter) verwaltet. Ein Eintrag in dieser Liste besteht aus dem Wochentag („Mo“ - „So“), der Uhrzeit im
Format hh:mm (00:00 – 23:59), einer Liste von Ausgängen die dieser Eintrag beeinflussen soll, sowie den Wert, den jeder in der Liste befindliche Ausgang annehmen soll. Die einzelnen Schaltzeitpunkte können jedoch nur durch eine Bedienoberfläche angezeigt, editiert oder gelöscht werden.
Version 05/06
Software structure Basic functions 4.2. - 63
Version 05/06
Software structure Basic functions
4.2.3. Behind the front cover
Short description of the elements behind the DDC4200 front cover
4.2. - 64
Version 05/06
Software structure Basic functions 4.2. - 65
Version 05/06
Software structure Basic functions
4.2.4. Units
Summary of usable units in the DDC
5
6
7
8
9
No. unit
0
1
2
3
4 m² ft² mA
A
Ω
V kV
MV
VA kVA
10 MVA
11 VA Reac
12 KA Reac
13 MVA Reac
14 cos φ
16 J
17 kJ
18 Wh
19 kWh
20 BTU
description
Quadratmeter [m2] square-feet [ft2]
Milliampere [mA]
Ampere [A]
Ohm
Volt (V)
Kilovolt (kV)
Megavolt (MV)
Volt Ampere (VA)
Kilovolt Ampere (kVA)
Megavolt amperes
Volt amperes reactive
Kilovolt amperes reactive
Megavolt ampere reactive
Degrees phase (Phasenverschiebung)
Joule (J)
Kilojoule (KJ)
Watt-Stunden (Wh)
Kilowatt-Stunden (KWh)
BTUs
22 ton h
23 J/kg dry air
Tonnen-Stunden
Joule pro Kg tockener Luft
24 BTU/p dry air btu per pound dry air
25 1/h
26 1/min
Zyklen pro Stunde
Zyklen pro Minute
27 Hz
28 g H²O/kg
29 %
Hertz (Hz)
Gramm Wasser pro Kilogramm trockener Luft
Relative Feuchte (%rF)
Version 05/06
4.2. - 66
Software structure Basic functions 4.2. - 67
49 MW
50 BTU/h
51 HP
52 t
53 Pa
54 kPa
55 bar
56 lbs/in²
57 mm H²O
58 in H²O
59 mm Hg
39 kg
40 lbs
41 t
42 kg/s
43 kg/min
44 kg/h
45 lbs/min
46 lbs/h
47 W
48 kW
No. unit
30 mm
31 m
32 in
33 ft
description
Millimeter (mm)
Meter
Inches
Feet
34 W/ft²
35 W/m²
Watts per square foot
Watt pro Quadratmeter
36 lm Lumen (Lichtfluss)
38 Foot Candels Microsoft Bookshelf (American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language) defines foot-candle as a unit of measure of the intensity of light falling on a surface, equal to one lumen per square foot.
Kilogramm
Pounds mass
Tonen
Kilogramm pro Sekunde
Kilogramm pro Minute
Kilogramm pro Stunde
Pounds mass per minute
Pounds mass per hour
Watt (W)
Kilowatt (KW)
Megawatt (MW)
Btu per hour
Pferdest en (PS) (HP)
Tons refrigeration
Pascal (Pa)
Kilo-Pascal (kPa)
Bar
Pounds force per square inch
Zentimeter Wassers e
Inches of Water
Millimeter Quecksilbers e
Version 05/06
Software structure Basic functions
71 h
72 min
73 s
74 m/s
75 km/h
76 ft/s
77 ft/min
78 mph
79 ft³
80 m³
No. unit
60 cm Hg
61 in Hg
62 °C
63 K
64 °F
65 DDC
66 DDF
67 Y
68 M
69 W
70 d
description
Zentimeter Quecksilbers
Inches of mercury
Grad Celsius
Grad Kelvin
Degrees Fahrenheit
Gradtagzahl
Degree days Fahrenheit
Jahre
Monate
Wochen
Tage
Stunden
Minuten
Sekunden
Meter pro Sekunde
Kilometer pro Stunde feet per second
Feet per minute
Miles per hour
Cubic feet
Kubikmeter e
81 Imp. gal
82 l
83 US gal
84 ft³/min
85 m³/s
Imperial Gallons equal to 4 quarts (4.546 liters).
Liter
United States Gallons equal to 4 quarts (3.785 liters).
Cubic feet per minute
Kubik-Meter pro Sekunde
86 Imp. gal/min Imperial gallons per minute
87 l/s Liter pro Sekunde
88 l/min Liter pro Minute
89 US gal/Min US Gallons per minute
Version 05/06
4.2. - 68
Software structure
122 kΩ
123 MΩ
124 mV
125 kJ/kg
126 MJ
127 J/K
128 J/kgK
129 kHz
130 MHz
102 psi/°F
103 rad
104 1/min
115 in²
116 cm²
117 BTU/lbs
118 cm
119 lbs/s
120 Δ°F
121 Δ°K
No. unit
90 °
91 °C/h
92 °C/min
93 °F/h
94 °F/min
96 ppm
97 ppb
98 %
99 %/s
100 1/min
101 1/s
Basic functions description
Winkel in Grad
Grad Celsius pro Stunde
Grad Celsius pro Minute
Degrees Fahrenheit per hour
Degrees Fahrenheit per minute
Parts per Million
Parts per Billion (Milliarde)
Prozent
Prozent pro Sekunde pro Minute pro Sekunde psi per degree Fahrenheit
Radiant (rad)
Square inches [inch2]
Quadratzentimeter [cm2] btu per pound
Zentimeter
Pounds mass per second
Delta degrees Fahrenheit
Temperaturdifferenz in Kelvin
Kiloohm (kOhm)
Mega Ohm (MOhm)
Millivolt (mV)
Kilojoule pro Kilogramm (KJ/Kg)
Mega-Joule (MJ)
Joule pro Grad Kelvin (J/K)
Joule pro Kilogramm Grad Fahrenheit (J/KgF)
Kilohertz (KHz)
Megaherz (MHz)
Version 05/06
4.2. - 69
Software structure Basic functions
No. unit
131 1/h
132 mW
133 hPa
134 mbar
135 m³/h
136 l/h
137 kWh/m²
138 kWh/ft²
139 MJ/m²
140 MJ/ft²
141 W/(m² °K)
description
Pro Stunde
Milliwatt (mW)
Hecto-Pascal (hPa)
Milli-Bar (mBar)
Kubik-Meter pro Stunde
Liter pro Stunde
Kilowattstunden pro Quadratmeter
Kilowatt hours per square foot
Megajoule pro Quadratmeter
Megajoules per square foot
Watts per square meter degree Kelvin
142 ft³/s
143 %obs/ft
144 %obs/m
145 mΩ
146 MWh
Cubic feet per second
Unit percent obstruction per foot
Percent obstruction per meter
Milli-Ohm
Megawatt-Stunden
147 kBTU
148 MBTU
Kilo BTUs
Mega BTUs
149 kJ/kg (dry air) Kilojoule pro Kilogram trockener Luft
150 MJ/kg (dry air) Megajoule pro Kilogram trockener Luft
151 kJ/K Kilojoule pro Kelvin
152 MJ/K
153 N
154 g/s
155 g/min
156 t/h
157 kBTUs/h
158 1/100s
159 ms
160 Nm
Megajoule pro Kelvin
Newton
Gramm pro Sekunde
Gram pro Minute
Tonnen pro Stunde
Kilo BTUs per hour
Hundertstel einer Sekunde
Milisekunden
Newton-Meter
Version 05/06
4.2. - 70
Software structure
172 Ωm
173 S
174 S/m
175 T
176 V/K
177 V/m
178 Wb
179 Cd
180 Cd/m²
181 K/h
No. unit
161 mm/s
162 mm/min
163 m/min
164 m/h
165 m³/min
166 m/s²
167 A/m
168 A/m²
169 Am²
170 F
171 H
182 K/min
183 Js
256 min/K
257 g/kg
Basic functions description
Milimeter pro Sekunde
Milimeter pro Sekunde
Meter pro Minute
Meter pro Stunde
Kubikmeter pro Minute
Meter pro Sekunde zum Quadrat
Amperes per meter
Ampere pro Quadratmeter
Ampere-Quadratmeter
Farad
Henry
Ohm-Meter
Siemens
Siemens pro Meter
Tesla
Volt pro Kelvin
Volt pro Meter
Weber
Candela
Candela pro Quadratmeter
Kelvin pro Stunde
Kelvin pro Minute
Joule-Sekunden
Minutes per Kelvin
Gramm per Kilogramm
Version 05/06
4.2. - 71
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 72
4.3. Objects
4.3.1. General
Objects are consistently used in the DDC4000. This applies both for producing the firmware and for the plant structure and projecting.
The objects visible in the service interface are classified to aid the technician with a better clarification.
Software objects
Are functions that regulate the DDC Central Unit. These include for example the basic programs
PID and heating and separate objects such as arithmetic.
The basic programs were summarized by function. All software functions that are directly related to the GP PID are found under object number S238. This includes for example the cascade or Y limit.
The parameters that are part of such functions are collected in folders and are therefore offered in the service level.
Hardware objects
are summarized functions that are used to control plant parts.
Basic objects
Basic objects are for example timer, marker, switches and the terminals of modules - the PINs.
system objects
These are functions that are processed in the central unit. In general they are not directly related to the plant. The system objects include for example setting the date and time or IP configuration.
Other objects exist within the object structure:
Attachment functions
(also called function objects). It is possible to attach functions to each parameter on the plant that change these parameters (e.g. scaling) or expand their function (e.g. source, BACnet object).
Therefore the attachment functions are found below or on the parameters.
Sub-objects
These objects are used to more precisely describe an object. A key example a PIN. Each clamp in the plant is represented by a PIN. This PIN can be stipulated by a sub-object on an input or output, digital or analog.
You also find sub-objects within the SBM51.
4.3.2. Software objects
4.3.2.1. What are software objects?
Software objects are summaries of control functions in a block with input and output values. The
DDC4000 Central Units' software objects mainly match the menus of the DDC3000 system. The functions are summarized in unchangeable and tested blocks.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 73
The basic programs were summarized by function. All software functions that are directly related to the GP PID are found under object number S238. This includes for example the cascade or Y limit.
The parameters that are part of such functions are collected in folders and are therefore offered in the service level.
Parameters, names and classification
Parameters can be addressed in two different ways.
1. via the parameter number and 2. via the parameter name.
The parameter number is unique to only one object. Each object can have for example a parameter with the number 12 and the text "Rep". For this addressing is possible in sources and links both via language-unattached parameters and via parameter names. The use of texts instead of numbers is advantageous for planning plant assignments and when reading sources.
However for the software objects the numbering of the DDC3000 menu was used.
A customer-specific plain text can also be set for the relevant parameter.
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.3.2.2. All software objects
List of all software objects
SWO
S066 limiting value
S083 Arithmetic
S116 Calendar
S126 MMM storage
S238 GP_PID
S300 Optimization
S301 Y limitation
S302 Y set
S303 Cascade
S304 Start-up switch [draft]
S305 Optimize ventilation
S306 FNK
S307 stet_Frost
S308 min_Roomtemp
S309 Standstill
S310 Energy selection
S311 Sequence change
S312 Limitation
S313 Set point switching
S314 Set point glide
S315 Set point correction
S316 Set point remote control
S317 XP switching
S318 Room correction
S321 Enthalpy
S322 Sequence menu
S323 Binary valuation
S324 Scaling
Version 05/06
Objects belongs to
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
GP PID
Heating
Heating and PID
Heating and PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
Heating and PID
Heating and PID
PID
Heating and PID
Heating and PID
Heating and PID
Heating
Heating and PID
4.3. - 74
Software structure Objects
SWO
S325 Min-Max-average MMM
S326 Time gliding
S327 Pulse counting
S328 Operation hours
S329 Heat volumeP
S330 Heat volumeDT
S333 Ring counter
S334 Spreadsheet function
S337 GP_Fixed value
S338 Gliding
S342 Pulse output
S343 E-Max
S344 Degree daily figure
S347 E-Max French
S348 Adaptive heating curve
S901 Signal generator (for test purposes)
belongs to
GP Fixed value
Heating
object no.
S066
S083
S116
S118
S126
S193
S194
S195
S238
S239
S309
S321
name of object
Boundry value
Arithmetic
Calendar
Scheduler
Store MMM
BP FBR01/02
BP FBR03
BP FBR04
GP PID
BP heating
Standstill
Enthalpy
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.9
0.2.0
unreleased
0.3.1
0.4.0
unreleased unreleased unreleased
0.1.9
0.1.9
unreleased
0.3.1
Version 05/06
4.3. - 75
Software structure Objects
S337
S338
S342
S343
S344
S347
S901
S329
S330
S333
S334
S335
S322
S323
S324
S325
S326
S327
S328
object no.
name of object
Sequence menu
Binary value
Scaling
Min/Max/Middle
Time sliding
Impulse count
Operation hours
Amt. heat calc
Amt. heat DT
Ring counter
0.4
0.4
0.4
Table function 0.2.0
Sensor switchover 0.1.47
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.39
0.3.1
unreleased
0.1.47
0.1.9
0.4
0.3
Fix value reg
Sliding
Impuls Output
E-Max
Nr. degree days
E-Max france
Signal generator
0.1.9
unreleased
0.3
unreleased
0.4
unreleased unreleased
4.3. - 76
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.3. S066 limiting value
Activation
Sub-function of
all basic programs 99 times can be set
Can be switched on-off via 5748 Q EA limiting value
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 77
Function description
Analog values (measured or calculated values) can be monitored for going above or below limiting values with the DDC software object S066 limiting value. The value to be monitored is set in the 4839
Q limiting value parameter. The stipulation of the min and max limiting value is made in the 8615
Selection (Min-Max-infringement) parameter. If the value selected in the parameter 8610 limiting
value is reached an internal contact, parameter 2 g MENU OUTPUT limiting value is set. The switch back takes place with a switch back difference in line with parameter 8612 Xsd.
The limiting value can glide depending on any, analog command value, parameter 4832 Q
COMMAND VALUE. This guidance signal lifts or lowers the limiting value set. Any analog value in the DDC4000 system (e.g. outside temperature) can be selected as a guidance signal.
The command value only results in a change to the set point within a glide range. The glide range is stipulated by the parameters 8613 GLIDE START and 8614 GLIDE END.
The influence of the guidance signal on the limiting value change is determined with the parameter
8611 EF/GW. If EF is negative this can force a reduction in the set point.
The current limiting value is indicated in the parameter 3 XS akt limiting value. If no limiting value gliding is active (COMMAND VALUE invalid or EF/GW = 0), the limiting value and XS akt limiting
value are identical. The function of the limiting value calculation can be switched ON (Status = 1) or
OFF (Status = 0) using a binary source 5748 Q EA limiting value. If no binary source is selected the function is switched ON.
Based on the start and end of glide-ing the following calculation arises for the set point gliding:
glide start < glide end
Comvalue < glide start: Delta_glide = 0
glide end < glide start
Comvalue < glide end glide start < Comvalue < glide end glide end < Comvalue
Delta_glide = EF *
(Comvalue - glide start)
Delta_glide = EF * (glide end - glide start) glide end < Comvalue < glide start glide start < Comvalue
Set point = XS current (basic program) + Delta_glide
Delta_glide = EF * (glide start - glide end)
Delta_glide = EF * (glide start - Comvalue)
Delta_glide = 0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 78
Parameters
No.
2
name of parameter g
Menu output limit
3
xsakt
Xs current Limit
4832
FG
Q GUIDE SIZE
4839
Q G
SOURCE LIMIT
5748
EA
Q EA Limiting value
8610
Wert
Limit
8611
EF/GW
EF/GW
8612
xsd
Xsd
8613
Anf
Slide begin
8614
End
Slide end
8615 Select
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float set point float set point float set point float set point multistate
min
--
max
--
init
0
-infinity +infinity 0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
unit
--
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--deleted --
-infinity +infinity 95
-10 10 0
--
--
0 999 1
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
-2 1
--
--
-value,text
0,Minimum
1,Maximum
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 79
4.3.2.4. S083 Arithmetic
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 20 times can be set
Can be switched on-off via 2153 Q EA Arithmetic
If no binary source is set the calculation is constant.
Function summary
The DDC software object arithmetic carries out mathematic calculations.
Up to 4 analog values or also 4 digital values from the DDC4000 system and any constants can be integrated into the calculations.
The following can be used as mathematic operators:
Basic types of calculation with sample:
+ Addition
subtraction
* multiplication
/ division
^ Power
mathematical functions:
a+b a-b a*b a/b a^b sqrt square root log Logarithm on the basis of e (natural logarithm) log10 Logarithm on the basis of 10 (decimal logarithm) exp Exponent on the basis of e sin sine asin arc sine sinh Hyberbolic sine cos Cosine acos Arc cosine cosh Hyberbolic cosine tan tangent atan Arc tangent sqrt(a) ln(a) log(a) exp(c) sin(3.141) asin(1) sinh(a) cos(3.141) acos(0) cosh(b) tan(3.141/2) 1) atan(1) 2)
1)
2)
1)
2)
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 80
tanh Hyberbolic tangent abs absolute number
1) Use with radian
2) Result in radian
Logical (Boolean) expressions:
tanh(c) abs(-3)
= same
!= not equal
|
& and or
< smaller
<= smaller than or equal
> greater
>= greater than or equal
Exponentials of a figure (based on 10) are implemented with the aid of "e" or "E".
e.g.: (1E2) or (1e2) provides the value 100.
The expression "exp" is used to calculate the exponents based on e.
The calculation of bracketed expressions "(..)" is possible.
The following settings must be included:
- Formula up to 50 characters in length
- Operands a, b, c and d (only small letters)
- up to 8 different, numerical constants
- Constants in decimal depiction (decimal point, leading zero for figures under zero)
- up to 7 nested brackets (incl. invisible brackets for organizing the order of calculations)
- Spaces are possible (a+b or a + b)
Parameter 2152 result depicts the result of the arithmetic calculation. This result can be set as the analog source for other arithmetic calculations or a true value 0 or 1 (floating value).
The result is invalid:
- if a source that is not available is set as an operand
- for division by zero
- if the calculation overruns
- if the formula is entered in another wrong way
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 81
Function description
In parameter 2146 ... 2149 Arithmetic sources the maximum 4 analog sources are set. Up to 4 analog sources are set as operands a, b, c,and d in the mathematic formula.
Parameter 2151 Formula sets the mathematic formula. The mathematical formula may be up to 50 characters long. It contains operands, operators, constants and brackets.
The following settings apply:
- Formula up to 50 characters in length
- Operands a, b, c and d (only small letters)
- up to 8 different, numerical constants
- Constants in decimal depiction (decimal point, leading zero for figures under zero)
- up to 7 nested brackets (incl. invisible brackets for organizing the order of calculations )
- Spaces are possible
Parameter 2152 result depicts the result of the arithmetic calculation. This result can be set as the analog source for other arithmetic calculations or a true value 0 or 1.
The result is invalid:
- if a source that is not available is set as an operand
- for division by zero
- if the calculation overruns
With the parameter a binary source is used to switch the execution of the arithmetic calculation. If no binary source is set the calculation is constant. If this parameter is written with a valid zero the result is set to zero.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
2146
Q_a
Arithmetic 1. Source
2147
Q_b
Arithmetic 2. Source
2148
Q_c
Arithmetic 3. Source
2149
Q_d
Arithmetic 4. Source
2151
Formel
Formula
2152
erg
RESULT
2153
Q_EA
Q EA Arithmatic
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float set point deletable text actual value float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--
--
--
-infinity +infinity 0
--
--
-deleted --
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.3.2.5. S126 MMM storage
Activation
Sub-function of
- 20 times can be set
Objects 4.3. - 82
Function summary
The DDC software object S126 MMM storage supplies the maximum value, minimum value and average of an analogue source. In addition the values determined by the analogue source can be saved for a particular point of time.
2165 source MMM
plannable source on any analogue value of the DDC4000 system.
If the source is invalid or deleted the current min, max and average values are frozen. When the source is valid again the current min, max and average values are reset to the current source value.
The saved values are not affected by this.
2166 Max act.
Maximum value determined since the time of the last reset.
2167 Min act.
Minimum value determined since the time of the last reset.
2168 Average act.
Average value calculated since the time of the last reset.
2195 Q storage
plannable source on any binary value of the DDC4000 system. With the change from "0" to "1" the min, max and average values are reset and saved.
For example the values can be saved for a defined period of time through the use of a time program output. Through the use of a timer the saving can be released at regular intervals.
2196 Max stor.
Maximum value at the reset time.
2197 Min stor.
Minimum value at the reset time.
2198 Average stor.
Average value at the reset time.
2199 Input stor.
Current value of the 2165 source MMM at the reset time.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
2165
Q_Input
Store Source MMM
2166
Max
Max Value / t
2167
Min
Min Value / t
2168
Mittel
Average Value / t
2169 DATE
2195
Q_Sp
Store Q
2196
Max_s
Stored Max Value
2197
Min_s
Stored Min Value
2198
Mittel_s
Stored Average Value
2199
Input_s
Stored Input
2200 TIME
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value float actual value float actual value float actual value integer actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value float actual value float actual value float actual value integer
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
0
--
0 deleted
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
0
0
--
24 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-h
4.3. - 83
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9. S238 Basic program PID (ventilation)
Activation
Basic program
PID (ventilation) can be set 12 x
4.3. - 84
Function summary
This basic program is a PID control with 4 sequences. Using binary source parameters integration into the ventilation controls and regulations is possible without any problems.
Function extensions are made via DDC soft- and hardware objects.
Function description
The control variable sensor must be defined in parameter 5102 source control variable. Any
DDC4000 system analog value can be set.
As an outside sensor, any analog value in the DDC system can also be set in parameter 5103
source TO. This parameter is used in combination with other DDC sub-software objects , e.g.S307
constant frost protection. If not required, no setting is required.
In parameter 5100 XS the desired set point for the fixed value regulation is set. On the basis of this set point and the function of other DDC sub-software objects (e.g. S314 set point gliding, S313 set
point switching) a new set point is calculated that is depicted as the current value on parameter
5101 XS current.
In the basic PID program up to 4 constant Y outputs are available. The calculation of the Y outputs is made if the control circuit is in "Control ON" operation mode. Otherwise the Y outputs are in the status assigned to them for the uncontrolled status by parameter 5127 uncontrolled condition. (0 =
0 %, 1 = 100 %)
The values of the Y outputs calculated by the basic program can be overwritten by manual intervention (7801 manual intervention .. 7804 manual intervention Y04), BMS intervention (h01 ..
h04) or by DDC sub-software objects (e.g. S302 Y set).
The current values of the Y outputs are displayed in the parameters 5110 YL1... 5113 YL4.
For each Y output a max and min limit parameter 5141 .. 5148 can be set (e. g. for stipulating a minimum outside air rate MAR).
In parameter 5126 Sequence various sequences can be set for the individual Y outputs.
The output of the Y output values occurs via source parameterizing in the basic programs of the DDC
Central Units (DDC4000) and the DDC modules (DDC bus module BMA, field bus module FBM, control cabinet bus module SBM).
The parameters 5130 .. 5132 Xdz.. can stipulate idle zones between the individual Y output sequences. The situation of the relevant set point can be seen from the figure.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 85
These idle zones also work when the control circuit has an integral share, parameter 5106 tN, i. e.
the I-share is switched off on the edge of XpY. If the actual value in the Xp range of the next sequence occurs the I-share is stocked up again. This results in the idle zone range not being run through as a result of the effect of the I-share and a real energy saving effect is achieved.
In parameter 5128 xwh an insensitivity zone is set, i. e. within xw +/- xwh the Y outputs are not changed. If xw exceeds this range the control is normal.
Example:
Set point point for 4 or 3 sequences
Using the central influence, remote control and usage time program the internal contact I011 plant
on is controlled in the basic ventilation program. If the fan is to be started as a result of the conditions stated above first the internal contact I011 plant on is switched to "1".
When the subsequent control is started and there is a return message via 5140 Q Release control the control is quitted with the internal contact I012 control on set to "1".
These and other internal contacts switch as per the status of the control circuit and can be used for other PLC links.
Priorities
Switch basic ventilation program to normal operation
1. Highest priority:
For releasing the control a binary source is entered in parameter 5140 Q Release control e. g.
the return message from the ventilation protection. If parameter 5140 Q release control is not set the basic program is constantly in normal operation (I012 Control ON = 1).
2. The multistate input 5138 Source remote ON with its potential modesAutomatic / source
remote on / source remote off is used to switch the plant on and off. This means remote control and / or operating the plant independently on the usage time program set is possible.
If the source remote ON is not set or set to automatic mode, the PID basic program depends on any remote control by a BMS or the assigned usage time program.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 86
3. A Z contact in the PID basic program enables the central building control plant to influence the status of ventilation control. The multistate parameter Z Z contacts can take on the Automatic /
Z1-day / Z4-off modes.
If the Z contact is not influenced or the Automatic state set the PID basic program depends on the assigned usage time program.
4. Lowest priority:
Parameter Q_N assigns the weekly usage time and/or special holiday, bank holiday or special usage times to a schedule object S118. If no time program is assigned to the PID basic program the plant is always ON (I011 plant ON = 1).
Parameters
5103 TA
Source TA
5105 xw
XW
5106 tN tN
5110 Y1
YL1
5111 Y2
YL2
5112 Y3
YL3
5113 Y4
YL4
5115 Q_N
State N
5120 XPY1
XPY1
5121 XPY2
XPY2
5122 XPY3
XPY3
No.
name of parameter
5100 XS
XS
parameter typ
set point float
min max
-9999,9 9999,9
init
20
5101 Xs akt
XS current actual value float
-9999,9 9999,9 0 C
5102 Qreg
Source controlled variable actual value deletable float
-infinity +infinity deleted C
unit
C actual value deletable float
-999 999 deleted C
-9999,9 9999,9 0 K actual value float set point deletable integer
1 99 3 min actual value float actual value float
0
0
100
100
0
0
%
% actual value float actual value float
0
0 actual value deletable text
--
0,5 set point float set point float
0,5 set point float
0,5
100
100
--
9999,9
9999,9
9999,9
0
0 deleted --
10
10
10
%
%
K
K
K
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 87
No.
name of parameter
5123 XPY4
XPY4
5125 D
Vorhalt
5126 \\//
Sequence
5127 NRegZust
Not controlled condition
parameter typ
set point float set point deletable integer set point integer set point selection list
min
0,5
1
0
max
9999,9
299
255
init
10
unit
K deleted s
48 -set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value multistate
--0
0 9999,9 0
-9999,9 9999,9 0
100
100
100
100
0
0
0
100
%
%
%
% selection list
No.,text
0,for Y1
1,for Y2
2,for Y3
3,for Y4
K 5128 xwh xwh
5130 xdz12
Xdz 12
5131 xdz23
Xdz 23
5132 xdz34
Xdz 34
5138 QFern
Q Remote control
5140 Q RELEASE Regelung
5141 Y1min
Y1 min
5142 Y2min
Y2 min
5143 Y3min
Y3 min
5144 Y4min
Y4 min
5145 Y1max
Y1 max
5146 Y2max
Y2 max actual value deletable boolean
--
0 set point float set point float
0
0 set point float set point float set point float set point float
0
0
0
-9999,9 9999,9 0
-9999,9 9999 0
-3
--
100
K
2 value,text
1,Source remote ON
0,Source remote OFF
9,Automatic deleted --
0 %
100 100
K
K
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 88
No.
name of parameter
5147 Y3max
Y3 max
5148 Y4max
Y4 max
5169 TAm
TA middle
7801 hY1
Manual influence Y1
7802 hY2
Manual influence Y2
7803 hY3
Manual influence Y3
7804 hY4
Manual influence Y4
parameter typ
set point float set point float actual value float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float
min
0
0
-50
0
0
0
0 h01 Analoge GLT influence 1 actual value deletable float
0 h02 Analoge GLT influence 2 actual value deletable float
0 h03 Analoge GLT influence 3 actual value deletable float
0 h04 Analoge GLT influence 4 actual value deletable float
0 i011 System ON -i012
Z
Control ON
Z
Z-contacts actual value boolean actual value boolean set point multistate
--
--
max
100
100
150
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
--
--
init
100
100
0 deleted % deleted % deleted % deleted % deleted % deleted % deleted % deleted %
0
0
unit
%
%
C
--
--
3 2 value,text
1,Z1 Day
0,Z4 Off
9,Automatic
* Nr.
Beschreibung
1) 5115 Hier wird die Zuweisung zum Scheduler (Wochenprogramm) durchgeführt.
Dieser Parameter beschreibt den Zustand des Zeitprogramms für die Regler im folgenden Format: aktuellerModus, nächsterModus, Zeit bis Modus Wechsel in Minuten.
Ungültige Werte ergeben sich durch weglassen.
Folgende Zustandswerte für den Modus werden unterstützt:
1=Tag, 2=Nacht, 4=Aus (Aus wird demnächst auf 0 geändert)
Version 05/06
Software structure
DDC sub-software objects
Objects 4.3. - 89
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.1. S301 Y limitation
Activation
Sub-function of
each heating and ventilation basic program 0 ... can be set 4 x
Can be switched on-off via
5319 Q EA Y limitation if not linked, ON
4.3. - 90
Function summary
The DDC software object S301 Y limitation influences the min or max limits of the Y outputs for the
DDC control circuits (basic program).
A difference is to be made between two influence options that can jointly affect the basic function of the DDC control circuits:
1. Depending on a limitation factor the Y outputs Y-min or Y-max set in the basic program for the
DDC control circuits are altered. The influence on the Y-min or Y-max occurs after the limitation factor reaches a particular limiting value.
- For the MAX limit the limiting value must have exceeded the limiting value.
- for the MIN limit the limitation factor must be below the limiting value so as to influence the setting range of the Y-outputs.
- By inverting the Y-limit YES / NO the direction of influencing the Y-setting range is stipulated.
2. In addition to the functions stated in 1 the limiting value of the limitation factor can itself glide in a particular range. I.e. depending on the outside temperature (basic program) the limiting value of the limitation factor is also changed.
Function description
Re 1:
The limitation factor is set in parameter 5311 source Y-limitation. Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set.
The Y-limitation influences the Y-output parameterized on parameter 5310 Y-limit. on.
The DDC sub.menu Y-limit can be installed and set repeatedly for a DDC control circuit. If several Y-
limitation DDC sub-menus work on the same Y output, the min and max limits calculated for each
DDC software object are added.
For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs.
For the basic heating program the Y limit always works on the heating control for a Y output.
Parameter 5312 YB-limiting value sets the value from which the Y limit should act on the Y output setting range.
Parameter 5313 YB limitation stipulates whether a MAX limitation, i.e. exceeding the limiting value (image 3, image 4) o r a MIN limitation, i.e. going below the limiting value (image 1, image 2) should affect the setting range of the Y output.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 91
Parameter 5314 YB Inverting stipulates the direction of the influence. (direction of curve)
5314 YB Inverting = NO -> ( image 1, image 3 ),
5314 YB Inverting = YES -> ( image 2, image 4 ),
Parameter 5315 XP Y-limitation is the proportional range within which the Y-min or Y-max for the Youtputs can be moved depending on the limitation factor.
5315 XP Y-limitation = 10 means: for 10 units change in the limitation factor Y-min or Y-max on the
Y-output is moved by 100%.
5315 XP Y-limitation = 100 means: only for 100 units change in the limitation factor is Y-min or Ymax on the Y-output moved by 100%.
Re 2:
Depending on a command value (outside temperature, source parameter 5103 source TO in the basic program of the DDC control circuit) the limitation value stipulated in parameter 5312 YB-
limitation value can glide.
The glide range is set in parameters 5317 glide start YLim and 5318 glide end YLim.
The influence of limiting value glide is set in parameter 5316 EF Ylimitation.
5316 EF Ylimitation = 1 means: When changing the command value (outside temperature) by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB-limiting value parameter is moved by 1 unit.
5316 EF Ylimitation = 10 means: When changing the command value (outside temperature) by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB-limiting value parameter is moved by 10 units.
Priorities
The y-limitations 1-4 also work on the basic program's Ymin/Ymax.
Priority Function
Highest Y limitations of the basic program
5141 Y1min, 5145 Y1max
Version 05/06
Software structure
Priority Function
...
5144 Y4min, 5148 Y4max lowest DDC software sub-objects Y-limitation
Objects
Figure 1
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MIN
5314 YB Inverting = NO
Figure 2
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MIN
5314 YB Inverting = YES
Figure 3
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MAX
5314 YB Inverting = NO
Version 05/06
4.3. - 92
Software structure
Figure 4
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MAX
5314 YB Inverting = YES
Objects 4.3. - 93
Parameters
Parameter 5313 Min/Max selection : "yes" = "1" means Max
No.
name of parameter
5310.1
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
set point multistate
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted -5311.1
Q1
Source Y-limitation
5312.1
G1
YB-Limiting value
5312.2
G2
YB-Limiting value
5313.1
MMBegr1
YB-limitation
5314.1
Inv1
YB Inversion
5315.1
XP1
XP Y limitation
5316.1
EF1
EF Y limitation
5317.1
Anf1
Slide begin YBegr
5318.1
End1
Slide end Y limit set point boolean set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point boolean
-infinity +infinity 150
-infinity +infinity 150
--
--
1
0
--
--
200
10
1
0
10
0
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
--
--
--
--
--
--
C
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 94
No.
name of parameter
5319.1
EA1
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.1
YBegr
Y-Limiting 1 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.2
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
5311.2
5312.2
5313.2
5314.2
5315.2
5316.2
5317.2
5318.2
5319.2
5320.2
Q2
Source Y-limitation
G2
YB-Limiting value
MMBegr2
YB-limitation
Inv2
YB Inversion
XP2
XP Y limitation
EF2
EF Y limitation
Anf2
Slide begin YBegr
End2
Slide end Y limit
EA2
Q EA Y-limitation
YBegr
Y-Limiting 2 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.3
Y limit. affects set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
min
--
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
--
--
--
1
--
200
0 10 0
-infinity +infinity 22
0
10
--
--
--
C
-infinity +infinity 32
--deleted
C
--
--0 --
min
--
max
--
--
max
4
init
deleted
0
init
0
unit
--
--
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 95
No.
name of parameter
5311.3
Q3
Source Y-limitation
5312.3
G3
YB-Limiting value
5313.3
MMBegr3
YB-limitation
5314.3
Inv3
YB Inversion
5315.3
XP3
XP Y limitation
5316.3
EF3
EF Y limitation
5317.3
Anf3
Slide begin YBegr
5318.3
End3
Slide end Y limit
5319.3
EA3
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.3
YBegr
Y-Limiting 3 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.4
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
5311.4
5312.4
5313.4
5314.4
5315.4
5316.4
EF4
Version 05/06
Q4
Source Y-limitation
G4
YB-Limiting value
MMBegr4
YB-limitation
Inv4
YB Inversion
XP4
XP Y limitation
EF Y limitation
--
1
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
0 10 0
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity
--
--
--
200
+infinity
--
--
0
10
32 deleted
0
--
--
--
--
--
C
C
--
-actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean set point float set point float
--
1
0
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
--
--
--
200
10
0
10
0
--
--
--
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5317.4
Anf4
Slide begin YBegr
5318.4
End4
Slide end Y limit
5319.4
EA4
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.4
YBegr
Y-Limiting 4 active
parameter typ
set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
min max init
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
--deleted
C
--
--0
unit
C
--
4.3. - 96
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.2. S302 Y set
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating and ventilation program 0 ... can be set 4 x
Can be switched on-off via
5327 Q Y-SET if not defined, ON
4.3. - 97
Function summary
With the Y-set DDC submenu the Y outputs of the DDC control circuits are stipulated by binary signals on certain (parameterizable) Y-values. If the binary signal = 1 the stipulated Y value works on the Y output.
Function description
The Y-set DDC software object can be installed and set up to four times for one DDC control circuit.
For this Y-set can work repeatedly on the same Y-output.
The address of the binary source is entered in parameter 5327 Q Y-SET. If the binary source ="1", the analog value set in parameter 5326 Y-SET value (0 ..100 %) is transferred to the Y-output.
Parameter 5325 destination Y-SET sets the Y output that is to be influenced.
For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs. For the basic heating program the Y-set always works on the heating control for a Y output.
Priorities
Priority Function
Highest Manual intervention
Central influence
Y set (Index 01)
Y set (Index 04)
Limitation functions lowest Basic program control function
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 98
Parameters
Parameter 5325.x only applies if used in the GP PID!
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5325.1
Ziel1
Destination Y set set point multistate
5326.1
Wert1
Y set value
5327.1
Q1
Q Y fix set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min max init
-4 0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
No.
5325.2
Ziel2
Destination Y set
5326.2
5327.2
name of parameter
Wert2
Y set value
Q2
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
5325.3
Ziel3
Destination Y set
5326.3
5327.3
name of parameter
Wert3
Y set value
Q3
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
No.
5325.4
Ziel4
Destination Y set
5326.4
5327.4
name of parameter
Wert4
Y set value
Q4
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
4.3. - 99
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 100
4.3.2.9.3. S303 Cascade
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on-off via 5210 Source EA cascade
if not defined, ON
When switching between ON/OFF and OFF/ON a gliding transfer takes place in the control unit!
Function description
In the DDC sub-menu S303 Cascade the exhaust air temperature sensor is set in parameter 5200
Cascade sensor. The supply air temperature is in parameter 5102 Source control variable from the PID basic program.
Example:
Main control variable: exhaust air in DDC cascade sub-menu
Auxiliary control variable: supply air in the basic program
If the exhaust air temperature (main control variable) varies from the current set point 5101 XSactual the supply air temperature (auxiliary control variable) is raised or lowered. The supply air set point
5205 XS supply air Casc. counteracts the offset in the room and ensures fast, stable control.
The exhaust air control circuit works in the normal setting with a P control behavior. The influence of the offset room/exhaust air on the supply air change is set with parameter 5201 ER (Xs supply air =
XS current + ER * xw room/exhaust air). If the room or exhaust air temperature works as a PI control function on the supply air control circuit the reset time for the exhaust air control circuit is entered in parameter 5202 tN cascade.
Depending on the setting in 5202 tN cascade the following control behaviour can be set:
P/P- , PI/PI- , P/PI- , PI/P behavior
For the supply air temperature it is possible to set both a minimum and a maximum limit (parameter
5203 supply air min limit, 5204 supply air max limit.)
If the supply air temperature is lower than 5203 supply air min limit or exceeds 5204 supply air
max limit, the internal output I021 Limit cascade is set to "1". If a valid value is entered in parameter
5273 XP limit for all basic program XPYs are switched to XP Limit cascade and the I20 (XP switching) is also activated.
If the max. limiting value is below the min limiting value the max. limiting value is invalid.
Parameter 5208 Maxdiff sets a limit for the temperature difference between the supply air temperature and room temperature. The precondition for limiting the temperature difference is placing the control variable sensor in the room. This limit function prevents temperature layers in high, cold rooms or halls. For an unlimited increase in temperature difference between supply air and room the cooler, heavier air in the lower part of the room would act as an air cushion that is not penetrated by the warmer, lighter supply air from the ceiling.
Parameter 5208 Maxdiff can also be set to negative. In this case the supply air on 5208 Maxdiff is
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 101
forcibly changed to less than the room temperature. This control behavior is for example necessary for operating theatres which require a cooler supply air cone above the operating table.
Maxdiff therefore influences the cascade's supply air max limit: There is a Min selection between
supply air max limit and room temperature + Maxdiff)
Parameter 5209 Diff supply air Room presets a difference between the supply air set point and room set point.
The maximum limit for the supply air has priority over the limitation of the temperature difference between supply air and room.
Internal loads and constant heat requests would create a permanent difference to the room set point.
This constant difference would require cooler or warmer supply air to remain constant. To prevent this a difference value between the supply air temperature and room temperature can be set.
Example:
If parameter 5209 Diff.supply air is e.g.
1K, the rocker is moved by 1 K, i.e. if xw=0 the supply air is 1 Kelvin higher than the room temperature. (constant heat feed)
The difference 5209 Diff.supply air can be set both positive and negative.
The function of the DDC sub-menu can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source.
(5210 Source EA Cascade)
If no binary source is set, the function is switched to ON.
When switching between ON/OFF and OFF/ON a gliding transfer takes place in the control unit!
Priorities
If the DDC sub-software object set point glide is installed and activated for the PID basic program a set point gliding also results in glide-ing the XS current in the PID basic program (room set point) as well as to glide-ing the supply air-Min limitation if "Yes" is set in parameter 5207 gliding cascade.
The maximum limit for the supply air has priority over the limitation of the temperature difference between supply air and room.
Example:
The function of the cascade control can be compared with a rocker. The room or exhaust air temperature works on the right level of the rocker. The left lever raises or lowers the supply air.
The length of the supply air lever can be compared with the influence exhaust air IR setting: At IR = 3 the supply air lever would be 3 times longer as the exhaust air lever, at IR= 5, it would be 5 times as long.
The functions are clarified via the following images. The room/exhaust air temperatures affects the supply air movement with a P control behavior: (tN Cascade = -- min).
Version 05/06
Software structure
Settings:
Set point XS = 20 °C, (basic program)
Influence exhaust air IR = 3,
Figure 1
Current exhaust air value agrees with set point XS = 20°C. In this case supply air is also 20°C.
Figure 2
Current exhaust air value increases to 21°C, control difference = 1K. Without min limit the supply air is reduced to
17°C. supply air movement =
(offset.) 1K * (ER) 3 = 3K
Figure 3
Setting: suppairminlimit: 18°C, supply air may not be below 18°
C.
Objects
Figure 4
Current exhaust air value falls to
18°C, control difference = 2K.
Without max limit the supply air is raised to 26°C.
supply air movement = (offset.)
2K * (ER) 3 = 6K
Version 05/06
4.3. - 102
Software structure
Figure 5
Setting: suppairmaxlimit: 25°C, supply air may not exceed 25°C.
Objects
Figure 6
Setting: Diff limit between room and supply air to 5.0K:
Maxdiff: 5.0K, temperature difference between room and supply air may not be larger than
5.0K.
Priorities
Priority Function
Highest Limit 1 S312.1
Cascade (only PID) S303
Limit 2S312.1
XP conversion S317 lowest Structure delay start-up S304
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5200
b
cascade probe actual value deletable float
5201
ER
ER
5202
tN
tN cascade
5203 supply air min limit.
set point float set point deletable integer set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
0,1
0
-9999
50
99
9999
3 deleted min
18
--
--
Version 05/06
4.3. - 103
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5204 supply air max limit.
set point float
5205
XS Zul
XS feed cascade
5206
XP Beg
XP Lim.Casc
5207 Slide Casc actual value float set point deletable float
5208 Max diff set point boolean set point deletable integer
5209 Diff. supply air room
5210
5211 i021
EA
Source EA cascade
xw
Xw cascade
begr
Limitation cascade set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value boolean
min
-9999
max
9999
init
65
-9999,9 9999,9 0
0,5
--
-9999
--
--
999
--
9999 deleted
0 deleted
-9999,9 9999,9 0
--
-deleted
-9999,9 9999,9 0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
4.3. - 104
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.4. S304 start up switching
Activation
Sub-function of
basic ventilation program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5438 Q EA start-up if not defined, ON
4.3. - 105
Function summary
The movement switch only switches the ventilation plant on when the heating register is heated.
Function description
The movement switch is released (I022 Movement = 1) when the external temperature falls below the value parameterized in 5332 TOgrenz AF and the control = NIGHT is in automatic operation via a timing program or the control = OFF due to forced control (Remote OFF or Z-contact OFF).
(The lower external temperature is just one criterion for movement switching! If the external temperature goes up during an active movement phase this does not abort!)
If the ventilation plant is operational, e.g. as a result of usage times or remote switching the selected heating valve opens first 5331 Target movement Y. After the entered opening time 5335 Opening
time has ended the heating valve is 100% open. The length of the total cleaning time depends on whether a return temperature sensor was connected.
a) There is no return temperature sensor available:
At the same time as the opening the release delay is also active 5336 Release delay. After it ends the internal contact I011 Plant ON = 1 is switched on.
b) There is a return temperature sensor 5333 Return sensor available:
The heating valve is opened until the return temperature sensor the limiting value 5334 Limit
T Return AF is exceeded. Then the internal contact
I011 Plant ON =1 is switched on.
The heating valve remains in the last position until the internal contact I012 Control ON switches on the PID control.
If the control is not switched on via I012 Control ON the movement process is aborted. The heating valve closes again. However the movement switch remains active (I022 Movement = 1).
After the internal contact I012 control ON = 1 has been switched on the transfer from advance opening of the heating valve /reaching the return temperature to regular operation occurs without impacts. The impact-free switching occurs with the aid of a period stated in 5337 Structure delay. In this period the PID controller is operated as the P-controller with a normal variance limited to maximum 1 K and double proportional range.
[XWStructure delay = MAX(XWGP, 1 K), XPStructure delay all Y = 2 * XPGP Movement Y]
The "movement" status, i.e. the ventilation plant should become operational and the movement switching works, is indicated throughout the whole time by internal contact I022 Movement = 1.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 106
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 107
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 108
Special Functions
If during the movement process the manual influence or central influence is exercised, the movement process is aborted and the desired control status is started.
The external sensor used is the PID control set in the parameter in the basic program
5103 TO. If no external sensor is set in the basic program the movement switch always works.
The function as to whether the DCC submenu start up works in the conditions stated above can be switched on (Status = 1) or off (Status = 0) via a binary source (5438 Q EA Movement). If no binary source is set the function can always operate.
If additionally DDC sub-menu 15308 Minimum room temperature is set the movement switching can also be switched via the minimum room temperature to OFF in the control status, i.e. if the
minimum room temperature becomes active the movement switching is processed first before the
minimum room temperature is active.
In combination with DDC sub-menu 15305 Optimize heating - if the temperature conditions are appropriate - the movement switching is processed before the ventilation optimization.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5331
Ziel
Destination startup Y
parameter typ
set point multistate
5332 TA limit AF
5333
b_r
Sensor back
5334 Limit T back AF
5335 Opening time
5336 Release delay
5337 Structure delay
5438
EA
Source EA Start up i022
Anf
Start up set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
0
0
0
1
min
--
max
4
init
0
0 12 8
-infinity +infinity deleted C
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
C
50
99
30
10
C min
99
99
--
--
10
10 deleted
0 min min
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.5. S305 Optimization ventilation
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on-off via 5348 Q EA OptAufh
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 109
Function summary
The DDC sub-software object Optimization (ventilation) has the function of controlling the ventilation plant such that the desired room temperature is reached at the start of the usage time.
Thus the optimization (fan) only works in automatic mode with a usage time assigned to the PID control.
This requires various parameters that represent the building's/room's temperature behavior and compares various temperatures with each other. This calculates time for the PID control to switch on.
Function description
For a difference in the outside temperature (5103 Source TO) from set point XS (5100 XS) in the PID basic program the switch on time for the assigned usage time program is brought forward. This applies both to necessary heating (TO < XS) and cooling (TO > XS).
The move forward is (XS-TO) * 5345 Fakt heat for heating and (TO-XS) * 5346 Faktcool for cooling.
The maximum time change is stipulated in parameter 5343 Max time.
The following is switched when the switch on time is moved forward:
The optimization (ventilation) works on Y output in the PID basic program set in parameter 5342 Y
outside air cover. For this the Y output that controls the outside/recirculating air cover must be entered. By comparing the outside and room temperature energies the outside/recirculating air cover is opened or closed as per the need to heat / cool.
The optimize status (ventilation) is indicated with the internal contact I026 Optimization = 1.
The internal contact of the PID basic program I011 plant ON is switched to 1. This controls the ventilators. With the return message from the ventilators (via source parameter 5140 release
control) the internal contact I012 control ON is then switched to 1.
If no Y output is selected in 5342 Y outside air cover the optimization (ventilation) only switches the I011 plant ON signal on.
The operation of the sub-menu can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5348 Q EA
OptAufh.
In order to ensure fast heating and cooling pure recirculating or outside air is used (without a minimum outside air rate) until the regular usage time start is reached.
During this time no limits in the PID basic program (Ymin, Ymax) work for the selected Y output.
Limits that are subsequently switched by DDC software menus work.
All other Y outputs are controlled as per the current control parameter (xw, Ymin, Ymax).
Energy comparison, outside / recirculating air
(TR > XS) and (TO < TR) : outside air share 100%
(TR > XS) and (TO >TR) : outside air share 0 %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 110
(TR < XS) and (TO >TR) : outside air share 100%
(TR < XS) and (TO <TR) : outside air share 0 % with TR = room temperature, TO = outside temperature
Special Functions
If in addition DDC sub-menu 15304 start-up is active the start-up switching must be processed first before Optimize heating works.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5341
b_Rt
Room sensor opt.heating up
5342 Y outside air vent
5343 Max time
5345 Fact Heat
5346 Fact cool
5348
EA
Source EA opt.heating up i026 Optimizing ventilation
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point deletable multistate
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted C
-4
600 deleted value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
30 min set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
10
0
0
--
--
120
120
--
--
1
1 deleted
0 min/K min/K
--
--
Additional information
A fixed switching difference of 1 K prevents the cover from being switched over continuously.
However this hysteresis only works when comparing TO : TR.
Heating: TO < XS Cooling: TO > XS
+ΔT (TR < XS) and (TO > TR): Y = 100 % +ΔT (TR > XS) and (TO < TR): Y = 100 %
-ΔT (TR < XS) and (TO < TR): Y = 0 % -ΔT (TR > XS) and (TO > TR): Y = 0 %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 111
No hysteresis works when comparing TR : XS. The outside/recirculating air covers are switched immediately (0 Û 100 %) as soon as TX falls below or exceeds the set point XS.
No hysteresis works for the term (XS-TO)*Fakt heat or (TO-XS)*Fakt cool. If the TO varies it may occur that if the Fakt heat or Fakt cool value is high that optimization (ventilation) switches between on and off.
The outside temperature and set point XSactual are considered.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.6. S306 Free night cooling
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on-off via 5226 Q EA Free Night
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 112
Function summary
Free night cooling for ventilation plants aims to release the heat in the building by inserting cool outside air at night. The function can only be used in summer.
The PID basic program moves to " free night cooling" under the following conditions:
The SWO function can be switched ON (Status = 1) or
OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source. (5226 Q EA Free Night). Here for example using an annual program the menu function can be restricted to certain summer periods. If no binary source is set, the SWO is active.
Summer operation in summer interval.
If the average outside temperature 5169 TOaverage exceeds the limiting value 5225 TO limit FN it is assumed to be summer. The internal contact I030 Summer FNK switches to 1. The temperature of sensor 5103 Source TO is analyzed as the outside temperature.
The outside temperature is at least delta T2 5223 dT2 lower than the room temperature.
The room temperature is at least delta T1 5222 dT1 larger than the current room temperature set point.
The current set point 5101 XS current from the PID basic program and the room temperature are analyzed in line with 5221 Room sensor FN. If no separate room sensor is set the sensor value of the basic program 5102 source control variable is analyzed.
The room temperature must be above the current set point by 5222 dT1.
Parameter I13a becomes logical 1 when the requests stated above are met. Parameter I13a can be be linked further in the DDC system. In contrast to parameter I13 it is not related to
SWO PID.
The configuration of the SWO free night cooling depending on the usage time of the SWO PID occurs using parameter 5227 observecoolingtime.
Observe cooling time = Yes/---:
Free night cooling is only active if the remaining outstanding hours to the next plant start as per the set usage times is smaller than the value set in the cooling time parameter.
Observe cooling time = No:
Stated time conditions are switched off for free night cooling.
The following status condition from the SWO PID must be met:
Control mode automatic OFF:
Info = 4
I11 = plant ON = 0
I12 = Control ON = 0
Automatic operation
Remote On = 0/9/---
Remote Off = 0/9/---
Z- influence
Z- On = 0/9/---
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 113
Z-Off = 0/9/---
If all these requests are met the SWO free night cooling works on the relevant SWO PID by switching on the plant via parameter I11 and the regulator sequences are moved in line with the setting of parameter YL Wahl FN. The SWO PID does not go to normal operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Function of free night cooling
Objects 4.3. - 114
The following is switched by free night cooling:
Free night cooling works on the Y outputs set in the PID basic program in parameter 5220 YL
Choose FN. These Y outputs are switched to 100%.
The free night cooling mode is indicated by internal contact I013 Free night cooling.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 115
The internal contact of the PID basic program I011 plant ON is switched to 1. This controls the ventilators.
Resetting the free night cooling:
The free night cooling stops if the values in parameters T1 5222 dT1 or 5223 dT2 are lower than the fixed switch back difference of 2K or one of the other conditions is no longer met.
Priorities
Free night cooling is prioritized higher in night operation than the control function of the PID basic program.
In the PID basic program it is not switched to normal operation if the source 5140 Q release control in the PID basic program is set to 1.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5220 YL select FN
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227 i013
b
Room probe FN
dT1
dT1
dT2
dT2
Cooling time
TAg
TA limit FN
EA
Q EA free Night
Note cooling times
Free night cooling i013a Free night cooling possible
parameter typ
set point selection list actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point integer set point float actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
min
--
max
--
init
2
unit
selection list
No.,text
0,for Y1
1,for Y2
2,for Y3
3,for Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted C
2
2
1
0
--
--
--
--
10
10
24
25
--
--
--
--
2
5
3
17 deleted deleted
0
0
K
K h
C
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
i030
So
Summer FNk
Objects parameter typ
actual value boolean
min
--
max
--
init
0
unit
--
4.3. - 116
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.7. S307 Constant frost protection
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on-off via 5356 Q EA Frost protection stet
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 117
Function summary
The role of the ongoing frost protection for ventilation plants is to prevent the heating register from freezing when the fans are running. For this the return temperature of the heating register is controlled separately in a settable range.
Function description
The software object operates if the PID basic program has the status "Control ON" I012 = 1.
The return temperature is set as source parameter 5352 Q return sensor SF. The function of the ongoing frost protections constantly works on Y output set in parameter 5351 Y const. Frost
protection.
When the return temperature is lower than the 5353 Start to open value, the Y output set in parameter Y const. Frost protection is controlled. The connected heating valve start to open.
If the return temperature falls below the 5354 End opening value, the Y output (heating valve) is opened to the full. Both parameters Start opening and End opening therefore stipulate the proportional range for the heating valve for ongoing frost protection. The Y limits in the basic program
(Y min, Y max) and sub-menu Y-limit continue to be operational.
If the return temperature reaches a value above Start opening, the control switches back to Y min.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 118
In parameter 5355 deltaglide start opening you can enter a source, e. g. from summer gliding in order to start the opening earlier depending on the outside temperature. For a lower outside temperature the heating register valve is then opened e g. from just 18 °C (for deltaglide start
opening = 6 K + Start opening = 12 °C). deltaglide Start opening represent an offset by which
Start opening is moved.
This enables you to avoid addressing the frost protection sensor at low temperatures.
(Note: In addition the return sensor can be delayed with a attenuation to slow down the menu)
Priorities
If the heating valve's Y output is controlled at the same time by regulating the basic program, the larger setting signal always takes effect, i. e. a MAX selection operates automatically.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5351
Y
Cont. frost protection
5352
b_r
Q back sensor SF
5353 Begin open
5354 End open
5355 deltaSlide begin opening
5356
EA
Q EA Frost prot. Cont.
parameter typ
set point multistate actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
0
0
min max init unit
-4 0 value,text
1,for Y1
2,for Y2
4,for Y3
8,for Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted C
50
50
12
7
C
C
-infinity +infinity deleted K
--deleted --
Calculation
Start opening < Q return sensor CF
Y constant Frost protection = Y min
End opening < Q return sensor CF < Start opening
Y constant Frost protection = (start opening - Q return sensor CF) / (start opening - end opening - (Y max - Y min) + Y min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Q return sensor CF < End opening
Y constant Frost protection = Y max
Start opening NEW = Start opening + deltaglide start opening
4.3. - 119
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.8. S308 Minimum room temperature
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on/off via
5364 Q EA minimum room temperature if not defined, ON
4.3. - 120
Function summary
The purpose of the minimum room temperature DDC software object for ventilation plants is to prevent excessive cooling at night and when the ventilation plant is switched off. I.e. the minimum room temperature works both in automatic mode out of usage time and when in off mode due to
remote OFF or Z contact OFF.
Function description
It can be switched off using the binary source Q_EA Minimum_Room temperature.
To monitor the room temperature a sensor must be set in source parameter Q Room sensor Min
RT. If the room temperatures fall below the set limiting value TRlimit the following is switched:
The minimum room temperature works on the Y output in the PID basic program set in parameter
Y room. This output is controlled as per the XS current from the PID basic program.
The minimum room temperature status is displayed with the internal contact Min TR = 1.
The internal contact of the PID basic program plant ON is switched to 1.
This controls the ventilators. With the return message from the ventilators (via source parameter Q
release control) the internal contact Control ON is then switched to 1.
The related control however remains OFF, i.e. it only works on the Y output set in parameter Y
room.
If the room temperature rises by 2K above TRlimit, the plant switches off again.
Transfer from Min room temp to day regulation:
If the circuit is in the Min room temp mode and the usage time assigned to the control circuit and/or the contact "Remote ON" is activated, the PID control circuit only moves to complete control operation when the room temperature exceeds TRlimit by 2K.
Special Functions
If in addition the DDC sub.software object S304 start-up is active, the start-up switching must first be worked through before the minimum room temperature is operational.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Parameters
No.
5361
name of parameter
Y room set point multistate
Objects parameter typ
5362
b
Q room probe min RT
5363 TR limit
5364
EA
Q EA min RT i014 Min RT actual value deletable float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
4.3. - 121
5
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted C
--
50
--
--
10 deleted
0
C
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.9. S309 Standstill
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic program PID (ventilation) 3 times can be set
Can be switched on/off via
5376 Q EA Standstill control
4.3. - 122
Function summary
The role of the standstill DDC sub-software object for ventilation plants is to prevent the heating register from freezing when the fans stand still. To do so from a particular outside temperature the return temperature of the heating register is controlled separately.
Function description
The DDC sub-software object is operational when the PID basic program has the status "Control ON"
I12 = 0.
The outside temperature recorded in the basic PID program with source parameter source TO is compared with the limiting value set in TOlimit Frost. As soon as the outside temperature falls below this value a separate P control works on the PID control circuit's Y output set in parameter Y
standstill. The connected heating valve start to open.
If no outside temperature sensor is installed (set) in the PID basic program the standstill control function is always active when "Control ON" is I12 = 0.
The separate P control for the heating valve regulates using a set point XS return and a proportional range XP StillstReg. The return temperature with the temperature sensor set in source parameter Q
return SR is recorded as the current value for the P control.
If no return temperature sensor is installed (Set) the Y output is set to 100%.
If the outside temperature exceeds the value TOlimit Frost or the PID control is switched on (I12 =
1), the control switches back to the original Y signal.
The Y limits in the basic program (Ymin, Ymax) and sub-menu Y-limit are not operational. It is always controlled from 0 .. 100 %.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 123
Using the binary source in the Q_EA Standstill parameter the object's function can be switched on/off.
Priorities
If no outside temperature sensor and no return temperature sensor is installed (Set) the standstill regulation does not take place.
If several standstill controls work on one and the same Y output, the following priority applies:
Priority Function
Highest Standstill 1 lowest
Standstill 2
Standstill 3
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5371.1
Ziel
Y standstill set point multistate
5372.1
b_r
Q back sensor SR
5373.1
TAg
TA limit Frost
5374.1
XSr
XS back actual value deletable float set point float set point float
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-50 150 deleted --
0
2
20
50
3
10
C
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5375.1
XP
XP standstill reg set point float
5376.1
EA
Q EA standstill reg actual value deletable boolean
min max init
0,5 200 10
--deleted --
unit
C
No.
5372.2
5373.2
5374.2
5375.2
5376.2
name of parameter
5371.2
Ziel
Y standstill
b_r
Q back sensor SR
TAg
TA limit Frost
XSr
XS back
XP
XP standstill reg
EA
Q EA standstill reg
parameter typ
set point multistate actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-50 150 deleted --
0
2
20
50
3
10
0,5 200 10
--deleted
C
C
C
--
No.
5372.3
5373.3
5376.3
name of parameter
5371.3
Ziel
Y standstill
b_r
Q back sensor SR
TAg
TA limit Frost
5374.3
XSr
XS back
5375.3
XP
XP standstill reg
EA
Q EA standstill reg
parameter typ
set point multistate actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-50 150 deleted --
0
2
20
50
3
10
0,5 200 10
--deleted
C
C
C
--
4.3. - 124
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.10. S310 Energy selection
Activation
Sub-function of
basic ventilation program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined, ON
4.3. - 125
Function summary
The choice of energy for ventilation plants selects the energy source that is most effective (cheapest) for the relevant control status.
Example: In line with the control status, cooling is to take place.
Therefore a choice is to be made as to whether the cooling takes place using the cooling register or whether any cool outside air is available that can be used for cooling. Then, for example, the air covers are switched appropriately.
Example: In line with the control status, heating is to take place.
Therefore a choice is made as to whether the heating register is used for heating or whether any warm outside air may be used. Then the air covers are switched as appropriate.
Function description
The two analog values required for selecting the energy can be chosen freely as required. However they must be analog values with the same unit, e.g. two temperatures or two humidities.
To release the switch function the analog value 5231 Source ESelection 2 must be larger than the analog value 5230 Source ESelection 1. If the difference of the two values is larger than the set point 5235 ESelcet Difference the following switching functions are carried out:
The effect of the Y output signals selected in parameter 5232 Inv ESelection is inverted.
The internal output I023 Energy selection is set.
If the different between the two analog values is less than the set point ESelect Difference by the return difference Xsd Energy selection, the Y output signals and the internal output I23 Energy
selection are returned to their original status.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 126
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 127
Summary:
Activate switching:
I023 = 1: Source ESelection 2 - Source ESelection 1 > ESelect Difference
No switching, switch back:
I023 = 0: Source ESelection 2 - Source ESelection 1 > ESelect Difference Xsd energy selection
Using the binary source in the Q_EA Energy selection parameter the object's function can be switched on/off. If no binary source is set the function can always operate.
Priorities
If the Y outputs in the PID basic program are analyzed in other DDC software objects (e.g. S322 sequence menu) the inverting also works on the following DDC software objects.
If at the same time the DDC sub-menu S311 Sequence converter is installed and active, the function of the DDC sub-menu S311 Sequence converter has a higher priority.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5230
Q1
Source E Sel 1
5231
Q2
Source E Sel 2
5232
Inv
Inv select
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable float set point selection list
5235
diff
E Sel difference
Version 05/06 set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--0
0 20 1 selection list
No.,text
0,for Y1
1,for Y2
2,for Y3
3,for Y4
--
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5237
xsd
Xsd Energy select
5238
EA
Q EA Energy select i023 Energy select
parameter typ
set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min
0
--
--
max
10
init
2 deleted --
0 --
unit
--
4.3. - 128
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.11. S311 Sequence change
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic program PID (ventilation) can be set 1 x
4.3. - 129
Function summary
The purpose of the sub-software object S311 sequence converter is to switch the operating direction of the Y outputs in the basic program depending on particular plant statuses.
Function description
In parameters 5240 source SP YL1 to 5243 source SP YL4 a binary source is set.
If the binary source signal switches from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 the corresponding Y outputs YL1 to YL4 on the PID basic program are switched to inverted or back again. No inverting takes place if the binary source is invalid.
If access is made on the Y output in the PID basic program in other DDC software objects the inverted direction is adopted.
The limits of the Y outputs on the PID basic program 5141 Y1 min to 5148 4 max are still operational. E.g. if a Y output works with the limits 20 - 100 %, the inverted Y output also works with these limits.
Priorities
If the DDC sub-menu M310 energy selection is installed and active at the same time the function of the DDC sub-menu M311 sequence reversal is prioritized higher.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5240
QY1
Source SU YL1
5241
QY2
Source SU YL2
5242
QY3
Source SU YL3
5243
QY4
Source SU YL4
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
-deleted deleted deleted
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.12. S312 Limitation
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating and ventilation program 0 ... can be set 2 x
Can be switched on-off via
5279 Q EA limitation if not defined, ON
4.3. - 130
Function summary
The DDC control function of the main control circuit is restricted using DDC software object limitation.
The limitation is required for example:
for keeping the supply air temperature in ventilation controls in comfortable limits to curb the supply temperature in heating controls before reaching technological limiting values.
A max or min limit is possible in line with the requests.
The max or min limits may glide in line with a command value. E.g. if for ventilation controls, beside lifting the room´s set point depending on the outside temperature, concurrently min limit of the supply air is lifted.
Function description
In the DDC software object limitation the selected limitation sensor in the source parameter
5270 Q limitation sensor is set. The limitation value is set with parameter
5271 limitation value. Parameter 5272 limitation sets whether this is a max or a min limiting value.
The limitation works in the following 2 phases: a) The value of the limitation sensor nears the max or min limitation value.
b) The value of the limitation sensor is higher or lower than the max or min limitation value.
Re a) the limitation function is adopted gliding. The variance of the limitation sensor to the limitation value is compared with the main control variance of the basic program. Depending on the relevant control variance control is still made with the main control circuit XP.
Re b) if the set Max limitation value is exceeded or the number falls below the min limitation value all
XPs on the control circuit are replaced by 5273 XPlimitation in order control the limitation value infringement as quickly as possible. This control status is indicated by switching the internal contact
V10 limitation and I020 XP switching from "0" to "1".
Limiting value glide can occur for both the min. and max limiting values using command value source parameter 5275 command value limit.
The range in which the min and max limits should glide is stipulated by parameters 5277 glide start
limit and 5278 glide end limit. The influence of gliding is set by parameter 5276 EFg. If 5276 EFg =
0, glide does not occur.
If inverting is set winter compensation takes place, i.e. the limiting value is raised if the command value falls below the value of 5278 glide end limit.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 131
If no inverting is set summer compensation takes place, i.e. the limiting value is raised if the command value exceeds the value of 5277 glide start limit.
This means that inverting exchanges internally to calculating glide stat and end. (Please refer to the end of the document for all glide calculations.)
When inverting the min limit (Inv limit) the effect of the limitation function is inverted (works like a max limit).
When inverting the max limit ( Inv limit) the effect of the limitation function is inverted (works like a min limit).
Limitation Inverting XW calculation
Minimum
Minimum
No
Yes
Maximum No
Maximum Yes
MIN (XWgp; XWbegr)
MAX (XWgp; -XWbegr)
MAX (XWgp; XW begr)
MIN (XWgp; -XWbegr)
Priorities
The limit with the object index 10 is prioritized higher than the one with object index 02.
The limitation function of the DDC sub-menu limit has a higher priority than that of the DDC submenu XP switching. But the following functions are differentiated: XP change and XW change.
Priorities of the limitation function a) (change to the current control variance):
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 132
Priority Function
Highest S312.1 Limitation 1
S303 Cascade (only PID) lowest S312.2 Limitation 2
The current control variance is determined as follows:
1. XWcurrent = Limitation 2 (XWbasic program, XWlimitation2)
2. XWcurrent = cascade (XWcurrent, XWcascade) (only PID)
3. XWcurrent = Limitation 1 (XWcurrent, XWlimitation1)
Priorities of the limitation function b) (change to the XP range):
Priority Function
Highest S312.1 Limitation 1
S312.2 Limitation 2 lowest S317 XP conversion
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5270.1
Q
Q limitation sensor
5271.1
Limitation value
5272.1
Limitation
5273.1
XP1
XP limitation
5274.1
inv
Inv. limitation
5275.1
Q_Fg
Lead size limit
5276.1
EFg
EFg
5277.1
Anf
Slide begin limit
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point multistate set point float set point boolean actual value deletable float set point float set point integer
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--infinity +infinity 150
-2 1 value,text
0,Minimum
1,Maximum
-0,5
--
200
--
10
0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-10 10 0 --
-50 150 22 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 133
No.
name of parameter
5278.1
End
Slide end limit
5279.1
EA
Q EA limitation v10.1
Limitation
No.
name of parameter
5270.2
Q
Q limitation sensor
5271.2
Limitation value
5272.2
Limitation
5273.2
5274.2
5275.2
5276.2
5277.2
5278.2
5279.2
v10.2
XP2
XP limitation
inv
Inv. limitation
Q_Fg
Lead size limit
EFg
EFg
Anf
Slide begin limit
End
Slide end limit
EA
Q EA limitation
Limitation
parameter typ
set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point multistate set point float set point boolean actual value deletable float set point float set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min
-50
max
150
--
--
init
32 deleted
0
unit
--
--
--
-10
-50
-50
--
--
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
-2 1
--
0,5
--
200
--
10
0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted -value,text
0,Minimum
1,Maximum
--
10
150
150
--
--
0
22
32 deleted
0
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Calculating the gliding of the target limitation value
glide start < glide end
4.3. - 134
glide end < glide start
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 135
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.13. S313 SP switching
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... 4 can be set
Can be switched on-off via
5288 Q EA Special target if not defined, ON
4.3. - 136
Function summary
In the DDC software object S313 set point switching a constant is defined that replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit depending on a binary source. In addition any analog value can be assigned as a set point via an analog source.
Function description
In the DDC software object set point switching an analog value is set from a source, parameter 5285
Q Special set point (e.g. a characteristic value) or a constant, parameter 5286 Special set point.
The value of the analog source has a higher priority than the constant.
Depending on a binary source, parameter 5287 Q EA special set point replaces the value of the analog source or the constants the set point of the DDC control circuit.
It is possible to delay switching between the values. Parameter 5287 slope special set point is used for this. The number of K/min by which the set point may change at most can be entered here.
Switching to the special set point can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source (5288 Q O
special target). If parameter 5287 slope special set point has a valid value entered, changes to the set point in the basic program (e.g. day/night set point in basic heating program) is always accompanies by a time delay for an active "Menu SPSW". The slope with the highest priority is operational (object index 1 before 2 before 3 before 4).
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 137
Priorities
Object index 1 has the highest priority, menu index 4 has the lowest priority.
1. Set point switching 1 15313.1
2. Set point switching 2 15313.2
3. Set point switching 3 15313.3
4. Set point switching 4 15313.4
5. Set point remote control 15316
6. Set point correction 15315
Note
Basic heating program:
In the basic heating program the set point switching replaces the calculate TStarget current from the basic program or the target room value TR target for the set DDC sub-menu 15318 room correction and/or 15300 optimize. Switching to a firm TS target/TR target excludes night falls. If the optimize sub-menu is active the new TR target influences intermediate heating, pre-lowering, preset, the heating up time and the adaptions.
Basic PID program:
In the PID basic program for active set point switching the current set point XS current is overwritten.
If in addition to the basic program the DDC software object S314 set point glide also works this calculated XS current is overwritten.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5285.1
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.1
XS
custom setpoint
5287.1
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.1
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
---
C deleted K/min deleted --
No.
name of parameter
5285.2
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.2
XS
custom setpoint
5287.2
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60 deleted
C
K/min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5288.2
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
No.
name of parameter
5285.3
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.3
XS
custom setpoint
5287.3
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.3
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
--deleted deleted
C
K/min
--
No.
name of parameter
5285.4
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.4
XS
custom setpoint
5287.4
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.4
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
--deleted deleted
C
K/min
--
4.3. - 138
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.14. S314 Set point glide
Activation
Sub-function of
Basic PID program can be set 1 x
Can be switched on-off via 5254 Q EA Gliding
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 139
Function summary
The function of the DDC sub-software function set point glide is to allow the set point to glide with a command value. At the same time a range in which the glide is permitted can be set.
Function description
A guidance signal parameter 5250 command value SG the current set point
5101 XS current in the PID basic program is raised or lowered. Any analog value in the DDC4000 system (e.g. outside temperature) can be selected as a guidance signal.
The command value only results in a change to the set point within a glide range. The glide range is stipulated by the parameters 5251 glide start SG and 5252 glide end SG.
The influence of the guidance signal on the limiting value change is determined with the parameter
5253 INF. If Inf is negative this can force a reduction in the set point.
Parameter 5255 Delta SP gliding is an actual value and shows the difference of the current set point that results from the DDC sub-menu set point gliding.
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source (Status = 0). (5254 Q EA Gliding)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Based on the start and end of glide-ing the following calculation arises for the set point gliding: glide start < glide end
comvalue < glide start: Delta_glide = 0
glide start< comvalue < glide end: Delta_glide = EF * (comvalue - glide start)
glide end < comvalue: Delta_glide = EF * (glide end - glide start) glide end < glide start
comvalue < glide end: Delta_glide = EF * (glide start - glide end)
glide end < comvalue < glide start: Delta_glide = EF * (glide start - comvalue)
glide start < comvalue: Delta_glide = 0
Set point = XS current (basic program) + Delta_glide command value < glide start : Set point = XS (basic program) glide start < command value < glide end : Set point = XS (basic program) + Delta_glide
Delta_glide = EF * (comvalue - glide start)
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
glide end < comvalue: Set point = XS (basic program) + Delta_glide
Delta_glide = EF * (glide end - glide start) a) Set point raised for increased command signal and positive EF value
Setting: glide start SG1 < glide end SG1
EF = positive value a) Set point lowered for increased command signal and negative EF value
Setting: glide start SG1 < glide end SG1
EF = negative value c) set point lowered for falling command signal and negative
EF value
Setting glide start SG1 > glide end SG1
EF = negative value a) Set point raised for falling command signal and positive EF value
Setting glide start SG1 > glide end SG1
EF = positive value
Example: Gliding as per AT
Set point movement from 20 °C to 25 °C = 5K glide range (AT) from 22 °C to 32 °C = 10K
EF - Influence guidance signal 5K|10K = 0.5
Version 05/06
4.3. - 140
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 141
The DDC sub-software object set point glide not only works on the XSactual, but also moves the supply air min. limitation of the cascade if parameter 5207 gliding cascade is set to "YES".
Note
On the PID basic program for active set point glide the current set point XS current is overwritten.
Priorities
If in addition to the basic program the DDC sub-menu cascade is also working the supply air min limit is moved by the same amount at the same time if parameter 5207 gliding cascade is set to "yes".
If in addition to the basic program the DDC sub-menu set point switching is also operational than only the set point switching is operational.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5250 Lead size SG actual value deletable float
5251
Anf
Slide start SG
5252
End
Slide end SG set point float set point float
5253
EF
EF SG
5254
EA
Q EA sliding
5255
Delta
Delta SW sliding set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
-10
--
10
--
0,5
--
--
-deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.15. S315 Set point correction
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via 5292 Q EA Target correction
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 142
Function summary
DDC software object S315 address an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read. This analog value works as a correction on the DDC control circuit set point.
Function description
Parameter source target correction 0..100 % sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system. The value range produced by this analog source is interpreted as 0 ... 100%. (Effect like source target correction in the DDC3000)
The value range for the set point correction is set with parameters upper limit release SPC and
lower limit release SPC. The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being corrected.
SPC = (release SPC UL - release SPC LL) / 100 * Q SPC (in 0..100 %) + release SPC LL
Parameter source target correction absolute value sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system. The value range produced from this analog source is processed as a real value, e.g. -5..5 K.
The imported value is kept in the upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC limits.
Higher/lower values are cut off. The source target correction absolute value has a higher priority than source target correction 0..100 %.
The function of the DDC sub-menu can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source. ( Q EA Target correction)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Priorities
If in addition to the DDC software object set point correction a DDC software object set point switching and/or set point remote control is active, the following priorities apply:
Priority Function
Highest Set point switch 1 S313.1
Set point switch 2 S313.2
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 143
Priority Function
Set point switch 3 S313.3
Set point switch 4 S313.4
Set point remote control S316 lowest Set point correction S315
Example
DDC control circuit set point to be corrected
20°C
5mBar
Lower limit SPC release Upper limit SPC release valid range for a set point correction
-4 6 16 °C to 26 °C
0 2 5 mBar to 7 mBar
Note
Basic heating program:
The DDC submenu set point correction only works for "day regulation".
The set point correction influences KH (parallel movement of heating curve) if the DDC sub-menu
15318 room correction or 15300 optimization is not active.
TStarget new = TStarget + target correction
If DDC room correction or optimize sub-menus are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the set point correction. This, for example, influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction.
TRtarget new = TRtarget + target correction
Room correction: TStarget new = TStarget -(Roomtemp – TRtarget new) * ER correction
Optimization: NO TStarget correction
Basic PID program:
In this basic program the set point correction works on the current set point XS current.
XS current new = XS current + target correction
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5290
Q100
Q EA Setpoint Correction
parameter typ
actual value deletable float
min
0
max
100
init unit
deleted %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 144
No.
name of parameter
5291
Q
Source Setpoint Correction
5292
EA
Q EA Setpoint Correction
5293 release SWK
5294 Release SWK above
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--deleted --
-infinity +infinity -5 K
-infinity +infinity 5 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.16. S316 Set point remote control
Activation
Sub-function of
Heating and ventilation basic program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined, ON
4.3. - 145
Function summary
DDC software object set point remote control addresses an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read.
Function description
Parameter 5260 actuating variable sets the value of a set point control or any analog value of the
DDC4000 system whose value range was previously scaled to 0 .. 100%.
The value range for the set point remote setting is set with parameter 5261 Start remote and parameter 5262 End remote. The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being set.
The calculated set point is depicted on parameter 5265 XS remote control. This analog value replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit.
The function of the sub-menu can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source.
(Status = 0). (Q EA TargetRemote)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 146
Priorities
If in addition to the DDC software object set point remote control a DDC software object set point switching and/or set point correction is active, the following priorities apply:
Priority Function
Highest S313.1 Set point switch 1
S313.2 Set point switch 2
S313.3 Set point switch 3
S313.4 Set point switch 4
S316 Set point remote control lowest S315 Set point correction
Example:
5261 Start remote
10 °C
20 %rF
0 mBar
5262 End remote
25 °C
80 %rF
5 mBar
5265 XS remote control at 0 ..100% value change
10 °C .. 25 °C
20 %rF .. 80 %rF
0 mBar .. 5 mBar
Note
Basic heating program:
The DDC submenu set point correction only works for "day regulation".
The set point correction influences KH (parallel movement of heating curve) if the DDC software object S318 room correction or S300 optimization is not active.
TStarget correction = XS remote control = (End remote - start remote) * actuating variable / 100 % + start remote
TStargetnew = TStarget + TStarget correction
If the DDC software object room correction or optimize are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the XS remote control. This, for example, influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction.
Room correction: TStargetcorrection = (Room temp - XS remote control) * ER
Optimization: NO TStarget correction
Basic PID program:
In this basic program the set point remote control works on the current set point XS current.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 147
XS current = XS remote control = (End remote - start remote) * actuating variable / 100 % + start remote
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5260 Set size
5261
Anf
Begin remote
5262
End
End remote
5263
EA
Q EA setpoint remote
5265 XS Remote setting
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value float
min
0
--
-infinity
max
100
--
+infinity
init
deleted
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 50 deleted
0
unit
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.9.17. S317 XP switching
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5306 Q XP switching if not defined, ON
4.3. - 148
Function summary
DDC control circuit control setting parameters are switched with the DDC sub-menu XP switching.
Depending on a binary source the proportional ranges of the Y outputs, the rate and regulating periods can be switched.
Function description
The binary source is set in parameter source XP switching.
If the digital source Q XP switching is "1" or "---" the controller setting parameters are replaced by the set setting values.
The working XP switching is displayed via internal contact I20 XP switching in the basic heating program or PID.
Note:
In the basic heating program I20 XP switching only becomes "1" if XPY1 changes. Only changes TN
New and/or rate New; I20 XP switch remains "0". I20 XP switch can also be "1" as a result of a limit.
Priorities
The DDC sub-menus limitation menus 1 and 2 work before the XP switch.
Priority Function
Highest Limitation 1 S312.1
Cascade (only PID) S303
Limitation 2 S312.2
XP switching S317 lowest Structure delay start-up S304
Special Functions
Depending on the reset time tN set in the basic program the
XPY (basic program) is switched to the XPY (XP switching) gliding and vice versa.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5300
XPY1
XPY1 New
5301
XPY2
XPY2 New
5302
XPY3
XPY3 New
5303
XPY4
XPY4 New
5304
tN
Tn New
5305
d
Vorhalt
5306
Q
Q XP change overR i020 XP Changeover
parameter typ
set point float set point float set point float set point float set point deletable float set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
min max init
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 99
1
--
--
99
--
--
3
unit
K deleted s deleted --
0
K
K
K min
--
4.3. - 149
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.3.2.10. S239 Basic program heating
Activation
Basic program
- can be set 12 times
Objects
Function summary
The basic heating program is weather-oriented supply temperature control with a constant Y output. Function extensions are made via DDC software and hardware objects.
4.3. - 150
Function description
4.3.2.10.1. Graphical summaries
Basic function
The supply temperature, as a control variable, must be defined in parameter 5102 source control
variable. Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 151
The command of the warm-up set point occurs as per the delayed outside temperature. The calculated delayed outside temperature is depicted on parameter 5153 TOvz. The average outside temperature is output on 5169 TOaverage. The delay with which the TOvz outside temperature follows can be set via parameter 5168 time constants TOvz. If the starting set point is guided by the actual outside temperature parameter 5152 Rules as per TO must be set to "YES".
As an outside sensor, any analog value in the DDC system can also be set in parameter 5103
source TO.
As per the heating curve (refer to image) with the set values 5155 EF and 5156 KH the heating control circuit calculates a start set point.
On the basis of this set point and the function of other DDC sub-menus (e.g. S314 set point
switching) a new set point is calculated that is depicted as the current value on parameter 5151
TStarget current.
Minimum and maximum limits for the supply temperature are set in parameters 5165 TS min and
5166 TS max.
The basic heating program sets the control states day regulation and night rules set points for the start. For night rules the supply temperature is lowered to a value set in parameter5167 TS abs.
TS target calculation
TO(vz) < 15 °C: TStarget day = 20 + KH - EF * (TO(vz) -24)
TO(vz) m³ 15 °C: TStarget day = 20 + KH - EF * (1.8 * TO(vz) - 36)
TStarget night = TStarget day + TS abs
For setting the heating control parameter 5120 XPY1 to set the P-share, 5106 TN to set the I-share and 5125 rate to set the D share are used. The control variance (control variable - TStarget current) is displayed in parameter 5105 XW.
Parameter 5128 xwh sets a non-sensitive zone, i.e. within xw=0 +/- xwh the Y output is not changed.
If xw exceeds this range the control is normal.
The basic heating program has a constant Y output. The Y output calculated from the basic program can be overwritten through BMS influence, manual intervention or through DDC sub-menus (e.g.
S302 Y-Set). The current calculated value for the Y output is between 0...100 % and is displayed on parameter 5173 YH1.
The output of the Y output values occurs via source parameterizing in the basic programs of the DDC
Central Units (DDC4000) and the DDC modules (DDC bus module BMA, BMD, field bus module
FBM, control cabinet bus module SBM).
For the Y output it is possible to set a max and a min limit, parameters 5141 Y1 min and 5145 Y1
max.
Through central unit influence, remote control or usage time programs you can switch between different control statuses (day regulation, night rules, OFF, heat up, auto) in the basic heating program. The resulting DDC control circuit statuses are shown via internal contacts: I004 day
regulation, I005 night rules, I007 heat up and I009 control status OFF. This and other internal contacts can be used for other links in the PLC.
Internal contact parameter I001 Pump switches on the pump of the heating circuit. It is switched off with a hunting time as per parameter 5182 pump hunting.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 152
Internal contact parameter I003 boiler request displays the boiler request. In control operation and in combination with the DDC software object S300 Optimize heating it is set when heating and intermediate heating.
Priorities
Basic heating program, switch control statuses
Priority Function Comment
Highest 5175Source remote control If the source remote control is not set or set to auto, the basic heating program depends on any remote control by a BMS or the assigned usage time program.
Z Z contacts If the Z contacts are not influenced or the Auto state set the basic heating program depends on the assigned usage time program.
lowest Q_N Schedule object S118 If no time program is assigned to the basic heating program day regulation are used.
Function description extended functions
Reducing the start -up lowering
For particularly low outside temperatures the value for night falling can be reduced automatically in order to avoid excessive room/building cooling. This ensures that the rooms can be heated up to the target temperature.
The range for automatically reducing the lower start set point for night rules is stipulated by:
the outside temperature from which the fall in supply temperature is no longer completely effective, parameter 5160 TO reduction the design temperature for the heating plant, parameter 5172 T design
If parameter 5160 TO Reduction is deleted no automatic reduction occurs, i. e. the TS reduction TS
abs remains fully operational.
There is no TS reduction if the outside temperature is close to the design temperature of the heating plant 5172 T design. In this case the heating continues to to be controlled via the "day regulation".
If "TO <= T design + TR target - 18" then night rules -> day regulation
Example:
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 153
External set point for supply temperature
If an outside set point, parameter 5183 TStarget ext, is set it replaces the target day value calculated in the basic heating program. The start reduction is still operational at night. Reducing the start reduction for particularly low outside temperatures remains effective.
There is no TS reduction if the outside temperature is close to the design temperature of the heating plant 5172 T design. In this case the heating continues to be controlled via the "day regulation".
TOGrenzabs = T design + TR target - 18
If TO <= TOGrenzabs then night rules -> day regulation
Economy
The economy function is switched on with parameter 5170 Economy. The economy status is displayed via i019 Economy.
If the calculated start set point falls so far that only low heating energy can be supplied to the room the recirculating pump is switched off and the Y-valve closed when the economy function is activated.
The boiler is also switched off it is not switched on by another heating control circuit or boiler request
(PLC). If a higher start set point is calculated, the boiler and recirculating pump come on again. The economy function differentiates between floor and radiator heating using the steepness of the heating curve EF.
Conditions for switching the economy function on and off:
Boiler
Circulating pump
Off
On
EF < 1.0
(under-floor heating)
EF > 1.0
(radiator heating)
TStarget < TRtarget TStarget < TRtarget + 5K
TStarget > TRtarget + 2K TStarget > TRtarget + 7K
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 154
If the DDC software object S318 room correction or S300 optimize heating is installed and active the target room value TRtarget is set in this DDC sub-menu (TRtarget = MIN(TR target; source room
temperature). Otherwise the economy function works with a fixed TRtarget = 20°C.
Frost protection
The frost protection function is switched on with parameter 5171 frost protection.
It ensures that the recirculating pump does not switch off outside regular operation at an outside temperature < 3°C. This prevents the heating plant from freezing.
The recirculating pump is only switched off when the outside temperature exceeds 6°C.
Pump blocking protection
The "pump blocking protection" is now implemented by hardware objects.
Set point remote control, correction, switching
For active set point switching by software object S313 set point switching the set points are not switched for day regulation and night rules. Only the set point stipulated by the set point switching is operational.
The current set point is calculated with the following priority:
Priority Function
Highest S313 Set point switch 1-4
S316 Set point remote control
S315 Set point correction lowest S239 Basic program heating
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5000 Zustand
State
parameter typ
actual value multistate
min
--
max
10
init
0
unit
value,text
0,Off
1,Pre-lowering
2,Lowering
3,Interim heating
4,Heating-up
5,Previous
6,Regulations day
7,Regulations night
8,Economy
9,Standby
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5102 Q Reg
Source controlled variable
parameter typ
actual value deletable float
5103 Q TA
Source TA
5105 xw
XW
5106 tN tN
5115 Q_N
State N actual value deletable float actual value float set point deletable integer actual value deletable text
5120 XPY1
XPY1
5125 D
Vorhalt
5128 xwh xwh
5141 Y1min
Y1 min set point float set point deletable integer set point float set point float
5145 Y1max
Y1 max
5151 TVSakt
TVSoll current
5152 RegNach
Regulate with TA
5153 TAvz
TAvz
5155 EF
EF
5156 KH
KH
5160 TARed
TA Reduction
5165 TVmin
TV min
5166 TVmax
TV max set point float actual value float set point boolean set point float set point float set point integer set point deletable integer set point integer set point integer
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted C
-infinity +infinity deleted C
-infinity +infinity 0
1
--
0,5
1
0
0
0
99
--
999,9
299
50
100
100
-infinity +infinity 0
--0
-infinity +infinity 0
0
-100
-50
0
0
10
100
30
999
999
3 deleted --
50 deleted s
0
0
100
1,5
0
K
%
%
C
--
C
--
K deleted C
20
95
K min
K
C
C
Version 05/06
4.3. - 155
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 156
No.
name of parameter
5167 TVabs
TV abs
5168 TAvz
Time constant TAvz
5169 TAm
TA middle
5170 Eco
Economy
5172 Ausleg
T Configuration
5173 Y
YH1
5175 QFern
Source remote control
5182 Pu t
Pumps return flow
5183 TVSoll e
TV Set ext
7801 h Y1
Manual influence Y1 i004
Tag
Regulate day i005
Nacht
Regulate night i006
Opt
Optimize i007
Aufh
Heating i009
Aus
Control condition AUS i010
ZHeiz
Intermediate heating i019
Eco
Economy
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer actual value float set point boolean set point integer actual value float actual value multistate
min
-999
1
--
-50
0
max
0
99
--
0
100
init
-12
24
-infinity +infinity 0
0
-12
0
unit
K h
C
--
C
%
-4 0 set point integer actual value deletable float set point deletable float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
30 20
-infinity +infinity deleted C
100
--
--
--
--
--
--
-deleted %
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
-value,text
9,Auto
1,Source remote day
35,Source remote night
0,Source remote OFF min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 157
No.
Z
name of parameter
i020
XP U
XP Changeover
Z
Z-contacts
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value multistate
min
--
--
max
--
5
init
0
4
* Nr.
Beschreibung
1) H01 Bem: RPG-Index und "instanziiert-Bit" Red. 25.7.03 nach Fehlermeldung Sti.
2) State Gibt den Zustand des Heizautomaten wieder.
0 - Aus
1 - Vorabsenken
2 - Absenken
3 - Zwischenheizen
4 - Aufheizen
5 - Vorein
6 - Regeln Tag
7 - Regeln Nacht
8 - Economy
9 - Stand By
unit
-value,text
1,Z1 Day
35,Z2 Night
36,Z3 Heating up
0,Z4 Off
9,Automatic
What is missing:
- better image file for heating curve, original is a Word graphic
- TO reduction, T design - image file, original is a Word graphic
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.3.2.10.1. Graphical summaries
TStarget calculation
Objects 4.3. - 158
Version 05/06
Software structure
The controller
Objects 4.3. - 159
Version 05/06
Software structure
The statuses
Objects 4.3. - 160
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.2. S300 Optimization
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program
Can be switched on-off via 5380 Q EA Optimization
Condition
A usage time program (schedule object S117) must be assigned to the basic program.
4.3. - 161
can be set once if not defined, ON
Function summary
The DDC software object S300 Optimization (heating) has the function of controlling a heating plant such that at the start of the usage time the desired room temperature is reached and can fall directly at the end of the usage time.
For this the parameters that represent the temperature behavior of the building are set, temperatures measured and calculations undertaken. These calculations include the responses of the previous control and management processes, i. e. it is adapted.
Times are calculated for switching the heating on in order to achieve the desired room temperature at the start of the usage time, or to lower the heating.
Function description
With the DDC software object the minimum heating time to achieve the target room value at the start of use is calculated. In the heating-up operation the building is heated with the maximum supply temperature. If the room temperature reaches the target room value of 5180 TRtarget operation is switched from "warm up" to "day regulation". Using 5560 TAUup the correct heating start time is calculated. The 5560 TAUup and 5561 TAUdown parameters are adapted as per the local environment.
The operation of the sub-menu can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source 5380 Q EA
Optimization.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 162
Heating-up
If the heating circuit is in the "lowering" status the "heating" status is started when the calculated heating time tAuf>= the remaining time before usage starts.
The heating-up operation is ended
Advance switching on
If the rule is for target day value or usage time start, the heating operation and usage time start is <
4h and room temperature > RoomTargetDay or TO < TOGrenzabs
if from 4 hr before usage starts TR >= TRtarget - 0.5K (transfer from "heating" to "preset"), if the continuing calculation of tAuf shows that the room temperature reached the set point by more than 6 hrs too soon (change from "heat up" to "lower"), if the usage time start TR >= TRtarget (transfer from "heating" to "day regulation"), if at usage time start TR < TRtarget, but the maximum heating time (Parameter 5150) is cancelled (transfer from "heating up" to "Day regulation").
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 163
Reduction operation
The relevant heating circuit moves to the "lower" status if
end of usage is reached (Schedule output = night) or advance lowering is calculated (presets).
Advance lowering
In order to save energy the heating circuit can be changed to lowering operation if there is overheating as a result of third-party heating or the room's storage behavior even before the end of the usage time.
The calculation as to whether early switching off is possible is activated when: TR > TRtarget +2K.
Advance switching off takes place if the "Cooling time >= the remaining usage time". The cooling time is the period in which the room cools to the TRtargettemperature.
The heating switches on again (Day regulation) if TR < TRtarget.
The advance lowering can be permitted or prohibited using the 5565 Advlow parameter.
Interim heating
Interim heating is used in lowering operation if the temperature falls below the lowering temperature
5181 TRmin.
The intermediate heating status is quitted again,
if TR >= TRmin + 1 K (transfer from "intermediate heating" after "falling"), if TR >= TRmin + 3 K, if the time to the next usage time is still more than 12 hours AND the difference TRtarget -
TRminis >= 6 K (transfer from "intermediate heating" and "lowering"), if TO <= T design + TRtarget - 18 K (transfer from "intermediate heating" to "Heating"), if the time span to the next usage time is lower than the calculated heating time (transfer from
"intermediate heating" to "heating").
TAUup-Adaption
The parameter 5560 TAUup describes the temperature increase (in K per hour) when heating the building. TAUup is a relatively long-term average value for the building physics facts (building constants) and is stated in the basic setting at 0.420 K/h.
The TAUup-Adaption occurs at the end of the heating period. (time of transfer from "heating" to "day regulation", "preset" or a return to "lowering" as a result of exceeding the TRtarget).
Recalculating the TAUup only occurs if the actual heating time is larger than 40 and the temperature increase in the room is at least 0.5 K. 40 % of the newly calculated TAUup value flows into the calculation:
TAUup = 0.6 * TAUupOLD + 0.4 * TAUupNEW
Heating time = (TRtarget – Room temperature) / TAUup + idle time
TAUupNEW = (Room temperature heating - Room temperature heating start) / (heating end - heating start)
When starting up a different basic time setting can be set.
The TAUup-Adaption can be permitted or prohibited with the 5564 TAUup-Adapt parameter
TAUdown-Adaption
The parameter 5561 TAUdown describes the temperature decrease (in K per hour) when cooling the
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 164
building. TAUdown is a relatively long-term average value for the building physics facts (building constants) and is stated in the basic setting at 0.300 K/h.
The TAUdown-Adaption takes place within 6 hr from starting to lower the temperature, if in this time the building could cool down freely (i.e. no intermediate heating, manual intervention etc. ). The calculation takes place if the room has cooled by 0.3 K within the period of 2 h to 6 hr after lowering starts. 40 % of the newly calculated TAUdown value flows into the calculation:
TAUdown = 0,6 * TAUdownOLD + 0,4 * TAUdownNEW
When starting up a different basic time setting can be set.
The TAUdown-Adaption can be permitted or prohibited with the 5563 TAUdown-Adapt parameter
K Factor
The 5562 K factor (no unit) parameter influences the heating phase. It considers the room temperature for the past three days. This provides a longer heating period. This may be necessary if there was no heating operation for a longer period of time due to holidays or a weekend.
U-starting, K-starting
The 5566 U-starting (recirculating pump starting) and 5567 K-starting (boiler starting) parameters are the time constants that characterize the plant technology. These can be set as per the specific plant technology.
At the time of changing from "lowering" to "intermediate heating" or "heating" the recirculating pump is first controlled via I001. After the end of the U-starting time the boiler request I003 is active. Only after the end of the K-starting time is valve 5173 YH1 opened.
Idle time
The 5568 idle time parameter is a time constant that characterizes the plant technology. These time constants are automatically re-calculated for an active TAUup Adaption by the circuit and represent the time that the controller requires after heating starts until the relevant change in room temperature occurs.
When starting up a different basic time setting can be set.
Outputs:
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 165
"Pre-lowering", "lower", "intermediate heating" and "heating" are used to set the internal output I006
Optimization.
If the heating circuit is in "heating" mode the internal I007 heating output is set.
For "intermediate heating" the internal output I010 intermediate heating is active.
In the "heating", "day regulation", "night rules" and "intermediate heating" modes the internal output
I003 boiler request is set.
The "preset" status is a quasi-day rule mode - all I outputs are reset. Neither I006 Optimization nor
I004 day rules is active. In "preset" 5151 TStarget, 5105 XWcurrent and 5173 YH1 regulate how the rules in "day rules" work.
In "pre-lowering" or "lower" the actuating signal 5173 YH1 is set to 0 %.
Special features
A forced, extraordinary heating process (chimney sweep) via the Z-influence (Z03 Heating) can falsify the TAUup-Adaption if this lasts longer than 40 minutes.
By deactivating the DDC sub-menu Optimization for a short time or changing the 5563 TAUup-
Adapt = NO parameter you can avoid adaption malfunctions.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Parameters
No.
5150
5180
5181
5380
5381
5384
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
name of parameter
Aufh max
Maximum heating-up time
TRsoll
TR set
TRmin
TR min
EA Opti
Q EA optimizing
Q Rt
Q room probe
EA
Q EA Room correction
t auf
Dew up HO
t ab
Dew down HO
K
K-Factor HO
tab erl
Dew up adapt HO
tauf erl
Dew down adapt HO
Vorabs
Initial HO
UVorl_HO
U-Feed HO
KVorl_HO
K-Feed HO
Totz HO
Dead time HO
5316.4
EF4
EF Y limitation i001
Pu
Pump i003
Kessel
Boiler requirements
Objects 4.3. - 166
set point boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point float set point float set point boolean set point boolean
parameter typ
set point deletable integer set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float actual value boolean actual value boolean
--
60
30
120
--
--
10
1,5
0
0
--
0
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
min
0
max
300
init unit
deleted min
-infinity +infinity 20
-infinity +infinity 17
C
C
--
0
--deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted C
--
10 deleted
0,42
--
K/h
10
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0,3
0
--
--
--
-min min min
--
--
K/h
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
what is missing: good process diagrams, times
4.3. - 167
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.3. S301 Y limitation
Activation
Sub-function of
each heating and ventilation basic program 0 ... can be set 4 x
Can be switched on-off via
5319 Q EA Y limitation if not linked, ON
4.3. - 168
Function summary
The DDC software object S301 Y limitation influences the min or max limits of the Y outputs for the
DDC control circuits (basic program).
A difference is to be made between two influence options that can jointly affect the basic function of the DDC control circuits:
1. Depending on a limitation factor the Y outputs Y-min or Y-max set in the basic program for the
DDC control circuits are altered. The influence on the Y-min or Y-max occurs after the limitation factor reaches a particular limiting value.
- For the MAX limit the limiting value must have exceeded the limiting value.
- for the MIN limit the limitation factor must be below the limiting value so as to influence the setting range of the Y-outputs.
- By inverting the Y-limit YES / NO the direction of influencing the Y-setting range is stipulated.
2. In addition to the functions stated in 1 the limiting value of the limitation factor can itself glide in a particular range. I.e. depending on the outside temperature (basic program) the limiting value of the limitation factor is also changed.
Function description
Re 1:
The limitation factor is set in parameter 5311 source Y-limitation. Any DDC4000 system analog value can be set.
The Y-limitation influences the Y-output parameterized on parameter 5310 Y-limit. on.
The DDC sub.menu Y-limit can be installed and set repeatedly for a DDC control circuit. If several Y-
limitation DDC sub-menus work on the same Y output, the min and max limits calculated for each
DDC software object are added.
For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs.
For the basic heating program the Y limit always works on the heating control for a Y output.
Parameter 5312 YB-limiting value sets the value from which the Y limit should act on the Y output setting range.
Parameter 5313 YB limitation stipulates whether a MAX limitation, i.e. exceeding the limiting value (image 3, image 4) o r a MIN limitation, i.e. going below the limiting value (image 1, image 2)
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 169
should affect the setting range of the Y output.
Parameter 5314 YB Inverting stipulates the direction of the influence. (direction of curve)
5314 YB Inverting = NO -> ( image 1, image 3 ),
5314 YB Inverting = YES -> ( image 2, image 4 ),
Parameter 5315 XP Y-limitation is the proportional range within which the Y-min or Y-max for the Youtputs can be moved depending on the limitation factor.
5315 XP Y-limitation = 10 means: for 10 units change in the limitation factor Y-min or Y-max on the
Y-output is moved by 100%.
5315 XP Y-limitation = 100 means: only for 100 units change in the limitation factor is Y-min or Ymax on the Y-output moved by 100%.
Re 2:
Depending on a command value (outside temperature, source parameter 5103 source TO in the basic program of the DDC control circuit) the limitation value stipulated in parameter 5312 YB-
limitation value can glide.
The glide range is set in parameters 5317 glide start YLim and 5318 glide end YLim.
The influence of limiting value glide is set in parameter 5316 EF Ylimitation.
5316 EF Ylimitation = 1 means: When changing the command value (outside temperature) by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB-limiting value parameter is moved by 1 unit.
5316 EF Ylimitation = 10 means: When changing the command value (outside temperature) by 1 K the limiting value stipulated in the 5312 YB-limiting value parameter is moved by 10 units.
Priorities
The y-limitations 1-4 also work on the basic program's Ymin/Ymax.
Priority Function
Highest Y limitations of the basic program
Version 05/06
Software structure
Priority Function
5141 Y1min, 5145 Y1max
...
5144 Y4min, 5148 Y4max lowest DDC software sub-objects Y-limitation
Objects
Figure 1
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MIN
5314 YB Inverting = NO
Figure 2
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MIN
5314 YB Inverting = YES
Figure 3
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MAX
5314 YB Inverting = NO
Version 05/06
4.3. - 170
Software structure
Figure 4
Y limitation as
5313 YB-limitation = MAX
5314 YB Inverting = YES
Objects 4.3. - 171
Parameters
Parameter 5313 Min/Max selection : "yes" = "1" means Max
No.
name of parameter
5310.1
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
set point multistate
min max init unit
-4 0 value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted -5311.1
Q1
Source Y-limitation
5312.1
G1
YB-Limiting value
5312.2
G2
YB-Limiting value
5313.1
MMBegr1
YB-limitation
5314.1
Inv1
YB Inversion
5315.1
XP1
XP Y limitation
5316.1
EF1
EF Y limitation
5317.1
Anf1
Slide begin YBegr
5318.1
End1
Slide end Y limit set point boolean set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point boolean
-infinity +infinity 150
-infinity +infinity 150
--
--
1
0
--
--
200
10
1
0
10
0
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
--
--
--
--
--
--
C
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 172
No.
name of parameter
5319.1
EA1
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.1
YBegr
Y-Limiting 1 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.2
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
5311.2
5312.2
5313.2
5314.2
5315.2
5316.2
5317.2
5318.2
5319.2
5320.2
Q2
Source Y-limitation
G2
YB-Limiting value
MMBegr2
YB-limitation
Inv2
YB Inversion
XP2
XP Y limitation
EF2
EF Y limitation
Anf2
Slide begin YBegr
End2
Slide end Y limit
EA2
Q EA Y-limitation
YBegr
Y-Limiting 2 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.3
Y limit. affects set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
min
--
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
--
--
--
1
--
200
0 10 0
-infinity +infinity 22
0
10
--
--
--
C
-infinity +infinity 32
--deleted
C
--
--0 --
min
--
max
--
--
max
4
init
deleted
0
init
0
unit
--
--
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 173
No.
name of parameter
5311.3
Q3
Source Y-limitation
5312.3
G3
YB-Limiting value
5313.3
MMBegr3
YB-limitation
5314.3
Inv3
YB Inversion
5315.3
XP3
XP Y limitation
5316.3
EF3
EF Y limitation
5317.3
Anf3
Slide begin YBegr
5318.3
End3
Slide end Y limit
5319.3
EA3
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.3
YBegr
Y-Limiting 3 active
No.
name of parameter
5310.4
Y limit. affects
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point multistate
5311.4
5312.4
5313.4
5314.4
5315.4
5316.4
EF4
Version 05/06
Q4
Source Y-limitation
G4
YB-Limiting value
MMBegr4
YB-limitation
Inv4
YB Inversion
XP4
XP Y limitation
EF Y limitation
--
1
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
0 10 0
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity
--
--
--
200
+infinity
--
--
0
10
32 deleted
0
--
--
--
--
--
C
C
--
-actual value deletable float set point float set point boolean set point boolean set point float set point float
--
1
0
min
--
max
4
init
0
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
--1
--
--
--
200
10
0
10
0
--
--
--
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 174
No.
name of parameter
5317.4
Anf4
Slide begin YBegr
5318.4
End4
Slide end Y limit
5319.4
EA4
Q EA Y-limitation
5320.4
YBegr
Y-Limiting 4 active
parameter typ
set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
min max init
-infinity +infinity 22
-infinity +infinity 32
--deleted
C
--
--0
unit
C
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.4. S302 Y set
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating and ventilation program 0 ... can be set 4 x
Can be switched on-off via
5327 Q Y-SET if not defined, ON
4.3. - 175
Function summary
With the Y-set DDC submenu the Y outputs of the DDC control circuits are stipulated by binary signals on certain (parameterizable) Y-values. If the binary signal = 1 the stipulated Y value works on the Y output.
Function description
The Y-set DDC software object can be installed and set up to four times for one DDC control circuit.
For this Y-set can work repeatedly on the same Y-output.
The address of the binary source is entered in parameter 5327 Q Y-SET. If the binary source ="1", the analog value set in parameter 5326 Y-SET value (0 ..100 %) is transferred to the Y-output.
Parameter 5325 destination Y-SET sets the Y output that is to be influenced.
For the basic PID program you have to choose between the 4 potential Y outputs. For the basic heating program the Y-set always works on the heating control for a Y output.
Priorities
Priority Function
Highest Manual intervention
Central influence
Y set (Index 01)
Y set (Index 04)
Limitation functions lowest Basic program control function
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 176
Parameters
Parameter 5325.x only applies if used in the GP PID!
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5325.1
Ziel1
Destination Y set set point multistate
5326.1
Wert1
Y set value
5327.1
Q1
Q Y fix set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min max init
-4 0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
No.
5325.2
Ziel2
Destination Y set
5326.2
5327.2
name of parameter
Wert2
Y set value
Q2
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
5325.3
Ziel3
Destination Y set
5326.3
5327.3
name of parameter
Wert3
Y set value
Q3
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
No.
5325.4
Ziel4
Destination Y set
5326.4
5327.4
name of parameter
Wert4
Y set value
Q4
Q Y fix
parameter typ
set point multistate set point float actual value deletable boolean
0
--
min
--
max
4
init
0
100 0
-deleted --
unit
value,text
1,Y1
2,Y2
4,Y3
8,Y4
%
4.3. - 177
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.5. S312 Limitation
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating and ventilation program 0 ... can be set 2 x
Can be switched on-off via
5279 Q EA limitation if not defined, ON
4.3. - 178
Function summary
The DDC control function of the main control circuit is restricted using DDC software object limitation.
The limitation is required for example:
for keeping the supply air temperature in ventilation controls in comfortable limits to curb the supply temperature in heating controls before reaching technological limiting values.
A max or min limit is possible in line with the requests.
The max or min limits may glide in line with a command value. E.g. if for ventilation controls, beside lifting the room´s set point depending on the outside temperature, concurrently min limit of the supply air is lifted.
Function description
In the DDC software object limitation the selected limitation sensor in the source parameter
5270 Q limitation sensor is set. The limitation value is set with parameter
5271 limitation value. Parameter 5272 limitation sets whether this is a max or a min limiting value.
The limitation works in the following 2 phases: a) The value of the limitation sensor nears the max or min limitation value.
b) The value of the limitation sensor is higher or lower than the max or min limitation value.
Re a) the limitation function is adopted gliding. The variance of the limitation sensor to the limitation value is compared with the main control variance of the basic program. Depending on the relevant control variance control is still made with the main control circuit XP.
Re b) if the set Max limitation value is exceeded or the number falls below the min limitation value all
XPs on the control circuit are replaced by 5273 XPlimitation in order control the limitation value infringement as quickly as possible. This control status is indicated by switching the internal contact
V10 limitation and I020 XP switching from "0" to "1".
Limiting value glide can occur for both the min. and max limiting values using command value source parameter 5275 command value limit.
The range in which the min and max limits should glide is stipulated by parameters 5277 glide start
limit and 5278 glide end limit. The influence of gliding is set by parameter 5276 EFg. If 5276 EFg =
0, glide does not occur.
If inverting is set winter compensation takes place, i.e. the limiting value is raised if the command
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 179
value falls below the value of 5278 glide end limit.
If no inverting is set summer compensation takes place, i.e. the limiting value is raised if the command value exceeds the value of 5277 glide start limit.
This means that inverting exchanges internally to calculating glide stat and end. (Please refer to the end of the document for all glide calculations.)
When inverting the min limit (Inv limit) the effect of the limitation function is inverted (works like a max limit).
When inverting the max limit ( Inv limit) the effect of the limitation function is inverted (works like a min limit).
Limitation Inverting XW calculation
Minimum No MIN (XWgp; XWbegr)
Minimum Yes
Maximum No
Maximum Yes
MAX (XWgp; -XWbegr)
MAX (XWgp; XW begr)
MIN (XWgp; -XWbegr)
Priorities
The limit with the object index 10 is prioritized higher than the one with object index 02.
The limitation function of the DDC sub-menu limit has a higher priority than that of the DDC submenu XP switching. But the following functions are differentiated: XP change and XW change.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Priorities of the limitation function a) (change to the current control variance):
Priority Function
Highest S312.1 Limitation 1
S303 Cascade (only PID) lowest S312.2 Limitation 2
The current control variance is determined as follows:
1. XWcurrent = Limitation 2 (XWbasic program, XWlimitation2)
2. XWcurrent = cascade (XWcurrent, XWcascade) (only PID)
3. XWcurrent = Limitation 1 (XWcurrent, XWlimitation1)
Priorities of the limitation function b) (change to the XP range):
Priority Function
Highest S312.1 Limitation 1
S312.2 Limitation 2 lowest S317 XP conversion
4.3. - 180
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5270.1
Q
Q limitation sensor
5271.1
Limitation value
5272.1
Limitation
5273.1
XP1
XP limitation
5274.1
inv
Inv. limitation
5275.1
Q_Fg
Lead size limit
5276.1
EFg
EFg
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point multistate set point float set point boolean actual value deletable float set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
-2 1
--
0,5
--
200
--
10
0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted -value,text
0,Minimum
1,Maximum
--
-10 10 0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 181
No.
name of parameter
5277.1
Anf
Slide begin limit
5278.1
End
Slide end limit
5279.1
EA
Q EA limitation v10.1
Limitation
No.
name of parameter
5270.2
Q
Q limitation sensor
5271.2
Limitation value
5272.2
Limitation
5273.2
5274.2
5275.2
5276.2
5277.2
5278.2
5279.2
v10.2
XP2
XP limitation
inv
Inv. limitation
Q_Fg
Lead size limit
EFg
EFg
Anf
Slide begin limit
End
Slide end limit
EA
Q EA limitation
Limitation
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point multistate set point float set point boolean actual value deletable float set point float set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
min
-50
-50
--
--
max
150
150
--
--
init
22
32 deleted
0
unit
--
--
--
--
-10
-50
-50
--
--
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 150
-2 1
--
0,5
--
200
--
10
0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted -value,text
0,Minimum
1,Maximum
--
10
150
150
--
--
0
22
32 deleted
0
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Calculating the gliding of the target limitation value
glide start < glide end
4.3. - 182
glide end < glide start
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 183
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.6. S313 SP switching
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... 4 can be set
Can be switched on-off via
5288 Q EA Special target if not defined, ON
4.3. - 184
Function summary
In the DDC software object S313 set point switching a constant is defined that replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit depending on a binary source. In addition any analog value can be assigned as a set point via an analog source.
Function description
In the DDC software object set point switching an analog value is set from a source, parameter 5285
Q Special set point (e.g. a characteristic value) or a constant, parameter 5286 Special set point.
The value of the analog source has a higher priority than the constant.
Depending on a binary source, parameter 5287 Q EA special set point replaces the value of the analog source or the constants the set point of the DDC control circuit.
It is possible to delay switching between the values. Parameter 5287 slope special set point is used for this. The number of K/min by which the set point may change at most can be entered here.
Switching to the special set point can be switched ON or OFF via the binary source (5288 Q O
special target). If parameter 5287 slope special set point has a valid value entered, changes to the set point in the basic program (e.g. day/night set point in basic heating program) is always
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 185
accompanies by a time delay for an active "Menu SPSW". The slope with the highest priority is operational (object index 1 before 2 before 3 before 4).
Priorities
Object index 1 has the highest priority, menu index 4 has the lowest priority.
1. Set point switching 1 15313.1
2. Set point switching 2 15313.2
3. Set point switching 3 15313.3
4. Set point switching 4 15313.4
5. Set point remote control 15316
6. Set point correction 15315
Note
Basic heating program:
In the basic heating program the set point switching replaces the calculate TStarget current from the basic program or the target room value TR target for the set DDC sub-menu 15318 room correction and/or 15300 optimize. Switching to a firm TS target/TR target excludes night falls. If the optimize sub-menu is active the new TR target influences intermediate heating, pre-lowering, preset, the heating up time and the adaptions.
Basic PID program:
In the PID basic program for active set point switching the current set point XS current is overwritten.
If in addition to the basic program the DDC software object S314 set point glide also works this calculated XS current is overwritten.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5285.1
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.1
XS
custom setpoint
5287.1
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.1
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
---
C deleted K/min deleted --
No.
name of parameter
5285.2
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
parameter typ
actual value deletable float
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5286.2
XS
custom setpoint
5287.2
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.2
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init
-50 150 0
0,1 60
--deleted deleted
unit
C
K/min
--
No.
name of parameter
5285.3
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.3
XS
custom setpoint
5287.3
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.3
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
--deleted deleted
C
K/min
--
No.
name of parameter
5285.4
Q-XS
Q Sondersollwert
5286.4
XS
custom setpoint
5287.4
K/min
Q EA custom setpoint
5288.4
EA
Q EA custom setpoint
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
-50 150 deleted C
-50 150 0
0,1 60
--deleted deleted
C
K/min
--
4.3. - 186
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.7. S315 Set point correction
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via 5292 Q EA Target correction
if not defined, ON
4.3. - 187
Function summary
DDC software object S315 address an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read. This analog value works as a correction on the DDC control circuit set point.
Function description
Parameter source target correction 0..100 % sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system. The value range produced by this analog source is interpreted as 0 ... 100%. (Effect like source target correction in the DDC3000)
The value range for the set point correction is set with parameters upper limit release SPC and
lower limit release SPC. The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being corrected.
SPC = (release SPC UL - release SPC LL) / 100 * Q SPC (in 0..100 %) + release SPC LL
Parameter source target correction absolute value sets the analog value of a set point correction control or any analog value of the DDC4000 system. The value range produced from this analog source is processed as a real value, e.g. -5..5 K.
The imported value is kept in the upper limit release SPC and lower limit release SPC limits.
Higher/lower values are cut off. The source target correction absolute value has a higher priority than source target correction 0..100 %.
The function of the DDC sub-menu can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source. ( Q EA Target correction)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Priorities
If in addition to the DDC software object set point correction a DDC software object set point switching and/or set point remote control is active, the following priorities apply:
Priority Function
Highest Set point switch 1 S313.1
Set point switch 2 S313.2
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 188
Priority Function
Set point switch 3 S313.3
Set point switch 4 S313.4
Set point remote control S316 lowest Set point correction S315
Example
DDC control circuit set point to be corrected
20°C
5mBar
Lower limit SPC release Upper limit SPC release valid range for a set point correction
-4 6 16 °C to 26 °C
0 2 5 mBar to 7 mBar
Note
Basic heating program:
The DDC submenu set point correction only works for "day regulation".
The set point correction influences KH (parallel movement of heating curve) if the DDC sub-menu
15318 room correction or 15300 optimization is not active.
TStarget new = TStarget + target correction
If DDC room correction or optimize sub-menus are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the set point correction. This, for example, influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction.
TRtarget new = TRtarget + target correction
Room correction: TStarget new = TStarget -(Roomtemp – TRtarget new) * ER correction
Optimization: NO TStarget correction
Basic PID program:
In this basic program the set point correction works on the current set point XS current.
XS current new = XS current + target correction
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5290
Q100
Q EA Setpoint Correction
parameter typ
actual value deletable float
min
0
max
100
init unit
deleted %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 189
No.
name of parameter
5291
Q
Source Setpoint Correction
5292
EA
Q EA Setpoint Correction
5293 release SWK
5294 Release SWK above
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--deleted --
-infinity +infinity -5 K
-infinity +infinity 5 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.8. S316 Set point remote control
Activation
Sub-function of
Heating and ventilation basic program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5238 Q EA Energy choice if not defined, ON
4.3. - 190
Function summary
DDC software object set point remote control addresses an analog source to which the set point correction control is connected or from which any analog value can be read.
Function description
Parameter 5260 actuating variable sets the value of a set point control or any analog value of the
DDC4000 system whose value range was previously scaled to 0 .. 100%.
The value range for the set point remote setting is set with parameter 5261 Start remote and parameter 5262 End remote. The measuring unit of this range is matched automatically to the measuring unit of the set point being set.
The calculated set point is depicted on parameter 5265 XS remote control. This analog value replaces the set point of the DDC control circuit.
The function of the sub-menu can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source.
(Status = 0). (Q EA TargetRemote)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 191
Priorities
If in addition to the DDC software object set point remote control a DDC software object set point switching and/or set point correction is active, the following priorities apply:
Priority Function
Highest S313.1 Set point switch 1
S313.2 Set point switch 2
S313.3 Set point switch 3
S313.4 Set point switch 4
S316 Set point remote control lowest S315 Set point correction
Example:
5261 Start remote
10 °C
20 %rF
0 mBar
5262 End remote
25 °C
80 %rF
5 mBar
5265 XS remote control at 0 ..100% value change
10 °C .. 25 °C
20 %rF .. 80 %rF
0 mBar .. 5 mBar
Note
Basic heating program:
The DDC submenu set point correction only works for "day regulation".
The set point correction influences KH (parallel movement of heating curve) if the DDC software object S318 room correction or S300 optimization is not active.
TStarget correction = XS remote control = (End remote - start remote) * actuating variable / 100 % + start remote
TStargetnew = TStarget + TStarget correction
If the DDC software object room correction or optimize are active the room set point TRtarget is changed by the XS remote control. This, for example, influences the economy function and the start set point for active room correction.
Room correction: TStargetcorrection = (Room temp - XS remote control) * ER
Optimization: NO TStarget correction
Basic PID program:
In this basic program the set point remote control works on the current set point XS current.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 192
XS current = XS remote control = (End remote - start remote) * actuating variable / 100 % + start remote
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5260 Set size
5261
Anf
Begin remote
5262
End
End remote
5263
EA
Q EA setpoint remote
5265 XS Remote setting
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value float
min
0
--
-infinity
max
100
--
+infinity
init
deleted
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 50 deleted
0
unit
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.9. S317 XP switching
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program and PID 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5306 Q XP switching if not defined, ON
4.3. - 193
Function summary
DDC control circuit control setting parameters are switched with the DDC sub-menu XP switching.
Depending on a binary source the proportional ranges of the Y outputs, the rate and regulating periods can be switched.
Function description
The binary source is set in parameter source XP switching.
If the digital source Q XP switching is "1" or "---" the controller setting parameters are replaced by the set setting values.
The working XP switching is displayed via internal contact I20 XP switching in the basic heating program or PID.
Note:
In the basic heating program I20 XP switching only becomes "1" if XPY1 changes. Only changes TN
New and/or rate New; I20 XP switch remains "0". I20 XP switch can also be "1" as a result of a limit.
Priorities
The DDC sub-menus limitation menus 1 and 2 work before the XP switch.
Priority Function
Highest Limitation 1 S312.1
Cascade (only PID) S303
Limitation 2 S312.2
XP switching S317 lowest Structure delay start-up S304
Special Functions
Depending on the reset time tN set in the basic program the
XPY (basic program) is switched to the XPY (XP switching) gliding and vice versa.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5300
XPY1
XPY1 New
5301
XPY2
XPY2 New
5302
XPY3
XPY3 New
5303
XPY4
XPY4 New
5304
tN
Tn New
5305
d
Vorhalt
5306
Q
Q XP change overR i020 XP Changeover
parameter typ
set point float set point float set point float set point float set point deletable float set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
min max init
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 999,9 50
0,5 99
1
--
--
99
--
--
3
unit
K deleted s deleted --
0
K
K
K min
--
4.3. - 194
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.10. S318 Room correction
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5384 Q EA Room correction if not defined, ON
4.3. - 195
Function summary
The basic heating program controls the supply temperature due to the weather. The set point of the supply temperature is calculated as per the heating curve, which in turn is stipulated by the KH
(parallel movement) and EF (steepness) parameters.
The calculated start set point is corrected with the DC software object room correction if the temperature in the reference room varies from the target room temperature value set.
The correction occurs by the parallel movement of the heating curve.
Function description
The determined target supply temperature (5151 TStarget current) is corrected by the room correction DDC software object when the room temperature source parameter 5381 Q room sensor
RK varies from the target room temperature value set in the 5180 TRtarget (day operation) or 5181
TRmin (night operation) parameters.
The 5382 ER correction parameter determines the influence of the normal variance from the target room value to the correction of the target starting temperature value.
Correction target starting value = XW Room * ER Corr
Day: TStarget current = TStarget heating curve - (room temp. - TR target) * ER
Night: TStarget current = TStarget heating line + TS abs - (room temp. - TR min) * ER
Example:
Heating curve with EF = 2.
If the room temperature is too low the KH is raised. Therefore the target supply temperature is raised.
If the room temperature is too high the KH is lowered. Therefore the target supply temperature is lowered.
If the room temperature falls faster than 2K/h, after the passing of a delay period 5383 delay RK the target supply temperature is corrected. This suppresses short-term set point corrections, e.g. if a window was opened for a short period of time. If this delay is not wanted the 5383 delay RK entry should be deleted with [CE] (basic).
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source. ( Q EA room correction)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 196
Priorities
If the DDC software object S300 Optimize is set at the same time the DDC software object 318 room correction is only effective in "Day regulation".
If the software object 316 set point remote control is active the 5180 TR parameter in the "Day regulation" is replaced by 5265 XS remote control.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5180
TRsoll
TR set
5181
TRmin
TR min
5381
Q Rt
Q room probe
5382
ER
ER correction
5383
Verz
Delay RK
parameter typ
set point float set point float actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float
min max init
-infinity +infinity 20
-infinity +infinity 17
unit
C
C
-infinity +infinity deleted C
0
10
10
60
3 deleted
-min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 197
No.
name of parameter
5384
EA
Q EA Room correction
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean
min
--
max
--
init
deleted
unit
--
Par.No Parameter name, plain text
Activation parameter
5384 Q EA room correction
Descripti on
Input Ed. lower limit upper limit specification Unit
Activate, deactivate function x
5381
5382
5383
5180
Parameters
Q room sensor
ER correction
Delay RK
TR target measured room temperatu re x x Influence on
TStarget
Delay time for room correction x
Target room temperatu re day operation x
5181 TR min Target room temperatu re night operation x
Parameter from the basic program (described there)
5151 TStarget current calculate supply temperatu re x
0
-?
0.0
10
-?
-?
1
?
10.0
60
?
?
---
---
3.0
---
20.0
17.0
°C min
°C
°C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.11. S319 Standby
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5397 Q EA Standby if not defined, ON
4.3. - 198
Function summary
The stand-by DDC software object has the function of switching off the DDC control if a certain outside temperature is exceeded. The DDC control is only re-started if the outside temperature is lower than a stipulated value. It is switched on and off depending on the selected standby type (see below).
Function description
For the standby function the outside temperature (Source TO) of the basic heating program applies when no source is entered in the 5392 Q StandBy parameter. It is possible to parameterize another source, e. g. an average outside temperature. This source is then prioritized higher than the basic program (Source TO).
If 5391 Standby type "ZQD" is selected, the stand by function depends on the average temperature, which is either formed by the outside temperatureSource TO or from Q StandBy. In Standby type
"MRP" the absolute temperatures are used as the criterion.
For standby type = MRP the following applies:
If the outside temperature exceeds the limiting values stated in the TASBY day or TASBY night parameters the following switching functions are executed 1 hour after exceeding the limitation values:
the internal contact I003 boiler request of the basic heating program switches off, I003 = 0 with a hunting time stipulated in the basic heating program pump hunting the internal contact I001
Pump ON switches off, I001 = 0 the internal contact I008 Stand By switches on, I008 = 1
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 199
If TASBY day / TASBY night is exceeded as a result of a change in usage time the switch to the stand by status takes place immediately.
The standby status is quitted again without time delay if the outside temperature falls with a switch back difference XSD StandBy under TASBY day / TASBY night. A 1 hour time delay switch back takes place. If the switch back condition is met as a result of the change in usage time, the switch back takes place immediately.
For standby type = ZQD the following applies:
If the average outside temperature exceeds the limiting value set in the TASBY day parameter for 3 days, standby is switched on the third day. The switch back to normal operation occurs with a time delay of 1-3 days depending on the setting in 5396 switch back (ZQD). The internal average outside temperature must be lower than TASBY DAY by the switch back difference XSD StandBy. Usage time changes are not considered.
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source. (5398 Q
EA StandBy)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
When switching between ON/OFF and OFF/ON a switching transfer takes place in the control unit.
The Y signal stands as per the offset and is not moved by gliding.
In standby the Y signal is set to 0.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5391
Typ
StandBy type
5392
Q
Q StandBy
5393
Tag
TO SBY day
parameter typ
set point multistate actual value deletable float set point float
min
--
max
2
init
0
unit
value,text
0,MRP
1,ZQD
-infinity +infinity deleted C
0 30 20 C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 200
No.
name of parameter
5394
Nacht
TASBY night
5395
xsd
XSD StandBy
5396
Ruecks
Back switch (ZQD)
5397
EA
Q EA StandBy i008
StBy
StandBy
parameter typ
set point float set point float set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
1
1
min
0
--
--
max
30
20
3
2
1
init
12 deleted --
1 --
K d
unit
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.2.10.12. S348 Adaptive heating curve
Activation
Sub-function of
basic heating program 0 ... can be set once
Can be switched on-off via
5639 Q EA Adapt HKL if not defined, ON
4.3. - 201
Function summary
The basic heating program controls the supply temperature due to the weather. The set point of the supply temperature is calculated as per the heating curve, which in turn is stipulated by the
KH (parallel movement) and EF (steepness) parameters.
Function description
It is possible to set the progress of the heating curve with the DDC software object S348 adaptive heating curve. For this the parameters 5630 TS 20 to 5638 TS -20 at fixed (outside) temperature values parameterize the desired temperatures for the start.
When installing the DDC software menu EF and KH from the basic program are used as the basis for calculating the supply temperature values.
This heating curve is moved by comparing the set point for the room temperature, parameter 5180
TR set point, with the actual room temperature, source parameter 5381 Q Room sensor (xw room), parallel to the relevant outside temperature value.
The5184 Adaption permitted parameter can permit or prohibit this adaption of the heating curve set via a binary source. If no source is set or is invalid it is also adapted.
The adaption occurs at the end of the utilization time if the utilization time is longer than 3 hours, otherwise after 24 hours of usage time (by the usage time program, remote day, Z influence day).
No adaption takes place for a difference less than 0.5 K from xw period.
Via a binary source the 5185 Reset parameter can reset an adapted heating curve or a heating curve with user-defined sites back to its original process.
WARNING: If 5185 Reset = ON, no adaption takes place.
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON or OFF with a binary source. (5693 Q
EA Adapt HKL) If no binary source is set the function is always ON.
Priorities
The feed lowering 5167 TS abs set in the basic heating program also works for the TStarget of the adaptive heating curve in the night rules status.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 202
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5180
TRsoll
TR set set point float
5184
Hkla erl
Adaption allowed
5185
Res HKLa
Reset actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
5381
Q Rt
Q room probe
5630
TV 20
TV 20
5631
TV 15
TV 15
5632
TV 10
TV 10 actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point float
5633
TV 5
TV 5
5634
TV 0
TV 0
5635
TV-5
TV -5
5636
TV-10
TV -10
5637
TV-15
TV -15
5638
TV-20
TV -20
5639
EA
Q EA Adaptive HKL
H01
GLTY1
Z influence Y1 set point float set point float set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean set point deletable float
min max init
-infinity +infinity 20
--
--
-50
-50
-50
-50
-50
-50
-50
-50
-50
--
0
--
--
unit
C deleted -deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted C
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
--
100
20
33,5
41
48,5
56
63,5
71
78,5
86
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C deleted -deleted %
The 5180 TR set point and 5381 Q Room sensor parameters are to be taken from the basic program.
Basis of calculation
on request
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 203
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 204
4.3.2.11. S321 Enthalpy
Function summary
The calculation of enthalpy or the water content occurs with the measured temperature and humidity values. The assignment of the humidity sensor and temperature sensor to calculate enthalpy can be freely selected.
This occurs using the source temperature and source rF parameters.
Special function:It is also possible to calculate the enthalpy values from a dry and a wet thermometer
(psychometric principle). For this the source of the wet thermometer is entered in parameter 5502
Source temp humid.
- The calculated value of the absolute humidity is set in the absolute humidity parameter.
- The calculated value of the enthalpy result is set in the enthalpy parameter.
- The calculated value for the dewpoint is set in the dewpoint parameter.
- The calculated value of the relative humidity is set in the 5507 relative humidity parameter.
Note
The calculation of the enthalpy values with 5502 source temp. Humidity has priority over the calculation with 5501 source rF, i.e. when both sources are occupied.
It is possible to access these values using source setting from other objects (software and hardware objects, bases etc.) in the DDC4000 system.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5500 Source temperature actual value deletable float
5501 Source rF actual value deletable float
5502 Source temp. feucht actual value deletable float
5505 Absolute humidity actual value float
5506 Enthalpie result
5507 Relative humidity actual value float actual value float
5508 Dewpoint actual value float
min max
-50 100
0
-50 100
0
0
100
100
-50 100
init unit
deleted C deleted % deleted C
4000 0
-60 10000 0
0
0 g H2O/kg kJ/kg
%
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 205
4.3.2.12. S322 Sequence
Function summary
The DDC software object S322 sequence enables the signal of an analogue source to be divided into two independent sequences and provided as analogue values. These can be output for example using source setting through hardware objects.
By variably stipulating starting and end values, min and max limits, it is possible to set any format for the sequences that you desire. In addition a uncontrolled condition can be assigned to both sequences.
The analog input signal is set using source parameterizing 5520 Q Sequ.
The starting and end value is set for each sequence. (for the 1st "target" sequence: 5521 YS1 Beg,
5522 YS1 End, for the second "target" sequence: 5527 YS2 Beg, 5528 YS2 End)
The result is sequences 5537 YS1 and 5538 YS2.
For YS1 and YS2 a fixed min and max limit (5524 YS1 min, 5526 YS1 Max, 5530 YS2 Min, 5532 YS2
Max) can be set.
It is also possible to create variable limits for all starting and end values (5521, 5522, 5527, 5528) as well as for all min and max values (5524, 5526, 5530, 5532) by setting analog sources. An analogue source has priority over the fixed entered value. I. e. if the source is valid the value of the source is operational otherwise the fixed value.
Via a binary source 5536 Q EA Notreg Sequ the function of a sequence object can be switched to the uncontrolled condition. A status is assigned to the YS1 and YS2 outputs via parameter5535
Notreg. Sequ. In the uncontrolled condition the min-max limits continue to work.
There is the option of setting fixed values externally for the two sequences YS1 and YS2. For this the operating parameters are available via BMS 44305 BMS Y1 and 44306 BMS Y2 as well as manual operation 7855 manual Y1 and 7856 manual Y2. The manual operation has a higher priority than the
BMS operation. The min max limits can be overwritten with the BMS or manual operation.
Priorities
1. manual operation manual Y1 / manual Y2
2. BMS operation BMS Y1 / BMS Y2
3. Automatic/control Q Sequ
Example
Classification of an analog signal to 40% of the fist "target" sequence, creation 20% xdz and the remaining 40% on the second "target" sequence.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 206
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5520 Q Sequ actual value deletable integer
5521 YS1 Beg
5522 YS1 End
5524 YS1 Min
5526 YS1 Max
5527 YS2 Beg
5528 YS2 End
5530 YS2 Min set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer
min max init unit
-2147483648 2147483647 deleted --
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
50
0
100
50
100
0
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5532 YS2 Max set point integer
5535 Not reg sequ set point selection list
Objects min
0
--
5536 Q EA Not reg Sequ actual value deletable boolean
5537 YS1 actual value integer
5538 YS2
7855 Hand Y1 set point integer set point deletable integer
7856 Hand Y2
7857 BMS Y1
7858 BMS Y2 set point deletable integer set point deletable integer actual value deletable integer
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
--
100
100
100
max
100
--
4.3. - 207 init
100
unit
%
0 selection list
No.,text
0,Y1
1,Y2 deleted --
0
0 deleted % deleted %
%
% deleted % deleted %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 208
4.3.2.13. S323 Binary valuation
Function summary
An analog output signal is formed with the DDC software object depending on the binary signals.
Each DDC software object calculates an analog output signal that is calculated from 8 binary input signals with a value that can be freely set.
The analogue output signals from several DDC software objects can for example be edited via the arithmetic object.
Note: This DDC software object is used for example for controlling the fans depending on the air flow.
The 8 binary input signals are set as source parameter binary valuation Q1...8.
Each binary input can be assigned a value between 0 and 100% with the 8 parameters binary
valuation W. As soon as a binary input is switched to log. "1" its valuation is switch in addition to parameter binary valuation Y.
Example:
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5540
Y
Binary values Y
5541 Binary values Q1
5542 Binary values Q2
5543 Binary values Q3
5544 Binary values Q4
5545 Binary values W1
5546 Binary values W2
5547 Binary values W3
5548 Binary values W4
5549 Binary values W5
5550 Binary values W6
5551 Binary values W7
5552 Binary values W8
5555 Binary values Q5
5556 Binary values Q6
5557 Binary values Q7
5558 Binary values Q8
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
min max init
0 100 0
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
--
--
--
-deleted deleted deleted deleted
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25 deleted deleted deleted deleted
--
--
--
--
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
--
--
--
--
unit
%
4.3. - 209
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 210
4.3.2.14. S324 Scaling
Function summary
Mit dem DDC-Softwareobjekt S324 Skalierung kann einem analogen Signal ein neuer Wertebereich zugeordnet werden. Der Wertebereich wird durch einen Anfangs- und einen Endwert definiert.
A new value range can be assigned to an analog signal with the DDC software object S324 scaling.
The value range is defined by a start and an end value.
In parameter 5550 Q Scal sensor the source of the analog signal to be scaled is set. Each analog signal in the DDC4000 system can be scaled. The scaling refers to the value range of the input magnitude (0..100%).
Parameters 5551 start scaling and 5552 End scaling set the value range. The scaled value is provided in parameter 5554 scaling value.
Using parameter 5553 min output delta the analog signal can be calmed, e.g. a sensor value.
If e.g. "0.0" is entered all changes are calculated and provided as a scaled value.
If e.g. "0.5" is entered all changes greater than 0.5 units are re-calculated and provided as a scaled value.
Parameter 5555 attentuation works as a PT1-Glide. If the input signal value changes (5550 Q Scal
sensor) in jumps a 63% change in value from the original input jump is achieved at the output (5554
Value Scaling) after the attentuation time.
Please note:
The analog signal for measuring element KP10 (sensor inputs that are set for KP10) can not be scaled.
If the input signal (5550 Q Scal sensor) is deleted or invalid the output (5554 value scaling) = 0,0.
If the input signal < 0 %, the output signal takes the value of its lower limit (5551 start scaling) or if >
100 % the value of its upper limit (5552 End scaling).
Scaling value = (End of scaling – Start of scaling) * Scal sensor / 100 % + start of scaling
Version 05/06
Software structure
Example 1:
A 0..10 V signal should be converted to
0..350 m³/h (depicted as 0.100 %)
Start of range 0.0 (0 %)
End of range 350.0 (100 %)
Unit m³/h
Objects
Example 2:
An analog signal (0..100 %) should be converted into Fahrenheit
Start of range -58.0 (= 0 %)
End of range 302.0 (= 100 %)
Unit F
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5550
Q_B
Q scal sensor actual value deletable float
5551
Anf
Begin scaling
5552
Ende
End scaling set point float set point float
5553
Delta
min. output delta
5554
Wert
Value scaling
5555
PT1
Dampening set point float actual value float set point deletable integer
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
0
1
10 0
-infinity +infinity 0
3600
--
--
--
-deleted s
Version 05/06
4.3. - 211
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 212
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 213
4.3.2.15. S325 MinMaxAverage
Function summary
Using the DDC software object S325 min/max/average the smallest, largest and average value can be calculated from up to 8 analog signals. Each of the 8 analog signals can be occupied with a weighting factor.
The 8 analog signals are recorded via source parameterizing 1..8 MMM sensor 1..8. The factors for weighting the individual analog signals are to be set in 11..18 MMM Factor 1..8.
In addition via the binary sources 21..28 Q EA sensor 1..8 there is also the opportunity to remove each individual analog source from the min/max/average calculation. If the binary source is switched on or not source set the corresponding analog source is included as per its factor in the calculation.
The calculated values for the min, max and average calculation are provided on parameters 31 Min
selection, 32 Max selection and 33 average. It is possible to access these values using source setting from other software and hardware objects of the DDC4000 system.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
1
2
B1
MMM Sensor 1
B2
MMM Sensor 2 actual value deletable float actual value deletable float
3
4
B3
MMM Sensor 3
B4
MMM Sensor 4 actual value deletable float actual value deletable float
5
6
7
8
B5
MMM Sensor 5
B6
MMM Sensor 6
B7
MMM Sensor 7
B8
MMM Sensor 8 actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float
11
F1
MMM Factor 1
12
F2
MMM Factor 2 set point float set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
0
0
10
10
1
1
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
13
F3
MMM Factor 3 set point float
14
F4
MMM Factor 4
15
F5
MMM Factor 5 set point float set point float
16
F6
MMM Factor 6
17
F7
MMM Factor 7
18
F8
MMM Factor 8
21
QEA1
Q EA Sensor 1 set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean
22
QEA2
Q EA Sensor 2
23
QEA3
Q EA Sensor 3
24
QEA4
Q EA Sensor 4
25
QEA5
Q EA Sensor 5
26
QEA6
Q EA Sensor 6
27
QEA7
Q EA Sensor 7
28
QEA8
Q EA Sensor 8 actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
31
min
Min select
32
max
Max select
33
mittel
Middle value actual value float actual value float actual value float
min
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
max
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
init
1
1
1
1
1
1 deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
4.3. - 214
Version 05/06
Software structure
4.3.2.16. S326 Time gliding
Activation
Sub-function of
- 10 times can be set
Objects 4.3. - 215
Function summary
This DDC software object can be used for example as a command value in DDC software objects, e.g. for "time-dependent" glide of a set point.
Function description
With the DDC software object time glide a value that is larger or smaller depending on the time is created. The bigger or smaller is set as a slope in the parameters 5680 slope +/h and 5681 slope -/
h. For this the desired slope is defined as a numerical value 0.01...999 per hour.
The value produced from the slope (positive or negative) and the time passed is indicated in parameter 5684 time glide.
A starting value and an end value must be stipulated. The gliding starts with the starting value and ends with the end value.
It is possible to access this value with source parameterizing.
The time glide is controlled as follows using the two binary source parameters timegl/ and timegl\:
Time gliding
Timegl/ Timegl\ Start value < End value
0 0 The value is reset to the start value
1 0
0
1
1
1
Value becomes larger as per slope+/h
Start value -> End value
Value becomes smaller as per slope+/h
End value -> Start value
No changes
Start value > End value
The value is reset to the start value
Value becomes larger as per slope+/h
End value -> Start value
Value becomes smaller as per slope+/h
Start value -> End value
No changes
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 216
Example
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5680
Steig+
Slope +/h set point float
5681
Steig-
Slope -/h
5682
Auf
Time gl/ set point float actual value deletable boolean
5683
Ab
Time gl\
5684
Ausg
Time slides
5685
Start
Time slides actual value deletable boolean actual value float set point float
min
0
0
--
--
max
999
999
--
--
init
1
1 deleted -deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0
-infinity +infinity 0
--
--
--
unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5686
Ende
End value set point float
Objects min max init
-infinity +infinity 0
unit
--
4.3. - 217
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 218
4.3.2.17. S327 Pulse counting
Function summary
The DDC software object S327 impulse counter has the function of counting operating cycles. The counted pulses can for example be scaled for calculating the heat volume.
The pulses are recorded with the counting parameter 5695 count value in A. The recording and counting takes place permanently and always with the 0/1 flank of the pulse occurring. The heat volume and delta heat volume are calculated in a fixed interval of 1 minute. The heat capacity is calculated in an interval as per parameter 5698 calculation interval (Basis 1 minute).
Each counting value change is firmly assigned a heat volume parameters 5693 Scaling A and 5694
Scaling A Exp.
The max. counting frequency depends on the hardware input. (pulse counting or digital input). For example the output of a counting object F015 FO-Count can be used as a source for the counting input. But it is also possible to link the counting value of any binary plant parameter as a source (refer to FSource documentation).
Example:
e.g. Scaling A = 4 and Scaling A EXP = -2 means: 4 x 10-2 = 0.04 kWh is added for each pulse.
The result appears in parameter 5690 heat volume A based on with the unit kWh. The unit can be changed.
Via a 0/1 flank of the binary source parameter 5696 Q Reset heat volume A the 5691 Delta heat
volume A counted to date is reset to 0.
The 1/0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5691 Delta heat volume A counting again. We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 219
The calculated volumes of 5690 heat volume A and 5691 Delta heat volume A can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS.
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source. (5697 Q EA pulse)
This makes counting with a certain time range possible.
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
In parameter 5692 heat capacity A the current calculated heat capacity is entered.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5690 Amount of heat A
5691 Delta amount of heat A
5692 Heat power A
5693 Scaling A
5694 Scaling A Exp
5695 Impulse in A
5696 Q Reset amount of heat A
5697 Q EA Impulse
5698 Calculation interval
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer actual value integer set point float set point integer actual value integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer
--
1
0
0
min
0
max
100000000
100000000
100000000
0
0
init
0
0
--
0,001 100000
-9 9
2147483647
--
1
0
0 deleted
--
--
--
--
--
60
unit
kWh kWh kW deleted --
1 min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 220
4.3.2.18. S328 Operation hours
Function summary
The operating hours are counted with the DDC software object S328 operating hours.
The count takes place if the binary source parameter 5702 Q Input Bz is logical 1. The count takes place in hours and minutes. The full hours are depicted on parameter 5700 time BZ. The minutes are counted in parameter 5705 minutes.
Control functions can be released after the end of stipulated time intervals. When exceeding the time interval 5701 Interval BZ parameter 5704 Bh counting is set to 1. If the time interval is exceeded again parameter 5704 Bh counting is reset to 0. Each time the time interval is exceeded another change takes place. This makes it possible for example to switch time-dependent pumps.
The operating hour counter can be reset to 0 with the binary source parameter 5703 Q Reset BZ.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5700
t
Time BZ is
5701 Interval BZ 1
5702
Q
Q input BZ
5703
Q_R
Q Reset BZ
5704 Bh counter
5705 Minutes
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer
min max
0 99999
init
0
0
--
--
--
0
9999 9999
--
--
--
59
unit
h h deleted -deleted --
0
0
-min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 221
4.3.2.19. S329 Heat volume P
Function summary
The function of software object heat volume P is to measure the heat capacity provided as an analog signal and to count the calculated heat volume. The heat capacity is recorded with the analog source parameter Q heat capacity and can be scaled using the scaling and scaling exp parameters.
With scaling via parameter 5715 Scaling C and 5716 Scaling C Exp the heat capacity is set to 100
% = 10 V. The scaled heat capacity is shown in 5711 heat capacity C. This results in calculating the heat volume that is depicted on parameter 5712 heat volume C. The heat capacity and heat volume are calculated in a fixed interval of 10 seconds.
Example:
e.g. Scaling C = 3 and scaling C EXP = +2 means the maximum value at 100 % heat capacity corresponds to 3 x 10+2 = 300 kW.
Via a 0/1 flank of the binary source parameter 5714 Q Reset heat volume A the 5713 Delta heat volume C counted to date is reset to 0.
The 1/0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5713 Delta heat volume counting again. We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset.
The calculated volumes of 5712 heat volume A and 5713 Delta heat volume C can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 222
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source (Status = 0). (5717 Q EA Wmber_P)
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5710 Q heat power
5711 Heat power C
5712 Amount of heat C
5713 Delta amount of heat C
5714 Q Reset amount of heat C
5715 Scaling C
5716 Scaling C Exp
5717 Q EA Wmber_P
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean set point float set point integer actual value deletable boolean
0
0
min max
0 +infinity
init unit
deleted kW
100000000 0
100000000 0 kW kWh
0
--
100000000
--
0 kWh deleted --
0,1 999,9
-3 3
---
1
0 deleted
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 223
4.3.2.20. S330 Heat volume DT
Function summary
The function of the DDC software object is to calculate the heat volume using the temperature difference and flow volume. The flow volume is recorded via a pulse counter.
The temperatures are recorded by the source parameters WMNG sensor warm and WMNG sensor
cold.
The flow volume is recorded with the counting parameter 5722 count value in B. Each counting value change is firmly assigned a flow volume via parameter 5729 Scaling B and 5730 Scaling B
Exp.
The heat volume is calculated from the temperature difference and flow volume. The counting values are recorded continuously. The calculated values are depicted by the minute in parameter 5725 heat
volume B.
The water volume calculated from the pulse counter and scaling is depicted on parameter 5727
water volume with the unit m³. The volume flow calculated in the same way is depicted in parameter
5723 volume flow with the unit m³/h. The units can be changed.
Example:
e.g. Scaling B = 2 and Scaling EXP B = +2 means: 2 x 10 + 2 = 200 m³ is added for each pulse.
Via a 0/1 flank of the binary source parameter 5731 Q Reset heat volume A the 5726 Delta heat
volume B counted to date is reset to 0.
Via a 0/1 flank of the binary source parameter 5732 Q Reset water volume A the 5728 Delta water
volume counted to date is reset to 0.
The 1/0 flank of the binary source parameter starts 5726 Delta heat volume B or 5728 delta water
volume counting again. We recommend therefore the use of a sensor for the reset.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 224
The calculated volumes of 5725 heat volume B, 5726 Delta heat volume B, 5727 water volume and 5728 delta water volume can be reset or set by default both by the DDC4000 Central Unit keyboard and the BMS.
The function of the DDC software object can be switched ON (Status = 1) or OFF (Status = 0) with a binary source (Status = 0) (5733 EAWB).
If no binary source is set the function is switched to ON.
Note
A counting object F015 FO count can be used for example as a source for the counting input 5722
Counting value in B. But it is also possible to link the counting value of any binary plant parameter as a source (refer to FSource documentation).
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5720 WMNG Sensor warm
5721 WMNG Sensor kalt
5722 Impulse in B
5723 Volume current
5724 Heat power B
5725 Amount of heat B
5726
Delta W
Delta amount of heat B
5727 amount of water
5728 Delta amount of water
5729 Scaling B
5730 Scaling B Exp
5731 Q Reset amount of heat B set point float set point float set point float set point integer
parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value integer actual value float actual value float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean
min max
-infinity +infinity
-infinity +infinity
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0,1
-3
--
2147483647
9999999
100000000
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
999,9
3
--
init
deleted deleted
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 deleted
unit
C
C
-m/h kW kWh kWh m m
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
5732 Q Reset amount of water
5733
EAWB
WmCalcEA
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
Formulas
Q = V * p * cP * DT heat volume = Water volume * 1.16 * DTemperature
Q = heat volume (in kWh)
V = Volume = water volume (in m³)
p = Density of water = 1000 kg/m³
cP = heat capacity = 1.16 Wh/(kg * K)
DT = DTemperature = sensor warm – sensor cold (in K)
min
--
--
max
--
--
4.3. - 225 init unit
deleted -deleted --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 226
4.3.2.21. S333 Ring counter
Function summary
A maximum of 12 binary outputs are switched onwards cyclically wit the DDC software object S333 ring counter.
The switching on takes place automatically by stipulating a time span a n d / o r changing the status of a binary source.
After installing the software object the first output 5763 Ring output 1 is switched on.
Parameter 5759 starting time provides the opportunity to precisely determine the start of switching on by including a digital source for example from a time program. The second switching on occurs after the end of the set time span or the first time the binary input Q Ring is switched.
The default starting time is deleted, i. e. the calculation of the switching on starts immediately.
The following options are possible for switching the binary outputs:
1. Switching on the binary output to the subsequent output takes place after the end of the time stipulated in parameter 5761 time span. The time is entered in minutes (m³ 1 minute) and/or
2. The switching on of the binary output to the following output is done via a binary source 5762 Q
Ring. This switching on occurs independently of the starting time.
If parameter value 5761 time span is deleted the ring counter stays at the current level. It can only be switched on via a binary source.
With parameter 5760 Ring number the number of the outputs to be controlled 5763 .. 5774 Ring
output 1 .. 12 is stipulated. It is possible to control 2 to 12 outputs.
Example
Pump switching
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 227
Usable for:
- automatic pump switching
- automatically changing the heat exchanger etc.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5759 Start timepoint actual value deletable boolean
5760 Ring Nr. of
5761 Ring time span set point integer set point deletable integer
5762 Q Ring
5763
5764
5765
5766
Ring exit 1
Ring exit 2
Ring exit 3
Ring exit 4 actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
min max
---
2
1
--
--
--
--
--
12
init unit
deleted --
2147483647 10080 min
--
--
--
--
--
4 deleted --
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5767 Ring exit 5 actual value boolean
5768 Ring exit 6
5769 Ring exit 7 actual value boolean actual value boolean
5770 Ring exit 8
5771
5772
5773
5774
Ring exit 9
Ring exit 10
Ring exit 11
Ring exit 12 actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
Objects min max
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
init
0
4.3. - 228
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 229
4.3.2.22. S334 Spreadsheet function
Function summary
Using the DDC software object S334 table function a new analog output signal Y is formed from an analog input signal X. The value assignment occurs via up to 10 value pairs X/Y. The DDC software object is used for example to linearize unlinearities from machine parts in the technical operation plant (e.g. non-linear transfer behavior of heat ransfer units).
The analog input signal X is set as source parameter 5791 Tab command value X.
The output signal Y calculated in line with up to 10 X/Y value pairs is depicted on parameter 5792
Tab output Y.
An output signal Y is calculated by interpolation for all input signals that are between the set value pairs X/Y. This requires complete upward setting for the input signals.
The input signal setting must start with X1/Y1.
No X/Y inputs between the first and last X/Y value pair can be released.
The X values must be set going up: X1 < X2 < X3 ...
The interpolation ends with the last X/Y value pair, e.g. X1/Y1 ... X5/Y5.
Immediately after activating the DDC software object all input parameters (command value, X/Y inputs) are deleted and have to be set first. The Y output signal is set to 0 for this time. If the input signal X wanders with an active function beyond the upper/lower value pair X/Y the most recently calculated value is retained as output signal Y.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 230
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5791 Tab lead size X actual value deletable float
5792 Tab exit Y
5801 Table X1 actual value float set point deletable float
5802 Table Y1
5803
5804
Table X2
Table Y2 set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float
5805 Table X3
5806 Table Y3 set point deletable float set point deletable float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0 --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5807 Table X4 set point deletable float
5808 Table Y4
5809 Table X5 set point deletable float set point deletable float
5810 Table Y5
5811
5812
5813
Table X6
Table Y6
Table X7 set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float
5814 Table Y7
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
Table X8
Table Y8
Table X9
Table Y9
Table X10
Table Y10 set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float set point deletable float
Objects min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-infinity +infinity deleted --
4.3. - 231
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 232
4.3.2.23. S335 Sensor switching
Function summary
The DDC software object S335 sensor switching is used to switch between any two analog values or sensors.
The two analog values to be switched are set in source parameters 1 Q1 and 2 Q2.
The switching is undertaken with the binary source parameter 3 switch.
If 3 switch has the value 0, is invalid or has been deleted the value of 1 is switched to Q1.
If 3 switch has the value 1, the value of 2 is switched to Q2.
The result is depicted in parameter 4 output.
This value can be used as an analog source in the complete DDC4000 system.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
1
Q1
Q1 actual value deletable float
2
3
Q2
Q2
Umschalt
Q Switchover actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean
4
Ausgang
Output actual value float
min max init
-infinity +infinity 10
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--deleted --
-infinity +infinity 0 --
unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 233
4.3.2.24. S337 Basic program fixed value
Activation
GP
Fixed value can be installed up to 12 x
A PID regulator can be replaced by 4 fixed value regulators.
Function summary
The fixed value software object is a PI control with a sequence.
The fixed value regulator program is a PI regulator with a Y output. Other parameters are for advanced functions, e.g.
- P regulator
- Set point conversion
- Set point glide
- Y limitation
- Y set.
Function description
The 5102 source control variable parameter can be assigned any analog value in the DDC4000 system. The control can be switched between two set points, 5100 XS and 5107 XS2. The switch occurs via the 5108 Q XS XS2 parameter that can be assigned any binary value.
It also possible to glide the current set point according to any analog command value (e. g. the outside temperature). The analog value is connected with the 5250 command value SG parameter.
The set point gliding is calculated from the values for 5251 glide start SG, 5252 glide end SG and
5253 EF SG, as per the set point glide functions described for the PID sub-menu.
The effect of the fixed value control can be set to either heating or cooling via the 5124 Sequence parameter. A binary source in 5129 Q sequence converter can also switch the effect of the sequence.
The fixed value control works depending on the set reset time 5106 tN as a P or PI control. The proportional range is set in the 5120 XPY1 parameter.
The current Y value is indicated in the 5110 Y1 parameter. The Y output can be limited via 5141 Y1
min and 5145 Y1 max.
The Y output value calculated by the control unit can be overwritten by enforced intervention. This is possible on the one hand via the setting for the value in 5324 Yfix. If the binary source in 5327 Q Y-
Fix "1", the Y output is set to the Yfix value.
Furthermore enforced setting is also possible via 5328 manual influence Y1 and 5329 analog BMS
influence Y1.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 234
The function of the fixed value regulator can be switched ON or OFF via a binary source in 5178
Source EA fixed value.
Priorities
The Y signal is controlled with the following priority.
Priority Function
Highest Manual influence Y1 analog BMS influence Y1
Yfix lowest Control
Note
The enforced control of the Y output via 5328 manual influence Y1 or 5329 analog BMS influence
Y1 also works when the fixed value control has been switched OFF via 5178 source EA fixed value.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5100
XS
XS
5102
QReg
Source controlled variable
5106
tN
tN
5107
XS2
XS 2
5108 Q XS XS2
5110
Y
YL1
5120
XPY1
XPY1
5124 Sequence
parameter typ
set point float actual value deletable float set point deletable float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value float set point float set point multistate
min max init
-infinity +infinity 20
0,5
--
999,9
2
10
1
unit
--
-infinity +infinity deleted --
1 +infinity 3
-infinity +infinity 17
--
0
--
100 deleted
0 min
--
--
%
-value,text
0,/
16,\
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 235
No.
5129
name of parameter
Q Sequence inversion
5141
Y1min
Y1 min
5145
Y1max
Y1 max
5178
Q_EA
Source EA fixed value
5250 Lead size SG
5251
5252
5253
Slide start SG
Slide end SG
EF SG
5324
Yfix
Y fix
5327
Q_fix
Q Y fix
5328 Manual influence Y1
5329 analog BMS influence Y1
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable float set point float set point float set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean set point deletable float set point deletable float
min
--
0
0
--
max
--
init
deleted
0
100 deleted
unit
--
-infinity +infinity deleted --
-100
-100
-10
0
--
0
0
100
100
--
300
300
10
100
--
100
100
22
32
0,5
100 deleted deleted deleted
%
%
--
--
--
--
%
--
%
%
* Nr.
Beschreibung
1) 5100 Sollwert
2) 5102 Quelle Regelgröße
3) 5106 Nachstellzeit
4) 5107 alternativer Sollwert
5) 5108 Umschalter für den alternativen Sollwert XS 2
6) 5110 Y-Ausgang
7) 5120 Proportionalbereich
8) 5124 \ Heiz- oder / Kühlsequenz
9) 5129 Aktivierungschalter für die Sequenzumkehr
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
* Nr.
Beschreibung
10) 5141 YMin
11) 5145 YMax
12) 5178 Schalter Festwert ein/aus
13) 5250 Führungsgröße der Sollwertgleitung
14) 5251 Gleitanfang der Sollwertgleitung
15) 5252 Gleitende der Sollwertgleitung
16) 5253 Verstärkungsfaktor Sollwertgleitung
17) 5324 vorgebbarer, fester Y-Wert
18) 5327 Schalter für vorgebbaren, festen Y-Wert
19) 5328 Handeinfluß
20) 5329 analoger GLT Einfluß Y1
4.3. - 236
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 237
4.3.2.25. S338 Gliding
Function summary
The function of the DDC software menu S338 gliding is to allow the set point to glide with a command value. The glide range is set by the parameters GLEIT START and GLEIT END.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5421
Anf
Slide begin
5422
End
Slide end
5423
EF
EF slide
5424 DELTA slide
5425 Q Setpoint sliding
parameter typ min
set point float
10
15 set point float set point float actual value float
0
0 set point float
max
30
40
5
150
init
22
32
0,5
0
-infinity +infinity 0
unit
C
C
--
K m
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 238
4.3.2.26. S342 Pulse output
Function summary
The DDC software object pulse output implements any analog signal 0 .. 100 % as a 3-point signal. It is designed to convert the Y outputs calculated in the PID basic program, heating or fixed value.
The analog signal is set in source parameter 5490 source Y 3-point.
The hardware object can be used for 3-point actuators with and without feedback potentiometer. The feedback potentiometer signal is set in 5491 source return 3point.
If the value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN pulse is created.
Parameter 5496 Pulse OPEN.
If the Y signal is to be reduced, a CLOSE pulse is created.
Parameter 5497 Pulse CLOSED.
The length of the OPEN or CLOSED pulse is calculated from the change in value of the Y output, the motor run times and whilst considering the idle zone.
For a 3-point control without feedback potentiometer in order to calculate the length of the impulse the change in the calculated Y signal source Y 3-point is viewed otherwise for control with feedback potentiometer the difference between the Y target position source Y 3-point and the current acknowledgement source return 3-point.
It is possible to set different motor run times that vary with the direction with 5492 tMot_Auf and 5493
tMot_Zu.
Independent of a set idle zone above 97 % an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3 % an ongoing
CLOSE signal is issued.
Using source parameterizing the 3-point outputs Pulse OPEN and Pulse CLOSED are to be assigned contact outputs for the DDC4000 system.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 239
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5490
Q
Source Y 3 position
5491
Q R
Source back 3 position
5492
t Auf
tMot
5493
t Zu
tMot_Zu
5494
Tot
Dead zone
5496
Auf
Impulse OPEN
5497
Zu
Impulse SHUT
parameter typ
actual value float actual value deletable float set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
--
--
1
0
0
1
min max
0 100
100
2147483647
init
0 deleted %
180 s
unit
%
2147483647 180
50
--
--
0
0
0
--
-s
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 240
4.3.2.27. S343 E-Max
Function summary
The DDC software menu is used to switch off electrical consumers in a targeted manner. The aim is to keep the average electrical energy consumption of a building or technical plant under a stipulated limiting value. The software menu parameters can be set flexibly and permit the best possible change for each specific problem and plants.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5427 Q alarm reset
5430 Limiting value high rate
5431 Limiting value low rate
5432 Q Limiting value rate
5433 Impulse input
5435 Scaling
5436 Scaling exp
5437 Q reset
5440 Measuring cycle
5441 Switch scale factor
5442 Wait time
5443 Measuring interval
5444 Source OFF E max
parameter typ
set point deletable boolean actual value float actual value float actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value float actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable reference
min max
---
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
--
--
0
-4
--
10
1
0
10
--
--
--
1000
4
--
180
4
5
60
--
init unit
deleted --
300
200 kW kW
1
1 deleted -deleted --
--
--
2
3 deleted --
60 s
--
--
15 min deleted --
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
5447 E max status
5448 E max alarm
5450 max. nr. of consumers
5451 act. energy amount Z
5452 act. power Z
5453 Trend power
5455 P total
5456 P current
5457 P from
5487 P last measuring interval
6641 Max. switched off time 1
6642 Max. switched off time 2
6643 Max. switched off time 3
6644 Max. switched off time 4
6645 Max. switched off time 5
6646 Max. switched off time 6
6647 Max. switched off time 7
6648 Max. switched off time 8 set point float actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer set point float set point float set point float set point float set point boolean set point integer set point float set point float
Objects parameter typ
set point multistate
4.3. - 241 min
--
max
3
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
10000000
60
--
20
10000000
10000000
10000000 0
999999,875 0
999999,875 0
999999,875 0
0
0
0
0
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
0
60
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
0
init
0 min min min min kW kW min min min min kW kW kW kW
unit
value,text
0,No GW
1,GW 1
2,GW 2
--
-kWh
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
6649 Max. switched off time 9
6650 Max. switched off time 10
6651 Max. switched off time 11
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
Max. switched off time 12
Max. switched off time 13
Max. switched off time 14
Max. switched off time 15
Max. switched off time 16
Max. switched off time 17
Max. switched off time 18
Max. switched off time 19
Max. switched off time 20
Back notify contact 1
Back notify contact 2
Back notify contact 3
Back notify contact 4
Back notify contact 5
Back notify contact 6
Back notify contact 7
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
min max
5 60
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
4.3. - 242
60
60
60
60
60 min deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
60
60
60
60
init
60
60
60 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
unit
min min min
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
6708 Back notify contact 8
6709 Back notify contact 9
6710 Back notify contact 10
6711 Back notify contact 11
6712 Back notify contact 12
6713 Back notify contact 13
6714 Back notify contact 14
6715 Back notify contact 15
6716 Back notify contact 16
6717 Back notify contact 17
6718 Back notify contact 18
6719 Back notify contact 19
6720 Back notify contact 20
6721 Min. Switched on time 1
6722 Min. Switched on time 2
6723 Min. Switched on time 3
6724 Min. Switched on time 4
6725 Min. Switched on time 5
6726 Min. Switched on time 6
parameter typ
actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
60
60
60
60
60
60
Version 05/06
4.3. - 243
0
0
0
0 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
0
0 deleted -deleted -min min
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
6727 Min. Switched on time 7
6728 Min. Switched on time 8
6729 Min. Switched on time 9
6730 Min. Switched on time 10
6731 Min. Switched on time 11
6732 Min. Switched on time 12
6733 Min. Switched on time 13
6734 Min. Switched on time 14
6735 Min. Switched on time 15
6736 Min. Switched on time 16
6737 Min. Switched on time 17
6738 Min. Switched on time 18
6739 Min. Switched on time 19
6740 Min. Switched on time 20
6741 Min. Switched off time 1
6742 Min. Switched off time 2
6743 Min. Switched off time 3
6744 Min. Switched off time 4
6745 Min. Switched off time 5 actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
Version 05/06
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
min max
0 60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
4.3. - 244
min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min
unit
min min min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
init
0
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 245
No.
name of parameter
6746 Min. Switched off time 6
6747 Min. Switched off time 7
6748 Min. Switched off time 8
6749 Min. Switched off time 9
6750 Min. Switched off time 10
6751 Min. Switched off time 11
6752 Min. Switched off time 12
6753 Min. Switched off time 13
6754 Min. Switched off time 14
6755 Min. Switched off time 15
6756 Min. Switched off time 16
6757 Min. Switched off time 17
6758 Min. Switched off time 18
6759 Min. Switched off time 19
6760 Min. Switched off time 20
6761 Power consumption 1
6762 Power consumption 2
6763 Power consumption 3
6764 Power consumption 4 actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float
min max
0 60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
init
0 deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW min min min min
unit
min min min min min min min min min min min
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6765 Power consumption 5
6766 Power consumption 6
6767 Power consumption 7
6768 Power consumption 8
6769 Power consumption 9
6770 Power consumption 10
6771 Power consumption 11
6772 Power consumption 12
6773 Power consumption 12
6774 Power consumption 14
6775 Power consumption 15
6776 Power consumption 16
6777 Power consumption 17
6778 Power consumption 18
6779 Power consumption 19
6780 Power consumption 20
6781 Priority 1
6782 Priority 2
6783 Priority 3
Objects 4.3. - 246 parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
min max
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
1
1
1
3
3
3 deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW
init unit
deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW
1
1 deleted kW
1 --
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6784 Priority 4
6785 Priority 5
6786 Priority 6
6787 Priority 7
6788 Priority 8
6789 Priority 9
6790 Priority 10
6791 Priority 11
6792 Priority 12
6793 Priority 13
6794 Priority 14
6795 Priority 15
6796 Priority 16
6797 Priority 17
6798 Priority 18
6799 Priority 19
6800 Priority 20
6801 Source Manual 1
6802 Source Manual 2
Version 05/06
Objects
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
min max
1 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--
--
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
--
--
4.3. - 247
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
init
1
1
1 deleted -deleted --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6803 Source Manual 3
6804 Source Manual 4
6805 Source Manual 5
6806 Source Manual 6
6807 Source Manual 7
6808 Source Manual 8
6809 Source Manual 9
6810 Source Manual 10
6811 Source Manual 11
6812 Source Manual 12
6813 Source Manual 13
6814 Source Manual 14
6815 Source Manual 15
6816 Source Manual 16
6817 Source Manual 17
6818 Source Manual 18
6819 Source Manual 19
6820 Source Manual 20
6821 Consumers 1
Version 05/06
Objects parameter typ
actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference set point boolean
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.3. - 248
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
1 --
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6822 Consumers 2
6823 Consumers 3
6824 Consumers 4
6825 Consumers 5
6826 Consumers 6
6827 Consumers 7
6828 Consumers 8
6829 Consumers 9
6830 Consumers 10
6831 Consumers 11
6832 Consumers 12
6833 Consumers 13
6834 Consumers 14
6835 Consumers 15
6836 Consumers 16
6837 Consumers 17
6838 Consumers 18
6839 Consumers 19
6840 Consumers 20
Version 05/06
Objects
set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean
parameter typ
set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.3. - 249
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
init
1
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 250
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 251
4.3.2.28. S344 Degree daily figure
Function summary
The degree day figure represents a relationship between the outside temperature and energy consumption and therefore gives information on the heat consumption and heating costs for a heating period. It is the product of the number of heating days and the difference between the usual room temperature of 20 °C and the outside temperature. Heating days are when it is colder than
5155 basic heating day (15…20°C).
At Kieback&Peter a heating day is assumed when the average daily temperature is under 20 °C. The varies may differ for export.
The degree day number is calculated retroactively for the past day as follows:
TO average < Basic heating day at 24:00 Þ GTZnew = GTZold + (20 – TO average)
TO average >=Basic Heating day at 24:00 Þ GTZnew = GTZold
TO average is the arithmetic average of the outside temperature read each minute.
TOaverage = å AT / number of full operating minutes the previous day.
For the first calculation of the degree day number 5154 degree day number the software object must be active for two days.
The calculation is only made if the parameter for the outside temperature 5103 source TO had a valid value on the previous day for at least 18 hours.
The degree day number 5154 degree day number can be preset to a whole number >=. At the end of the month or year the degree day number is not reset automatically. If required this must be done e. g. via the control panel.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
5103 Source TA actual value deletable float
5154 Degree-day nr.
5155 Basic heating set point integer set point integer
min max
-infinity +infinity
0
15
99999999 0
20
init unit
deleted C
20
--
C
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 252
4.3.2.29. S347 E-Max French
Function summary
The DDC software menu is used to switch off electrical consumers in a targeted manner. The aim is to keep the average electrical energy consumption of a building or technical plant under a stipulated limiting value. The software menu parameters can be set flexibly and permit the best possible change for each specific problem and plants.
Note: software object S347 is especially set up to meet the requests of the French power industry.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
5429 Limiting value tanphi
5434 Q res
Q reset
5438 Measuring cycle
5439 Switch scale factor
5445 Measuring interval
5446 E max status
parameter typ
actual value float actual value deletable reference actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer set point multistate
min max
0 1
--
10 180
1
--
--
4
10 30
8
5449 E max alarm tanphi
5454 Wait time
5458 Q Aus
Source OFF E max
5459 E max alarm
5460 Max. nr. of consumers set point boolean actual value integer actual value deletable reference set point boolean set point integer
--
0
--
--
0
--
5
--
--
20
0
0
init
0,4 deleted --
60 s
unit
--
2
10
-min
0
0
3 -deleted -value,text
0,No GW
1,GW 1
2,GW 2
3,GW 3
4,GW 4
5,GW 5
6,GW 6
7,GW 7
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 253
No.
name of parameter
5462 Limiting value full load summer
parameter typ
5461 Limiting value partial load summer actual value float actual value float
5463 Limiting value partial load winter
5464 Limiting value normal load winter actual value float actual value float
5465 Limiting value full load winter
5466 Limiting value peak load winter
5467 Limiting value EJP
5468 act. energy amount Z actual value float actual value float actual value float set point float
5469 act. power Z
5470 Trend power
5471 Q P
5472 Q HC
5473 Q EJP
5474 Q EJP notification 30 min set point float set point float actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
5475 Q EJP notification 24 h
5476 Q even month actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
5477 P total
5478 P current
5479 P from set point float set point float set point float
min max
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0,01 1000000
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
10000000
10000000
10000000
--
--
--
--
--
--
999999,875
999999,875
999999,875
init
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
0
0
0
unit
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kWh kW kW deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
0
0
0 kW kW kW
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
5480 P last measuring interval
5481 Impuls input eff. power
5482 Scaling eff. power
5483 Scaling exp eff. power
5484 Impuls input blind power
5485 Scaling blind power
5486 Scaling exp blind power
6661 Source Manual 1
6662 Source Manual 2
6663 Source Manual 3
6664 Source Manual 4
6665 Source Manual 5
6666 Source Manual 6
6667 Source Manual 7
6668 Source Manual 8
6669 Source Manual 9
6670 Source Manual 10
6671 Source Manual 11
6672 Source Manual 12
Version 05/06
Objects 4.3. - 254 parameter typ
set point float actual value deletable reference actual value float actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value float actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
min max
0 10000000
--
0
-4
--
0
-4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1000
4
--
1000
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
init
0 deleted --
1
1 deleted --
1
1
--
--
--
-deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
unit
kW
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6673 Source Manual 13
6674 Source Manual 14
6675 Source Manual 15
6676 Source Manual 16
6677 Source Manual 17
6678 Source Manual 18
6679 Source Manual 19
6680 Source Manual 20
6681 Consumers 1
6682 Consumers 2
6683 Consumers 3
6684 Consumers 4
6685 Consumers 5
6686 Consumers 6
6687 Consumers 7
6688 Consumers 8
6689 Consumers 9
6690 Consumers 10
6691 Consumers 11
Version 05/06
Objects parameter typ
actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.3. - 255
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 deleted --
1 --
--
--
--
--
--
--
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
--
--
--
--
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6692 Consumers 12
6693 Consumers 13
6694 Consumers 14
6695 Consumers 15
6696 Consumers 16
6697 Consumers 17
6698 Consumers 18
6699 Consumers 19
6700 Consumers 20
6841 EJP 1
6842 EJP 2
6843 EJP 3
6844 EJP 4
6845 EJP 5
6846 EJP 6
6847 EJP 7
6848 EJP 8
6849 EJP 9
6850 EJP 10
Version 05/06
Objects
set point boolean set point boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
parameter typ
set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
min max
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
4.3. - 256
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
init
1
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6851 EJP 11
6852 EJP 12
6853 EJP 13
6854 EJP 14
6855 EJP 15
6856 EJP 16
6857 EJP 17
6858 EJP 18
6859 EJP 19
6860 EJP 20
6861 Max. switched off time 1
6862 Max. switched off time 2
6863 Max. switched off time 3
6864 Max. switched off time 4
6865 Max. switched off time 5
6866 Max. switched off time 6
6867 Max. switched off time 7
6868 Max. switched off time 8
6869 Max. switched off time 9
Version 05/06
Objects
actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
5
5
5
5
---
---
60
60
60
60
5
5
5
5
5
60
60
60
60
60
min max
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
4.3. - 257
min min min min
--
--
-min min min min min
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
60
60
60
60
1
60
1
1
60
60
60
60
1
1
1
1
1
1
init
1
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6870 Max. switched off time 10
6871 Max. switched off time 11
6872 Max. switched off time 12
6873 Max. switched off time 13
6874 Max. switched off time 14
6875 Max. switched off time 15
6876 Max. switched off time 16
6877 Max. switched off time 17
6878 Max. switched off time 18
6879 Max. switched off time 19
6880 Max. switched off time 20
6881 Back notify contact 1
6882 Back notify contact 2
6883 Back notify contact 3
6884 Back notify contact 4
6885 Back notify contact 5
6886 Back notify contact 6
6887 Back notify contact 7
6888 Back notify contact 8
Version 05/06
Objects parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference
min max
5 60
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.3. - 258
60
60
60
60 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
60
60
60
60
init
60
60
60 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
unit
min min min
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6889 Back notify contact 9
6890 Back notify contact 10
6891 Back notify contact 11
6892 Back notify contact 12
6893 Back notify contact 13
6894 Back notify contact 14
6895 Back notify contact 15
6896 Back notify contact 16
6897 Back notify contact 17
6898 Back notify contact 18
6899 Back notify contact 19
6900 Back notify contact 20
6901 Min. Switched on time 1
6902 Min. Switched on time 2
6903 Min. Switched on time 3
6904 Min. Switched on time 4
6905 Min. Switched on time 5
6906 Min. Switched on time 6
6907 Min. Switched on time 7
Version 05/06
Objects parameter typ
actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value deletable reference actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
4.3. - 259
0
0
0
0 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
0
0 deleted --
0 min min min
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min min min min
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6908 Min. Switched on time 8
6909 Min. Switched on time 9
6910 Min. Switched on time 10
6911 Min. Switched on time 11
6912 Min. Switched on time 12
6913 Min. Switched on time 13
6914 Min. Switched on time 14
6915 Min. Switched on time 15
6916 Min. Switched on time 16
6917 Min. Switched on time 17
6918 Min. Switched on time 18
6919 Min. Switched on time 19
6920 Min. Switched on time 20
6921 Min. Switched off time 1
6922 Min. Switched off time 2
6923 Min. Switched off time 3
6924 Min. Switched off time 4
6925 Min. Switched off time 5
6926 Min. Switched off time 6
Version 05/06
Objects
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
min max
0 60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
4.3. - 260
min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min min
unit
min min min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
init
0
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6927 Min. Switched off time 7
6928 Min. Switched off time 8
6929 Min. Switched off time 9
6930 Min. Switched off time 10
6931 Min. Switched off time 11
6932 Min. Switched off time 12
6933 Min. Switched off time 13
6934 Min. Switched off time 14
6935 Min. Switched off time 15
6936 Min. Switched off time 16
6937 Min. Switched off time 17
6938 Min. Switched off time 18
6939 Min. Switched off time 19
6940 Min. Switched off time 20
6941 Power consumption 1
6942 Power consumption 2
6943 Power consumption 3
6944 Power consumption 4
6945 Power consumption 5
Version 05/06
Objects 4.3. - 261
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float
min max
0 60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
init
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
unit
min min min min min min min min min min min min min min deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6946 Power consumption 6
6947 Power consumption 7
6948 Power consumption 8
6949 Power consumption 9
6950 Power consumption 10
6951 Power consumption 11
6952 Power consumption 12
6953 Power consumption 13
6954 Power consumption 14
6955 Power consumption 15
6956 Power consumption 16
6957 Power consumption 17
6958 Power consumption 18
6959 Power consumption 19
6960 Power consumption 20
6961 Priority 1
6962 Priority 2
6963 Priority 3
6964 Priority 4
Version 05/06
Objects 4.3. - 262 parameter typ
actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value deletable float actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
min max
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
0,1 10000000
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
init unit
deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW deleted kW
1
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
6965 Priority 5
6966 Priority 6
6967 Priority 7
6968 Priority 8
6969 Priority 9
6970 Priority 10
6971 Priority 11
6972 Priority 12
6973 Priority 13
6974 Priority 14
6975 Priority 15
6976 Priority 16
6977 Priority 17
6978 Priority 18
6979 Priority 19
6980 Priority 20
Objects
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer actual value integer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
min max
1 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4.3. - 263
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
init
1
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 264
4.3.2.30. S901 Signal generator
Function summary
Signal generator for test purposes.
Produces a
- sinus signal
- Ramp / sawtooth signal
- Rectangular signal with selectable
- period duration
- Amplitude
- Amplitude offset
The cycle time of the signal generator is 50ms. All three different signal generators have a reset input that restarts the production of the output signal.
Functions / restrictions:
- Sinus generator:
minimum period duration > 10* cycle time
- Ramp / sawtooth signal:
t1: Time for increasing ramp >= cycle time
t2: Time for falling ramp, >= cycle time, connected to t1
t1+t2 must be <= period time
if t1+t2 < period time the signal looks like this: /\_/\_
- Rectangular generator:
tPulse: "On" pulse time must be > cycle time and < period time.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
tPer_sin
T_Periode_Sinus
2 Half_Ampl_sin
3
4
5
6
7
Offs_sin
Res Sin
Reset_sin tPer_ramp t1_ramp t2_ramp set point boolean set point float set point float set point float
parameter typ min
set point float
1
0 set point float set point float
-infinity
max
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
init
10
1
0
unit
s
--
--
--0 --
1
0,1
0,1
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
10
9,9
0,1 s s s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
8 Ampl_ramp
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Offs_ramp
res ramp
Reset_ramp tPer_pulse tPulse_pulse
Ampl_pulse
Offs_pulse
Reset_pulse
sin
sine
rampe
ramp
Impuls
pulse
tcyc
Cycle time set point float set point float set point float set point float
parameter typ min
set point float
0
max
+infinity
init
1
-infinity +infinity 0
unit
--
-set point float set point boolean
--0 --
0,1 +infinity 1 s
0,05
0
-infinity
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
0,5
1
0 s
--
-set point boolean actual value float actual value float actual value float actual value float
--
-infinity
-infinity
-infinity
0,01
--
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
3600
0
0
0
0
1
--
--
--
-s
4.3. - 265
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 266
4.3.3. Hardware objects
4.3.3.1. What are hardware objects?
Hardware objects are summaries of control functions in a block with input and output factors. The markers and timers are summarized to unchangeable and tested blocks.
Hardware objects are comprised of the specific function to controlling a machine and repeated functions.
The repeated functions include for example:
Operating hours counter with limiting value
Command execution check (CEC) malfunction catch
For this these functions must not be used. Functions requested by the customer are however integrated in a HWO.
The hardware objects are structured such that they are very similar in terms of options for influencing the setting signals, priorities and function groups.
The hardware objects receive their input signals from the control, from hardware inputs or the DDC control (markers, timer). With the aid of the DDC market and time missing functions on these HWOs can be set. For example fire protection covers can be collected in order for them to be linked into once cover with a release.
The HWO outputs are designed for coupling (via supports) with the hardware outputs.
In order to avoid run time differences for the switching signals the contacts for one device, e.g. fan, must be on an output module. Otherwise the steps or on and off signals may take place at the same time.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 267
Parameters, names and classification
Parameters can be addressed in two different ways.
1. via the parameter number and 2. via the parameter name.
The parameter number is unique to only one object. Each object can have for example a parameter with the number 12 and the text "Rep". For this addressing is possible in sources and links both via voice-led parameters and via parameter names. The use of texts instead of numbers is advantageous for planning plant assignments and when reading sources.
A customer-specific plain text can still be set for the relevant parameter.
There are different types of parameters:
Binary values (Boolean): Logical value (0 or 1)
Integer: Number without places after decimal point (-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 )
Floating comma: Number with digits after the decimal point (-3.402823466E38 to
3.402823466E38)
Multistate: Value has one of several statuses (0-OFF, 1-ON, 9-AUTO). For this "BACnet" in the parameter table means the BACnet number of the status and "DDC No." means the DDC4000 number.
Selection list: Value that can have one of a choice of statuses. Each status is one bit position.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.2. All hardware objects
H402
H403
H404
H501
H502
H503
H504
H601
H602
H203
H204
H301
H302
H401
H104
H105
H106
H201
H202
H000S
H001
H002
H004
H010
H045
H101
H102
H103
object no.
name of object
Sim
Circul. pump
Pump
Device on the M-Bus
Network-Var.
Control channel
Sensor general
Sensor pressure
Sensor humidity
Sensor CO2
Sensor temperature
Sensor volume current unreleased unreleased unreleased
Detector general unreleased
Detector diff pressure ventilator unreleased
Detector frost protection
Detector STB/TR
Steam humidifier cont.
Steam humidif. constant
One-level electro heater unreleased unreleased
0.1.9
unreleased
0.1.9
release stage: 24.07.2006
unreleased
0.3.33
0.3.33
0.2.1
unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased
Two-level electro heater
Three-level electro heater
Electroheater contin.
Flap OPEN/SHUT
Fire protection flap
Flap 3-Point
Flap continuous
1-level fan
2-level fan
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
Version 05/06
4.3. - 268
Software structure Objects
H702
H703
H704
H801
H802
H603
H604
H611
H612
H613
H614
H701
object no.
name of object
3-level fan
Fan FU/Byp
Valve OPEN/SHUT
Valve BUS
3-point valve
Valve cont.
One-level burner
Two-level burner
Burner modulat. 3-point
Burner cont. modulating
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
Volume current controller const 0.1.9
Volume current controller cont.
0.1.9
release stage: 24.07.2006
unreleased
0.1.9
0.1.9
unreleased
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
H901
H903
H904
H905
One level pump
Pump FU/Bypass
Pump BUS
Double pump
0.1.9
0.1.9
unreleased
0.1.9
4.3. - 269
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 270
4.3.3.3. Priorities and signals
Priorities auto, Z, DOL, manual, forced and malfunction
There are various options for influencing the setting signals.
Setting signals are changed in the various hardware objects be the following intervention variable:
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest SM
Action
Described in the relevant "trouble-shooting" section, usually switch off outputs
Rep, Zw/Off, Manual/Off Switch off outputs
Manual/open, Zw/open
Switch on outputs
Z/closed, DOL
Z/On
lowest
Auto
Switch off outputs
Switch on outputs
Automatic operation
SM Malfunction message from the field
Rep
Zw
Repair switch - influences a block released on the device for repair work
Forced influence - intervention through regulating or control events, e.g. to integrate superordinate malfunction messages such as frost guards (forced on, forced off or forced values)
Manual Manual influence - Intervention through operation on / near the DDC (manual on, manual off, manual automatic etc) or manual values
Z
Auto
DOL
Z influence - intervention by switching on building technology (Z on, Z off)
Automatic operation, if nec. by influencing time programs
Direct operating level - intervention through direct operation (e.g. front switch modules)
Most of the abbreviations above and following are refering to German expressions therefore they are not reasonable for English understanding.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 271
4.3.3.4. Command execution check CEC
Command execution check
The command execution control is used to monitor binary operating actual statuses.
An actual operation status (or operating message) must with a specific period of time tCEC match the value of a target operating status, otherwise the binary output stCEC is set to 1. If the actual operating status is not switched no stCEC is signaled.
The stCEC is reset when the ResSM input changes from 0 to 1.
If the ResCEC input is not switched stCEC is reset when the actual operating status matches the target operating status again.
The 0/1 flank from stCEC is out put with a VzCEC delay.
The monitored signal is withdrawn for malfunction recognition after the time tCEC + VzCEC.
Par.No Parameter name, plain text Description
Bsz
Input target operational status
CEC
Input for the binary actual status
tCEC
VzCEC
ResCEC stCEC
Time within which the actual operating status may differ from the target operating status without releasing stCEC x
stCEC is output with a delay for the stated time.
Resets the stCEC.
Signals that the actual operating status was longer than the tCEC of the target operating status.
x x
Input Ed.
x x x
Signal interaction depiction
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.5. Operating hours
Operation hours counting with and without limiting value
4.3. - 272
The command execution control is used to measure the duration of binary actual operating statuses.
The counting can be reset to 0, set by default or changed.
Exceeding an operating hour limiting value is signaled in parameter
gBh "limiting value infringement".
Par.No
Parameter name, plain text Description
BhZ
Input for the binary actual status
BhGw
Operating hours limiting value
ResBh
Bh gBh
Resets Bh to 0
Time in which BhZ was 1
Limit value infringement x x
Input Ed.
x x x x
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 273
4.3.3.6. Malfunction catch
A set malfunction message signal prevents the occurrence of a new malfunction message.
A malfunction that occurs SM may influence the control of output Y a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the Y output to 0% or for binary outputs to 0 and if nec. Anf to 0 ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
The malfunction message can be reset with "ResSM".
An important note:
How does "malfunction blocked" work?
The "malfunction blocked" parameter can be set to yes or no. If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs.
The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM (Reset malfunction message).
Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message. Here a link creates a function.
Parameters
Parameter name, plain text Description
Reset is controlled by level indicator
Input Ed.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 274
4.3.3.7. Malfunction message output
Malfunction message output /SMout
Almost all hardware objects have a malfunction message output SMout that displays the occurrence of a malfunction. (from DDC4000-Version 1.2)
The output is independent of the status of the command execution check (CEC) and parameter
"malfunction blocked".
If the unlock catch "ResSM" is not switched there is a malfunction if at least one of the malfunction message inputs SM = 1.
If input "ResSM" is switched the malfunction message output is only reset if there is no other malfunction and the unlocking was released (this implements stopping the malfunction message).
Reset malfunction message is not occupied
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 275
Reset malfunction message is occupied
The objects
H501 Cover open/closed
H611 Valve open/closed
H801 Volume flower counter constant do not have a malfunction message output as they do not have a malfunction message input.
4.3.3.8. H301 Steam moistening unit constant
Function summary
Areas of use: steam moistening unit with the following are supported:
separate steam feed own steam generation with small tank (start-up with Y not equal to 0%) own steam generation with large tank (separate heating requirement before operation)
The "steam moistening unit constant" function block controls a steam moistening unit with target setting of 0..100%.
The function block supports:
Generating an operating target state / control during the movement phase/
Handling the standby message
Advance switch off (for fighting legionella)
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Beg. Automatic
2
3
Ysoll
Setpoint.Autom
GwYsoll
Limitval.Yset
4
5
6
7
Vorab
Advance switch off
BM
Operation
Bereit
Ready
tBAK
tBAK
8
9
VzBAK
VzBAK
SM
SM
10
ResSM
ResSM
11
StSperr
SM blocked
12
Z
Z- influence
13
Rep
Rep.switch
14
Hand
Manual
15
DBE
DBE
16
Zw
Forced control
17
ZwSw
Setpt forced control
18
Y
Y
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point float actual value float
min max
---
0
0
--
--
--
0
0
--
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
0
0
100
100
--
--
--
init unit
deleted --
50
3
%
% deleted -deleted -deleted --
+infinity 30
+infinity 20
--
--
--
100
--
100
--
--
100
100 deleted -deleted --
0 -deleted % deleted -deleted % deleted -deleted --
0
0 s s
%
%
Version 05/06
4.3. - 276
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 277
No.
name of parameter
19
Anf
Beg
20
stBAK
Status BAK
21
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min max
---
--
--
0
0
init
0
--
--
unit
--
Generating the target operating state / control during the movement phase / handling the standby message
If the AnfAuto input is deleted a request is detected by whether the Ytarget is above a limiting value GwYtarget. The limiting value view of GwYtarget is marked with a fixed hysteresis (Xsd) of 3%.
The monitoring of the flow must be guaranteed by advance regulation or control.
The target operating status "request steam moistening unit" is formed from the view above and from advance, Z, DOL, manual, Zw and ZwSw, Rep, SM, see below for priorities.
The following different movement methods are used for the steam moistening unit:
1. AnfAuto is deleted and GwYtarget equals 0 :
If a Ytarget > 0 % is stipulated "request steam moistening unit" is set to 1 and Y is set to
Ytarget.
2. AnfAuto is deleted and GwYtarget is greater than 0 :
There is a request if Ytarget exceeds the value of GwYtarget. "Request steam moistening
unit" is then set to 1. If the "standby message" is deleted Y is immediately set to Ytarget otherwise the occurrence of the "standby message" is awaited.
3. AnfAuto is not deleted :
After the existence of a request (AnfAuto = 1) "request steam moistening unit" is set to 1 and the "operating message" is awaited. If this does not occur in time the control execution check is released. If the "standby message" is deleted Y is immediately set to Ytarget otherwise after setting the "request steam moistening unit" the occurrence of the "standby message" is awaited.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 278
Advance switch off
The function block includes an input for advance switch-off. In automatic operation the steam moistening unit is switched off if this input Advoff is switched to 1. The aim is to ventilate the channel to fight legionella in line with VDI 6022. Advance switch off is ignored for non-automatic operation.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (for description and parameter refer to command execution check section) for the actual operating status "operating message steam
moistening unit", the target operating status "requests steam moistening unit" and the output
"Status command execution check".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 279
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Anf
BM
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Anf stCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A neighboring fault SM may not influence the control of outputY
1. ("fault blocked" = 0
2. sets the output Y to 0% and Anf to 0 ("Fault blocked" = 1)
If a fault sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock fault catch".
If "unlock fault catch" is not wired neighboring faults are not saved, i.e. if the fault disappears the fault handling disappears.
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting steam moistening unit".
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Rep
Zw
Y = 0%, Anf = 0
Y = ZwSw
Version 05/06
Software structure
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Manual
Y = Manual
DOL
Z
Preset = 1 lowest
Auto
Y = 0%, Anf = 0
Y = Z
Y = 0%, Anf = 0
Y = Ytarget
Objects 4.3. - 280
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 281
4.3.3.10. H401 Electrical air heater single stage
Function summary
The "electrical fan heater single stage" function block controls a single-stage electrical fan heater and supports:
Generating the operating release
Operating hours / limiting value
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
BM
Plant message Er
4
5
GW1Ein
GW1ON
GW1Aus
GW1OFF
8
9
STB
STB
DBE
DBE
10
Hand
Manual influence
11
Ysoll
Yset
12
LSÜ
Airstream monitoring
13
Rep
Repare switch
14
ResSM
SelfRestore
15
SM
Clear malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
--
--
--
0
0
min max
---
100
100
--
--
3 actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean
--
--
--
--
100
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
init unit
deleted --
60
20
%
% deleted -deleted --
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On deleted % deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 282
No.
18
19
name of parameter
17
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
Z
Z- influence
Zw
Forced control
20
gBh
Limit value infringement
21
Erh1
Anfo heater 1
25
stBAK
Malf. BAK
30
tBAK
Delay BAK
31
Bh
Operating hours
32
BhAktiv
Active opr. hours
33
BhGw
Total opr.hours
34
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
35
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer set point multistate set point multistate actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
0
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
min max
0
--
--
2147483647
3
3
init
0
0
0
--
--
--
2147483647
0
0
0
30
2147483647 0
-0
2147483647 0
-deleted h
--
-0 -h
--
-s
unit
s value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On
--
--
Function description
Generating the operating release
A request in automatic operation is recognized by the Ytarget as being above a limiting value GWOn (Basis: 60%). It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value
GWOff (Basis: 20 %). In addition for a request the "air flow monitoring" (even in Z-, forced or manual operation) must provide a normal message.
The " safety temperature limiter" also ends the request chain in non-automatic operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 283
In Z-, forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the single-stage electrical fan heater can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the heater operating message is not switched the output "Heater Level 1
on" is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
Erh1
Control signal
BM
ResBh
Bh
Operating message
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours
BhActive
BhGw
Bh gBh
activate
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 284
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message heater single
stage", target operating status: "Heater level 1 on", output: "Status command execution check":
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Erh1
Control signal from the object Bsz
BM tCEC
VzCEC
Erh1 stCEC
acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the "Heater level 1 on" output.
1. not ("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. switches off the "Heater level 1 on" output ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "Heater level 1 on" to off, this can only be reset by activating the
"unlock malfunction latch".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
4.3. - 285
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
SM stCEC
StLock
Malfunction blocked
Erh1
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
Z(on/off), DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off), Rep, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Highest
SM
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Heater level 1 on = 0
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/On
Heater level 1 on = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Heater level 1 on = 0 lowest
Auto
Heater level 1 on = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 depending on Ytarget, LSÜ and STB
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 286
4.3.3.11. H402 Electrical air heater 2 stage
Function summary
The "electrical fan heater two stage" function block controls a two-stage electrical fan heater and supports:
Generating the operating release
Operating hours / limiting value
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
BM1
Plant message St1
2
4
BM2
Plant message St2
GW1Ein
GW1ON
5
6
7
8
GW1Aus
GW1OFF
GW2Ein
GW2ON
GW2Aus
GW2OFF
STB
STB
9
DBE
DBE
10
Hand
Manual influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
0
--
0
0
--
--
--
0
min max
---
--
100
--
4
100
100
100
--
11
Ysoll
Yset
12
LSÜ
Air stream monitoring
13
Rep
Rep.switch
Version 05/06 actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
0
--
--
100
--
--
init unit
deleted -deleted --
40 %
20
70
55 % deleted --
%
% deleted --
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,Level 1
2,Level 2 deleted % deleted -deleted --
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 287
No.
name of parameter
14
ResSM
SelfRestore
15
SM
Clear malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
17
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
18
Z
Z- influence
19
20
Zw
Forced control
gBh
GW-Verl. Bh
21
Erh1
Anfo heater 1
22
Erh2
Anfo heater 2
25
stBAK1
Malf. BAK 1
26
stBAK2
Malf. BAK2
30
tBAK
Delay BAK
31
Bh
Operating hours
32
BhAktiv
Active opr. hours
33
BhGw
Total opr.hours
34
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point multistate set point multistate actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean
--
0
--
0
0
--
--
0
--
--
--
min max
---
--
--
2147483647 0
4 0
init unit
deleted -deleted --
0 --
--
--
--
--
4
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
-s value,text
9,Z-Auto
0,Z-OFF
1,Z-Level 1
2,Z-Level 2 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,Level 1
2,Level 2
--
--
--
2147483647
2147483647
--
0
0
30
0
0
2147483647 0
-deleted
--
-s h
-h
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 288
No.
name of parameter
35
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value boolean
min max
---
init
0
unit
--
Generating the operating release
A Level 1 release is recognized by the Ytarget as being above a limiting value GW1On
(Basis: 40 %). It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value GW1Off (Basis:
20 %). For the level 2 requests the GW2On (Basis: 20 %) and GW2Off (Basis: 55 %) limiting values apply. In addition for a request the "air flow monitoring" (even in Z-, forced or manual operation) must provide a normal message.
The outputs "Heater level 1 on" and "Heater Level 2 on" outputs are not locked against each other.
The " safety temperature limiter" also ends the request chain in non-automatic operation.
In Z-, forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the two-stage electrical fan heater can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the corresponding input for the heater operating message is not switched the output
"Heater Level 1 on" or "Heater level 2"is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 289
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
Erh1 or Erh2
BM1 or BM2
Control signal
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status for both fan heater levels: "Operation
message heater level 1 or 2", target operational status: "Heater level 1 on" or "Heater level 2 on", outputs: "Status command execution check 1"or "Status command execution check 2"
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC1, stCEC2).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 290
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter
Erh1 or Erh2
BM1 or BM2 tCEC corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
Erh1 or Erh2
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC1 or stCEC2
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may influence the control of the outputs "Heater level 1" and "Heater
level 2".
1. not ("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. switches off the "Heater level 1 on" and "Heater level 2 on" outputs ("malfunction blocked" =
1)
A malfunction caused by the command execution check stCEC1 or stCEC2 switches off the relevant output "Heater level 1 on" or "Heater level 2 on".
If the malfunction switches off the outputs "Heater level 1 on", and "Heater level 2 on" this can only be reset by activating the "release malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 291
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Erh1 and Erh2
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
Z(Off/Level 1/Level 2), DOL, Manual(Off/Level 1/Level 2), Zw(Off/Level 1/Level 2), SM
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest
SM
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
"Heater level 1 on" = 0
"Heater level 2 on" = 0
Manual/Level 2, Zw/Level 2
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Manual/Level 1, Zw/Level 1
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Z/closed, DOL
Z/Level 2
Z/Level 1
"Heater level 1 on" = 0
"Heater level 2 on" = 0
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 292
Priority Parameter / Value
lowest
Auto
Impact
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 and/or
"Heater level 2 on"
depending on Ytarget, LSÜ and STB
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 293
4.3.3.12. H403 Electrical air heater 3 stage
Function summary
The "electrical fan heater three stage" function block controls a three-stage electrical fan heater and supports:
Generating the operating release
Operating hours / limiting value
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
BM1
Plant message St1
2
3
BM2
Plant message St2
BM3
Plant message St3
4
5
6
7
GW1Ein
GW1ON
GW1Aus
GW1OFF
GW2Ein
GW2ON
GW2Aus
GW2OFF
8
9
STB
STB
DBE
DBE
10
Hand
Manual influence
11
Ysoll
Yset
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
min max
---
--
--
100
100
100
100
--
--
5 actual value deletable integer
0 100
60
40
30
10
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted --
%
%
%
% deleted -deleted --
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,Level 1
2,Level 2
3,Level 3 deleted %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 294
No.
name of parameter
12
LSÜ
Air stream monitoring
13
Rep
Rep.switch
14
ResSM
SelfRestore
15
SM
Clear malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
17
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
18
Z
Z- influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point multistate
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
stBAK2
27
stBAK3
30
Zw
Forced control
gBh
LV-viol. Bh
Erh1
Anfo heater 1
Erh2
Anfo heater 2
Erh3
Anfo heater 3
stBAK1
Malf. BAK 1
Malf. BAK2
Malf. BAK3
tBAK
Delay BAK set point multistate actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
min max
---
--
--
init
deleted deleted deleted
unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2147483647 0
5 0 deleted --
0 --
5 0 s value,text
9,Z-Auto
0,Z-OFF
1,Z-Level 1
2,Z-Level 2
3,Z-Level 3 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,Level 1
2,Level 2
3,Level 3
-0
0 --
-0
0 --
-0
0
0
--
--
0 2147483647 30 s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 295
No.
name of parameter
31
Bh
Operating hours
32
BhAktiv
Active opr. hours
33
BhGw
Total opr.hours
34
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
35
GW3Ein
GW3ON
36
GW3Aus
GW3OFF
37
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
0
--
--
0
--
0
min max
0 2147483647
init
0
--
2147483647
0
0
--
100
100
--
70
0 deleted --
90 %
%
--
-h
unit
h
Function description
Generating the operating release
A Level 1 release is recognized by the Ytarget being above a limiting value GW1On
(Basis: 30 %). It is ended when the value is lower than the limiting value GW1Off (Basis:
10 %). For the release of level 2 the GW2On (Basis: 60 %) and GW2Off (Basis: 40 %) limiting values apply. For the release of level 3 the GW3On (Basis: 90 %) and GW3Off
(Basis: 70 %) limiting values apply. In addition for a request the "air flow monitoring" (even in Z-, forced or manual operation) must provide a normal message.
The outputs "Heater level 1 on" and "Heater Level 2 on" and"Heater level 3 on" are not locked against each other.
The " safety temperature limiter" also ends the request chain in non-automatic operation.
In Z-, forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the three-stage electrical fan heater can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the corresponding input for the electrical heater operating message is not switched the output "Heater Level 1 on", "Heater level 2" or "Heater level 3"is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 296
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3
Control signal
BM1 or BM2 or BM3
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status for the three fan heater levels:
"Operation message heater level 1, 2 or 2", target operating status: "Heater level 1 on", "Heater
level 2 on" or "Heater level 3 on", outputs: "Status command execution check 1", "Status
command execution check 2" or "Status command execution check 3".
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC1, stCEC2, stCEC3).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 297
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter
Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3
BM1 or BM2 or BM3 tCEC
VzCEC corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Erh1 or Erh2 or Erh3
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC1 or stCEC2 or stCEC3
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may influence the control of the outputs "Heater level 1", "Heater
level 2" and "Heater level 3".
not ("malfunction blocked" = 0 switches off the "Heater level 1 on", "Heater level 2 on" and "Heater level 3 on"outputs
("malfunction blocked" = 1) a malfunction caused by the command execution check stCEC1, stCEC2 or stCEC3 switches off the relevant output "Heater level 1 on", "Heater level 2 on" or "Heater
level 3 on".
If the malfunction switches off the outputs "Heater level 1 on", "heater level 2 on" and "Heater
level 3 on" this can only be reset by activating the "release malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 298
HWO parameter
ResSM
SM stCEC corresponding general operating hour parameter
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Malfunction blocked
Erh1 and Erh2 and Erh3
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
Z(Off/Level 1/Level 2/Level 3), DOL, Manual(Off/Level 1/Level 2/Level 3), Zw(Off/Level 1/Level
2/Level 3), SM
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Highest
SM
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
"Heater level 1 on" = 0
"Heater level 2 on" = 0
"Heater level 3 on" = 0
Manual/Level 3, Zw/Level 3
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1
"Heater level 3 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Manual/Level 2, Zw/Level 2
Manual/Level 1, Zw/Level 1
Z/closed, DOL
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 0
"Heater level 2 on" = 0
"Heater level 3 on" = 0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 299
Priority Parameter / Value
Z/Level 3
Z/Level 2
Z/Level 1
lowest
Auto
Impact
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1
"Heater level 3 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1
"Heater level 2 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
"Heater level 1 on" = 1 and/or
"Heater level 2 on" = 1 and/or
"Heater level 3 on" = 1 depending on Ytarget, LSÜ and STB
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 300
4.3.3.13. H404 Electrical air heater constant
Function summary
The "electrical fan heater constant" function block controls a constant electrical fan heater and supports:
Generating the operating release
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
BM
About message
4
6
GWYsoll
GWYset
Y
Setp. heater
8
9
STB
STB
DBE
DBE
10
Hand
Manual influence
11
Ysoll
Yset
12
LSÜ
Air stream monitoring
13
Rep
Repair switch
14
ResSM
SelfRestore
15
SM
Clear malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocks
17
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable integer actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer
min max
---
0
0
--
--
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
100
100
--
--
100
100
--
--
--
--
--
2147483647
init
deleted
5
1 deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
0
0
unit
--
%
%
--
--
%
%
--
--
--
--
-s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 301
No.
name of parameter
18
Z
Z- influence
19
Zw
Forced control
21
Anf
Anfo recv contin.
25
stBAK
Malf. BAK
30
tBAK
Delay BAK
31
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point deletable integer set point deletable integer actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value boolean
0
--
min max
0 100
100
--
--
0
-0
2147483647 30
--0
init unit
deleted % deleted %
0 --
-s
--
Function description
Generating the operating release
A request in automatic operation is recognized by the Ytarget being above a limiting value
GWYtarget (Basis: 5%). The limiting value view is marked with a fixed hysteresis (Xsd) of
3%. In addition for a request the "air flow monitoring" (even in Z-, forced or manual operation) must provide a normal message.
The " safety temperature limiter" also ends the request chain in non-automatic operation.
In Z-, forced or manual operation the limiting value above is not checked.
The target operating status "request electrical fan heater constant" is formed from the view above and from , Z, DOL, manual, Zw and ZwSw, Rep, SM, see below for priorities.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message electrical fan
heater", Target operating status: "request electrical fan heater constant", output: "Status
Command execution check"
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 302
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Anf
BM
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Anf stCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the "request electrical fan
heater constant" output.
1. not ("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. switches off the "request electrical fan heater" output ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "request electrical fan heater constant" to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 303
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Anf
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target position electrical heater constant". The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
Z(on/off), DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off), Rep, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
Rep
Zw
Manual
DOL
Z
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Y = 0%, Anf = 0
Y = ZwSw, Anf = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Y = Manual, Anf = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Y = 0%, Anf = 0
lowest
Auto
Y = Z, Anf = 1 depending on LSÜ and STB
Y = Ytarget depending on Ytarget, LSÜ and STB
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 304
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 305
4.3.3.14. H501 Cover open/closed
Function summary
The "cover open/closed" function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a cover run time.
The function block supports:
Final position replication
Command execution check
Trouble-shooting
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
The RPG function block is basically identical to "Valve open/closed", the blocking protection is not required and some parameter names in the DDC4000 object are different.
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
3
Auf
End pos. OPEN
DBE
Direct operating level active
4
Hand
Manual influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
---
--
--
--
--
--
3
5
6
7
ResSM
Entr. Malfunction catch
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
Stell
Setting
8
9
VzBAK
StBAK delayed
Y
Flap drive
10
Yr
Set.feedb. flap
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted --
0 value,text
9,Manual Auto
1,Manual OPEN
0,Manual SHUT deleted -actual value deletable boolean set point boolean actual value multistate
--
--
--
--
--
3
0 --
1 set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable integer
0
--
0
2147483647 0
--
100
0 -deleted % value,text
1,OPEN
0,SHUT
24,Running s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 306
No. name of parameter
11
Z
Z- influence
12
Zu
End pos. SHUT
13
Zw
Forced control
14
stBAK
Status BAK
15
tBAK
Time BAK
16
tMot
Motor runtime
parameter typ
set point multistate actual value boolean set point integer set point integer
min max
-actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
--
--
--
0
-0
2147483647 30
0
3
--
3
600
init
0
unit
value,text
9,Z-Auto
1,Z OPEN
0,Z SHUT deleted --
0 value,text
9,Forced Auto
1,Forced OPEN
0,Forced SHUT
-s
120 s
Function description
Final position replication
The "final position open", "final position closed" and "position feedback signal cover" inputs can be wired if required.
If the "position feedback signal cover" is wired, but not the"final position open" and "final
position closed", both final positions are determined via the "position feedback signal cover". If
"position feedback signal cover" < 3 % a "closed" final position is assumed, if "position feedback
signal cover" > 97 % an "open" final position is assumed, otherwise "running".
If the plant in addition to "position feedback signal cover"is also wired for "final position open" or
"final position open" these inputs have higher priority.
If only one of the "final position open" or "final position closed" is switched but not "position
feedback signal cover", the final position that is not switched is determined via the "motor
operating time".
If e.g. only "final position closed" is switched after an "open" control the "Setting" output is first set to "running" and after the end of the "Motor operating time" set to "open".
If both "final position open" and "final position closed" are not switched the final position replication occurs in the same way for both final positions but a command execution check is not however effective.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters) for the actual operating status "Setting" that is formed as described above.
The target operating status is "control cover"; the output is "Status command execution check".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 307
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Y
Control signal from the object Bsz
Setting tCEC
VzCEC
Y stCEC
acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
No input "Cover malfunction" (SM).
An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the "control cover" output a) not ("Fault blocked" = 0) b) the output "Control cover" switched to "closed" ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a fault sets the output "control cover" to "closed" this can only be reset by activating the "unlock
fault catch".
If "unlock fault catch" is not wired faults that occur are not saved, i.e. if the fault disappears the fault handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 308
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
stCEC
StLock
Y
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Control valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
AnfAuto(open/closed), Z(open/closed), DOL, Manual(open/closed), Zw(open/closed), stCEC
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest
StCEC
Action
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/Closed, Zw/Closed
Control cover: "closed"
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/open
lowest
Auto
Control cover: "open"
Control cover: "closed"
Control cover: "open"
Automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 309
4.3.3.15. H502 Fire protection cover with drive
Function summary
The "fire protection cover with drive" function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a motor run time.
The function block supports:
Monitoring soldered strut contact
Self-test
Command execution check malfunction catch
Status control unit using Z influence, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
AnfTest
Begin Self-test
2
3
AnfZu
Begin Flap CLOSED
Auf
End pos. OPEN
4
Hand
Manual influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted --
0 value,text
9,Auto
1,OPEN
0,SHUT deleted -5
6
7
8
ResSM
Entr. malfunction catch
SMlot
Malf. msg solder contact
Stell
Setting (O=0, C=1)
Test
Display self-test actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean actual value multistate
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3
9
VzBAK
StBAK delayed
10
Y
Anst. Flap set point integer actual value boolean
0
--
2147483647 0
-0 deleted --
0 --
2 value,text
24,Test running
1,Test error
0,Test ok s
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 310
No.
name of parameter
11
Z
Z- influence
12
Zu
to end position
13
Zw
Forced control
14
stBAK
Status BAK
15
tBAK
Time BAK
16
tMot
Motor runtime
17
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point multistate
min
-actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
--
-actual value boolean set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
--
0
-0
2147483647 30
0
--
max
3
--
3
600
--
init
0
unit
value,text
9,Auto
1,OPEN
0,SHUT deleted --
0 value,text
9,Auto
1,OPEN
0,SHUT
-s
120
0 s
--
Function description
In automatic operation the fire protection cover can be controlled using AnfZu.
If the final position "closed" is switched and there is no acknowledgement (closed = 1), after the
tCEC has ended the command execution check is carried out (stCEC = 1).
This can be used for example to close the fire protection covers at night (e.g. relevant requirements in Switzerland).
If AnfZu is not connected, the position of the fire protection cover can only be changed using Z,
manual, Zw and AnfTest.
To switch off the fans etc. the SMlot soldered strut contact malfunction message is used.
Monitoring soldered strut contact
If parameter "malfunction message soldered strut contact" goes to 1, the "setting" output is set to "closed".
Self-test
The self-test is started if AnfZu is 0 or is not switched and "request self-test" goes to 1.
During the self-test "display self-test" is set to "running".
The cover is first moved to ("control cover"=0). The cover is only opened again if there is a acknowledgement (Closed=1) for a switched "closed" parameter or the motor run time (tMot) and then the "tBaktime" has run out.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 311
If in this time a malfunction for the command execution check is detected "display self-test" is set to
"malfunction" otherwise it is set to "OK" after the self-test.
In order to specify malfunctions during the self-test "final position closed" must be connected.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters) for the actual operating status that is formed from "final
position open" and "final position closed" that is formed as described above. The target operating status is "control cover"; the output is "Status command execution check".
In order for the command execution check to be operational "final position closed" must be connected, "final position open" is optional.
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Y
Control signal from the object Bsz
OPEN, CLOSED
Acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Y stCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 312 malfunction catch
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired a malfunction that occurs in the command execution check is saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
If "Unlock malfunction catch" is not connected, any malfunctions that occur are not saved.
"malfunction message soldered strut contact" is not caught itself.
Malfunction is not handled.
An adjoining command execution check does not influence the control of the "control cover" output
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Y
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Control cover". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
AnfZu, Z(closed/open), manual(closed/open), Zw(closed/open)
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
Manual/Closed, Zw/Closed
"Control cover" = "closed"
Manual/open, Zw/open
"Control cover" = "open"
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 313
Priority Parameter / Value
Z/closed
Z/open
AnfTest
lowest
Auto
Action
"Control cover" = "closed"
"Control cover" = "open"
Self-test
Automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Forced is prioritized higher than Z. Therefore this cover can be used as a butterfly valve (e.g. with a smoke alarm).
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 314
4.3.3.16. H503 Cover 3-point
Function summary
The "3-point cover" function block controls a 3-point cover using an analog signal (0..0.100%).
The function block supports:
Idle zone
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
The "3-point cover" function block controls a 3-point cover using an analog signal (0..00.100 %). If the value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN pulse is created. If the Y signal is to be reduced, a CLOSE pulse is created. Independent of a set idle zone above 97% an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3% an ongoing CLOSE signal is issued.
The length of the OPEN and CLOSE pulses are calculated from the value of the change in the Y output and the motor operating times tMotAuf or tMotZu. The hardware object can be used for 3point actuators with and without position feedback signal. If no position feedback signal is available the input values "final position open" or "final position CLOSED" are analyzed for the synchronization.
When the final positions are reached (for entered sources for open and close final positions) the drive moves to "stop" until it receives a command in the opposite direction < 97% or > 3%.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
DBE
Direct operating level active
Hand
Manual influence
4
5
6
7
ResSM
Entr. malfunction catch
SM
Malf. with flap
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
Tot
Signal change deadzone
8
9
Y
Setp. flap
YAuf
OPEN Impulse
Version 05/06
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer actual value integer actual value boolean
--
0
--
--
0
--
--
0
min max
---
--
100
100
--
--
50
--
--
0
0
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted %
0
0 deleted -deleted --
--
%
%
--
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 315
No.
name of parameter
10
YZu
CLOSED Impulse
11
Yist
Position display
12
Yr
Servo feedback of flap
13
Ysoll
Setp. flap
14
Z
Z- influence
15
Zu
End pos. SHUT
16
Zw
Forced control
17
ZwSw
Setp- flap forced control
18
tMotAuf
Motor runtime OPEN
19
tMotZu
Motor runtime CLOSED
20
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value integer actual value deletable integer set point integer set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
0
--
0
0
--
--
0
0
0
0
min max
---
100
100
--
--
100
100
100 100
2147483647 120
2147483647 120
-0
init
0
0 % deleted %
unit
--
0 % deleted % deleted -deleted -s
--
% s
Function description
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
cover" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
cover" is used. This may come from "Target cover position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Idle zone
If the "position feedback signal cover" is not switched on the "idle zone" only works on control signal changes if the control signal (Ytarget) changes by a higher amount than the idle zone set. If
"position feedback signal cover" is switched the idle zone works on the difference between the control signal and the position feedback signal (Yr). I.e. if the difference reaches a higher amount than the idle zone set, signal changes are issued.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 316
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Zw
Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = ZwSw
Y = Manual
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.17. H504 Cover constant
Function summary
The "cover constant" function block controls a constant cover with target setting of 0..100%.
The function block supports:
Trouble-shooting
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
Ysoll
Setp. flap automatic
4
5
6
9
Yr
Servo back flap
Yist
Setting no.
Y
Setp. flap
DBE
DBE Status
10
Hand
Manual influence
14
ResSM
Enter malf. msg
15
SM
Malf. with flap
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
18
Z
Z- influence
19
Zw
Forced control
20
ZwSw
Setp. flap forced control
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value deletable float actual value float actual value float actual value deletable boolean set point deletable integer set point deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean set point integer
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
0
--
100
100
100
100
--
100
--
--
--
100
--
100 deleted
0 deleted
0
0 deleted deleted deleted deleted
0 deleted deleted
100
--
%
%
%
%
--
%
--
--
--
%
--
%
4.3. - 317
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 318
No.
name of parameter
21
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value boolean
min max init
--0
unit
--
Function description
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
cover" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
cover" is used. This may come from "Target cover position in
automatic operation" ,"Z influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch". If "Unlock malfunction catch" is not connected, any malfunctions that occur are not saved i.e. if the malfunction disappears the trouble-shooting is stopped.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 319
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
StLock
Malfunction blocked
Y
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Zw
Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = ZwSw
Y = Manual
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 320
4.3.3.18. H601 Fan single stage
Function summary
The "fan single stage" function block controls a single-stage fan and supports:
cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
3
AnfKl
Begin Flap
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
4
5
6
7
BMKlAuf
Plant msg: Flap OPEN
BMLu
Plant msg: Fan
Bh
Operating hours
BhAktiv
Activate oper.hrs. counting
8
9
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
DBE
Direct operating level active
10
Hand
Manual switch
11
LEin
Fan ON
12
Rep
Repair switch
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
---
--
0
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
2147483647
--
--
2147483647
--
2147483647
--
3
init
deleted
0
0 deleted deleted
0
0
0 deleted
0
unit
--
-s
--
-h
-h
--
-0 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On
-actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean
--
--deleted --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 321
No.
18
19
name of parameter
13
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
14
ResSM
Entr. malfunction catch
15
SM
Fan malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
17
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
Z
Z- influence
Zw
Forced control
20
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
21
reg
Begin Control
22
stBAK
Status BAK Fan
23
tBAK
Delay BAK
24
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point multistate
min max
---
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
2147483647
3
init
deleted deleted deleted
0
0
0
unit
--
--
--
-s set point multistate
--
--
3
--
0
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On value,text
9,Auto
0,Off
1,On
-actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value boolean
--
--
0
--
--
--
2147483647
--
0
0
30
0
--
-s
--
Function description cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the fan is to be switched on the "cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational cover open" = 1 if this input is wired. Then "fan on" is set to 1 and - if connected - the plant waits for "fan operating message" = 1. Only then is "request
control" set to 1.
For "operational message cover open" this does not include a command execution check as "request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 322
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the fan can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the fan operating message is not switched the control output "fan on" is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
An important note:
How does "malfunction blocked" work?
The "malfunction blocked" parameter can be set to yes or no. If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs.
The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM (Reset malfunction message).
Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message. Here a link creates a function.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
LOn
Control signal
BMLu
Operating message
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 323
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResBh
Reset operating hours
Bh
BhActive
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set operating hours activate
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message fan", Target operating status: "Fan ON", output: "Status command execution check":
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
LOn
Control signal from the object Bsz
BMLu tCEC
Acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
LOn stCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 324
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the "Fan ON" output.
1. not ("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. switches the outputs "request cover", "fan on" and "Burner on" off ("malfunction blocked" =
1)
If a malfunction sets the output "request cover" to off, this can only be reset by activating the
"unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
LOn
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(on/off), DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off), SM
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Highest
SM
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
AnfKl = 0, LOn = 0, reg = 0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 325
Priority Parameter / Value
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/On
lowest
Auto
Impact
AnfKl = 1
AnfKl = 0, LOn = 0, reg = 0
AnfKl = 1
Automatic operation, "request valve" = AnfAuto
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 326
4.3.3.19. H602 Fan 2 stage
Function summary
The "fan 2-stage" function block controls a two-stage fan or motor and supports:
cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Switching up and down the levels
Operating hours / limiting value for each level and for both levels together
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
An important note:
How does "malfunction blocked" work?
The "malfunction blocked" parameter can be set to yes or no. If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs.
The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM (Reset malfunction message).
Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message. Here a link creates a function.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
reg
Begin Control
2
3
AnfAuto1
Requ.Auto St.1
AnfAuto2
Requ.Auto St.2
4
5
6
7
AnfKl
Begin Flap
AnlVerz
Startup delay
BM1
Operating level 1
BM2
Operating level 2
8
9
BMKlAuf
BM Flap
Bh
Bh ges.
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point float
--
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
min max
---
--
--
--
init
0 deleted -deleted --
+infinity 0
--
--
--
0 deleted deleted
unit
--
-s
--
-deleted --
+infinity 0 h
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
10
BhAktiv
BHActive Y/N
11
BhGw
GW Operating
12
LEin1
Level 1
13
LEin2
Level 2
14
DBE
DBE
15
Hand
Manual switching status
16
Rep
Rep.switch
17
ResBh
ResBh
18
ResSM
ResSM
19
Z
Z- influence
20
BhGw1
GW 1 Operating
21
BhGw2
GW 2 Operating
22
SM1
SM Level 1
23
SM2
SM Level 2
24
StSperr
SM blocked
25
tv12
Time Hrs.1-2
Objects 4.3. - 327 parameter typ
set point boolean set point float actual value boolean actual value boolean set point deletable boolean actual value multistate actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value multistate set point float set point float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point float
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
--
--
--
0
--
min max
---
+infinity
--
init
0
2000
0
--
--
0 deleted
unit
-h
--
--
--
4 0 value,text
9,Auto
1,Level 1
2,Level 2
0,OFF deleted ---
-deleted -deleted ---
4 0
+infinity 2000
+infinity 2000
-h deleted -value,text
9,Auto
1,Level 1
2,Level 2
0,OFF h
--
--
+infinity 30 deleted --
0 -s
Version 05/06
Software structure
No.
name of parameter
26
tv21
Time Hrs.2-1
27
ResBh1
ResBh1
28
ResBh2
ResBh2
29
VzBAk1
VzBAk1
30
VzBAk2
VzBAk2
31
tBAK1
tBAK1
32
tBAK2
tBAK2
33
Zw
Forced
34
Bh1
Bh Level 1
35
Bh2
Bh Level 2
36
gBh
GW Bh
37
gBh1
GW Bh1
38
gBh2
gBh2
39
stBAK1
BAK St.1
40
stBAK2
BAK.St.1
41
SMout
SMout
Objects 4.3. - 328 parameter typ
set point float set point deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point float set point float set point deletable float set point float actual value multistate set point float set point float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
0
0
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
min max
0 +infinity
init
30
--
-deleted deleted
--
--
unit
s
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
0
0
30
30 s s s s
4
--
--
--
--
0
+infinity 0
+infinity 0
--
0
0
0
0 -deleted --
--
-h
-value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,Level 1
2,Level 2 h
-0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 329
Function description cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the fan is to be switched on the "cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational cover open" = 1 if this input is wired.
Then "fan on level 1" is set to 1 and - if connected - the plant waits for "fan operating message" =
1. Only then is "request control" set to 1.
If fan level should start the process described takes place for level 2.
"Request control" open is set to 1 when "fan on level 1" or "fan on level 2" is switched on and the operating messages. "Request control" also remains when switching between the levels. If the plant switches from level 1 to level 2 the plant waits for "VzBAk2". If the operating message for level
2 is not yet available the "request control" is set to "0" again.
If the output "Fan ON level 2" is active the output "Fan ON level 1" is blocked (mutual locking).
This HWO does not work with fans that have to be switched to both level 1 and level 2 at the same time.
For "operational message cover open" this does not include a command execution check as "request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Switching up and down the levels
Level 2 is always switched on with a time delay ("switching up delay") via level 1, i.e. level 1 must run for a "Switching up delay time" before level 2 is switched on. This is independent of "warm-up
delay automatic level 1".
If the request for level 2 is placed when level 1 has already been active longer than "Switching up
delay" level 2 is activated immediately ("Switching up delay" is to be viewed as a minimum time for level 1).
Switching back from level 2 to level 1 occurs via an off phase for the "switching down" period.
Switching up and down the levels does not work in non-automatic modes, i.e. for Z, manual and forced.
When switching back from level 2 to level 1 the "request control" stays set to 1 even within the "switching down time".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 330
Switching delays
The fan can be switched on in automatic mode with a delay for each level.
If AnfAuto1 is activated the plant first waits for "warm-up delay automatic level 1" before the warm-up phase starts. Then comes:
"Request cover"
"Operational message cover open"
"Fan on level 1".
If level AnfAuto2 is activated in ongoing operation the plant first waits until the "switching up delay" has ended for level 1 and only then switches on "fan on level 2".
If in the off status AnfAuto2 is activated first the plant first waits for "warm-up delay automatic level
1" before the warm-up phase starts. Then comes:
"Request cover"
"Operational message cover open"
"Fan on level 1".
"Switching up delay" and
"Fan on level 2".
"warm-up delay automatic level 1" is only considered in automatic operation.
Operating hours / limiting value
The fan's operating hours can be counted for each level individually and also for both levels together; the operating counters can be preset and given a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the inputs of the fan fan operating messages are not connected, the corresponding control output "fan on level 1" or "fan on level" are used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
Command execution check
The function block contains command execution checks for both levels (refer to command execution check chapter for description and parameters) for the
Actual operational statuses: "operating message fan level 1 or 2"
Target operational statuses: "fan ON level 1 or 2"
Outputs: "Status command execution check level 1 or 2"
If the actual operating statuses are not switched, no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC level 1 or 2).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 331
HWO parameter
LOn1 or LOn2
BM1 or BM2 corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz
Acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC1 or tCEC2
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC1 or VzCEC2
Alarm delay time VzCEC
LOn1 or LOn2
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC1 or stCEC2
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
If a malfunction occurs for "malfunction locking" = 1 the fan is switched off completely.
A malfunction that occurs SM1 or SM2 or stCEC1 or stCEC2 may influence the control of the outputs
"Fan 1 ON level 1" and "Fan ON level 2" as follows:
1. not ("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. switches the outputs "request cover", "fan on level 1", "fan on level 2" and "request
control" off immediately and completely.
("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If the malfunction switches off the outputs "Fan ON level 1", and "Fan ON level 2" this can only be reset by activating the "release malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 332
HWO parameter
ResSM
SM1 and SM2 stCEC1 and stCEC2
StLock
LOn1 and LOn2 corresponding general operating hour parameter
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
Z(Off/Level 1/Level 2), DOL, Manual(Off/Level 1/Level 2), Zw(Off/Level 1/Level 2), Rep, SM
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest SM
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep LOn1 = 0, LOn2 = 0
Manual/Level 2, Zw/Level 2
LOn1 = 0, LOn2 = 1
Manual/Level 1, Zw/Level 1
LOn1 = 1, LOn2 = 0
Z/closed, DOL
Z/Level 2
Z/Level 1
lowest
Auto
LOn1 = 0, LOn2 = 0
LOn1 = 0, LOn2 = 1
LOn1 = 1, LOn2 = 0
Automatic operation
If "request automatic operation level 1" and "request automatic
operation level 2" are in place level 2 is activated taking
"switching up delay" into account.
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 333
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 334
4.3.3.21. H604 fan constant FC/bypass
Function summary
The "fan constant" function block controls a fan or motor with an optional bypass switch as per a set point Ytarget and supports:
cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
3
AnfKl
Begin Flap
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
4
5
BM
Re: fan message
BMFu
Re: message FU
6
7
BMKlAuf
Re: flap OPEN message
Bh
Operating hours
8
9
BhAktiv
Re: Activate oper.hrs. counting
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
10
ByAktiv
Bypass activation
11
DBE
Direct operating level active
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer set point boolean actual value deletable boolean
min max
---
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
2147483647
--
--
--
2147483647
--
2147483647
--
--
init
deleted
0
0 deleted deleted deleted
0
0
0
0 deleted
unit
--
-s
--
--
-h
-h
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 335
No. name of parameter
12
Hand
Manual switch
13
LuBy
Fan bypass ON
14
LuFu
Fan FU ON
15
RMAna
Setting feedback FU
16
Rep
Repare switch
17
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
18
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
19
RzByFu
Switch-back time bypass FU
20
SM
Fan malf.
21
SMFu
Malfunction FU
22
StFuBy
Malf. FU requires bypass
23
StFuSper
Malf. FU blocked
24
StSperr
Malf. fan blocked
25
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
26
VzBAKFu
stBAKFu delayed
27
Y
FU Drive analog
28
Ysoll
Fan setpoint
parameter typ
set point multistate
min max
-4
init
0 actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean set point integer set point integer actual value integer set point integer
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
100
--
--
--
120
--
--
--
--
--
100
100
0
0 deleted deleted deleted deleted
30 deleted deleted
0
0
0
2147483647 0
2147483647 0
0
0
--
%
--
--
-s
--
--
--
--
-s s
%
%
unit
value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
21,FU_ON
31,BY_ON
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 336
No. name of parameter
29
Z
Z- influence
30
Zs
Setp. fan Z-influence
31
Zw
Forced control
32
ZwSw
Setp. forced control analog
33
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
34
reg
Begin Control
35
stBAK
Status BAK Fan
36
stBAKFu
Status BAK FU
37
tBAK
Time stBAK
38
tBAKFu
Time stBAKFu
39
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point multistate set point integer set point multistate set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
min max
--
0
--
4
100
3
0
--
--
--
100
--
--
--
--
0
-0
2147483647 30
0
--
2147483647 30
-0
0
0
0
0
0
0
init
0 s s
--
--
--
--
--
unit
value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
21,FU_ON
31,BY_ON
% value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON
%
Function description
Bypass
The optional bypass branch secures fan operation; if a frequency converter malfunction occurs the fan runs without control in this case. The outputs "fan FC ON" and "fan bypass ON" are never active at the same time.
The bypass function is switched on or off with parameter ByAktiv.A source can be linked and used to consciously switch the bypass on.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 337 cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the fan is to be switched on the "cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational cover open" = 1 if this input is wired. Then "Fan on" (or if nec. "fan bypass on") is set to 1 and - if connected - the plant waits for "operating message fan"
= 1. Only then is "request control" set to 1.
!!! For "operational message cover open" this does not include a command execution check as
"request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
The transfer from bypass to FC operation can be equipped with a delay: RzByFu, this delay only works in automatic operation.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the fan can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the fan operating message is not switched the fan output is used for counting. Operating hours are counted in bypass and FC operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 338
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
LuFu or LuBy
Control signal
BM
ResBh
Bh
Operating message
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours
BhActive
BhGw
Bh gBh
activate
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
Command execution checks (refer to command execution check section for description and parameters) exist for
Target operational status: "Fan operating message"
Target operational status: ("Fan FC ON" || "Fan Bypass ON")
Output: "Status Command execution check fan"
Target operational status: "FC operating message"
Target operational status: "Request FC control"
Output: "Status FC command execution check"
If the actual operating statuses are not switched, no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCECorstCECFu).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
LuFu and LuBy
Control signal from the object Bsz
BM
Acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 339
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter tCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
LuFu and LuBy
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
Malfunction messages that occurSM and SMFu or stCEC and stCECFu may affect the operation of the switching outputs.
1. not at all("malfunction blocked" = 0)
2. if the relevant outputs are switched off or changed ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If parameter "malfunction fan blocked" is set any malfunction must switch off outputs "request
cover", "fan FC ON", "fan bypass ON" and "request control".
If the parameter "malfunction FC blocked" is set the output "Fan FC ON" is switched off.
If the parameter "malfunction FC requires bypass" is set the output "fan bypass ON" is activated when the automatic functions require the fan. In manual operation there is no automatic malfunction switch to bypass mode.
If a malfunction sets the output "fan FC ON" to off or bypass operation is activated, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 340
HWO parameter
ResSM
SM and SMFu stCEC and stCECFu corresponding general operating hour parameter
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Malfunction blocked
AnfKl, LuFu, LuBy, reg
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(off/Fu on/bypass on) and Zs, DOL, Rep, Manual(off/Fu on/bypass on), Zw(off/on) and ZwSw, Rep, SM and SMFu
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Impact
LuFu = 0, LuBy = 0
SM, SMFu Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/Fu On, Z/FC On, Zw/On LuFu = 1, LuBy = 0
Zw/On: if no malfunction FC (SMFu): LuFu = 1, LuBy = 0 otherwise LuFu = 0, LuBy = 1
ZwSw vs. Zs: if Zw/On and Z/FC On are active, ZwSw is used as Y
Manual/Bypass on
DOL, Z/closed
LuFu = 0, LuBy = 1
LuFu = 0, LuBy = 0
Z/Bypass on
lowest
AnfAuto
LuFu = 0, LuBy = 1 if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 341
4.3.3.22. H611 Valve open/closed
Function summary
The "valve open/closed" function block controls a valve that can be opened or closed and considers a valve run time.
The function block supports:
Final position replication
Command execution check
Valve blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
4
6
Yr
Sevo feedback valve
Y
Valve actuation
9
DBE
Direct operating level active
10
Hand
Manual influence
14
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
17
VzBAK
StBAK delayed
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean
--
min max
--
-actual value deletable boolean
-actual value deletable boolean
--actual value deletable float
0 set point boolean
-actual value deletable boolean
-set point multistate
--
130
--
--
3
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted %
0 -deleted -actual value deletable boolean
--
-set point boolean set point integer
0
--
-0
2147483647 0
0 value,text
9,Manual Auto
1,Manual OPEN
0,Manual SHUT deleted --
-s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 342
No. name of parameter
18
Z
Z- influence
19
Zw
Forced control
parameter typ
set point multistate set point multistate
21
StzVBS
Start time blocking prot.
22
LzVBS
Run time blocking prot.
24
vbs
Blocking prot. active
25
stBAK
Status Bak
26
tBAK
TimeBAK
27
tMot
Motor runtime
30
Stell
Setting (OPEN,SHUT,Running) set point float set point float actual value boolean actual value boolean set point float set point integer actual value multistate
min max
--
--
--
3
3
--
init
0
0
0 1440 720
0
--
--
0
1440
--
--
+infinity
0
30
5
0
1 2147483647 120
-3 1
0
unit
value,text
9,Z-Auto
1,Z OPEN
0,Z SHUT value,text
9,Forced Auto
1,Forced OPEN
0,Forced SHUT min
-s min
-s value,text
1,OPEN
0,SHUT
24,Running
-31
SMout
SMout actual value boolean
Final position replication
The "final position open", "final position closed" and "position feedback signal valve" inputs can be wired if required.
If the "position feedback signal valve" is wired, but not the"final position open" and "final
position closed", both final positions are determined via the "position feedback signal valve". If
"position feedback signal valve" < 3 % a "closed" final position is assumed, if "position feedback
signal valve" > 97 % an "open" final position is assumed, otherwise "running".
If the plant in addition to "position feedback signal valve"is also wired for "final position open" or
"final position open" these inputs have higher priority.
If only one of the "final position open" or "final position closed" is switched but not "position
feedback signal valve", the final position that is not switched is determined via the "motor
operating time".
If e.g. only "final position closed" is switched after an "open" control the "Setting" output is first set to "running" and after the end of the "Motor operating time" set to "open".
If both "final position open" and "final position closed" are not switched the final position
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 343
replication occurs in the same way for both final positions but a command execution check is not however effective.
Valve blocking protection
The function block includes the "valve block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzVBS operating time this function does not work. The valve blocking protection opens the valve if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time. At this time the vbs output is set to 1.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters) for the actual operating status "Setting" that is formed as described above.
The target operating status is "control valve"; the output is "Status command execution check".
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Y
Yr
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Y stCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No input "Valve malfunction" (SM).
4.3. - 344
An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the "control valve" output a) not ("Fault blocked" = 0) b) the output "Control valve" switched to "closed" ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "control valve" to "closed" this can only be reset by activating the
"unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Y
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Control valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
AnfAuto(open/closed), Z(open/closed), DOL, Manual(open/closed), Zw(open/closed), stCEC
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
StCEC
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/Closed, Zw/Closed
Control valve: "closed"
Manual/open, Zw/open
Control valve: "open"
Z/closed, DOL
Control valve: "closed"
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 345
Priority Parameter / Value
Z/open
lowest
Auto
Action
Control valve: "open"
Automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.23. H612 Valve bus drive
Function summary
The "valve bus" function block controls a constant valve with target setting of 0..100%.
The function block supports:
Inverting position feedback signal
Valve blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
Ysoll
Setp. valve automatic
4
5
6
7
Yr
Sevo feedback valve
Yist
Position display
Y
Setp. setting of valve
YrInv
Inverted servo feedback
9
DBE
Direct operating level active
10
Hand
Manual influence
12
Rep
Rep.switch
14
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
15
SM
Valve malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value deletable float actual value float actual value float set point deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable integer set point deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
100
100
100
100
--
--
100
--
--
--
-deleted
0 deleted
0
0 deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
0
--
%
%
%
%
--
--
%
--
--
--
--
4.3. - 346
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 347
No.
name of parameter
18
Z
Z- influence
19
Zw
Forced control
20
ZwSw
Setpoint forced control
21
StzVBS
VBS Start time
22
LzVBS
VBS run time
23
YVBS
Setp. valve blocking prot.
24
vbs
Blocking prot. active
25
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point deletable integer set point deletable boolean set point integer actual value integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
0
--
0
0
--
--
0
min max init
0 100 deleted
unit
%
--
100 deleted
100
--
%
1440
1440
100
--
--
720
5
0
0
0
%
-min min
--
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
valve" input is occupied.
!! If "position feedback signal inverted" is activated, the inverted value (100-Yr) is indicated by
"position feedback signal valve".
If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position valve" is used. This may come from "Target valve position in automatic operation", "Z influence", "set point forced
control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Valve blocking protection
The function block includes the "valve block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzVBS operating time this function does not work. The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time. At this time the vbs output is set to 1. (If this function works in HWO, the VBS function programmed in
MC200BUS does not start as the valve is moved within 24 hr.)
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 348
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve".
The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Y, Z, DOL, Rep, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Rep
Zw
Manual
Y = 0%, valve may be set manually
Y = ZwSw
Y = Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 349
4.3.3.24. H613 Valve 3-point
Function summary
The function block supports:
Idle zone
Valve blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
The "3-point valve" function block controls a 3-point valve using an analog signal (0...100%). If the value of the Y output is to be increased an OPEN pulse is created. If the Y signal is to be reduced, a
CLOSE pulse is created. Independent of a set idle zone above 97% an ongoing OPEN signal and under 3% an ongoing CLOSE signal is issued.
The length of the OPEN and CLOSE pulses is calculated from the value of the change in the Y output and the motor operating timestMotAuf or tMotZu. The hardware object can be used for 3-point actuators with and without position feedback signal. If no position feedback signal is available the input values "final position open" or "final position CLOSED" are analyzed for the synchronization.
When the final positions are reached (for entered sources for open and close final positions) the drive moves to "stop" until it receives a command in the opposite direction < 97% or > 3%.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
Ysoll
Setp. valve automatic
4
5
6
7
8
9
Yr
Sevo feedback valve
Yist
Position display
Y
Setp. setting of valve
YAuf
OPEN Impulse
YZu
CLOSED Impulse
DBE
Forced control
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value deletable float actual value float actual value float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean
--
--
--
0
0
0
--
0
min max
---
--
100
100
100
100
--
--
--
init unit
deleted -deleted --
0 % deleted %
0
0
%
%
0
0 deleted --
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 350
No.
name of parameter
10
Hand
Manual influence
11
Tot
Signal change deadzone
12
tMotAuf
Motor runtime OPEN
13
tMotZu
Motor runtime CLOSED
14
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
15
SM
Valve malf.
16
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
18
Z
Z-Influence
19
Zw
Forced control
20
ZwSw
Setpoint forced control
21
StzVBS
Start time blocking prot.
22
LzVBS
Run time blocking prot.
23
YVBS
Setp. valve blocking prot.
24
vbs
Blocking prot. active
25
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point deletable integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point deletable integer set point deletable boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
1
--
0
1
min max
0 100
50
2147483647
init
0
120
unit
deleted %
% s
2147483647
--
--
--
120 deleted -deleted
0 s
--
--
100
--
100
1440
2147483647 5 deleted % deleted --
100
720
% min min
% 100
--
100
0
-0
--
--
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
valve" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
valve" is used. This may come from "Target valve position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 351
Idle zone
If the "position feedback signal valve" is not switched on the "idle zone" only works on control signal changes if the control signal (Ytarget) changes by a higher amount than the idle zone set. If
"position feedback signal valve" is switched the idle zone works on the difference between the control signal and the position feedback signal (Yr). I.e. if the difference reaches a higher amount than the idle zone set, signal changes are issued.
Valve blocking protection
The function block includes the "valve block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzVBS operating time this function does not work. The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time. At this time the vbs output is set to 1.
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
Y
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 352
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
Zw
Manual
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Y = ZwSw
Y = Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.25. H614 Valve constant
Function summary
The "valve constant" function block controls a constant valve with target setting of 0..100%.
The function block supports:
Valve blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
Ysoll
Yset
4
5
6
9
Yr
Servo back fan
Yist
Setting no.
Y
Setp. valve
DBE
DBE Status
10
Hand
Manual influence
14
ResSM
Enter malf. msg
15
SM
Valve malf.
16
StSperr
StLock
18
Z
Z- influence
19
Zw
Forced control
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value float actual value deletable float actual value float actual value float actual value deletable boolean set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point deletable integer actual value deletable boolean
min max
---
--
0
0
0
0
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
100
100
100
100
--
100
--
--
--
100
-deleted % deleted -deleted --
0 -deleted % deleted --
init unit
deleted -deleted --
0 % deleted %
0 %
0 % deleted --
4.3. - 353
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 354
No.
name of parameter
20
ZwSw
Force setpoint
21
StzVBS
Starttime.Blocksw
22
LzVBS
Run time Blockshu
23
YVBS
Setp. fan.block
24
vbs
Blocking prot. Status
25
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
0
0
min max
0 100
1440
init
100
720
2147483647 5
0
--
100
--
---
0
0
0
%
--
--
unit
% min min
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
valve" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
valve" is used. This may come from "Target valve position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Valve blocking protection
The function block includes the "valve block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzVBS operating time this function does not work. The valve blocking protection moves the valve to the stipulated target position YVBS if it is in automatic mode and is not open at the relevant time. At this time the vbs output is set to 1.
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 355
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM
StLock
Y
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Zw
Y = ZwSw
Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = Manual
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 356
4.3.3.26. H701 Burner single stage
Function summary
The "burner single stage" function block controls a single-stage burner and supports: pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Chimney sweep function
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
3
AnfBrEin
Begin Burner ON
AnfPK
Begin Pump / Flap
4
5
6
7
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
BMBr
on burner message
BMPuKl
on pump/flap message
Bh
Operating hours
8
9
BhAktiv
Oper.hrs. of activation
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
10
BrEin
Burner ON
11
DBE
Direct operating level active
12
Hand
Manual switch
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
---
--
--
0
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
2147483647
--
--
2147483647
--
2147483647
--
--
3
init
0
0 deleted -deleted --
0
0
0
0 deleted --
0
unit
deleted -deleted --
-s h
-h
-value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 357
No. name of parameter
13
Rep
Repare switch
14
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
15
ResSM
release malf. self-holding
16
SF
Chimneysweep function
17
SFZeit
Continuous chimneysweep function
18
SFaktiv
Chimneysweep function is active
19
SM
Burner malfunction
20
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
21
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
22
Z
Z- influence
23
24
25
26
27
28
Zw
Forced control
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
reg
Begin Control
stBAK
Status BAK Burner
tBAK
Time BAK
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean actual value integer set point multistate
min max
---
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
300
--
--
--
2147483647
3
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted --
30
0
0
0
0 min
-deleted --
-s set point multistate
--
--
3
--
0
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON
-actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value boolean
--
--
0
--
--
--
2147483647
--
0
0
30
0
--
-s
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 358 pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the burner is to be switched on the "pump/cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational message pump/cover" = 1 if this input is wired.
At the same time as "request pump/cover" the "request control" is set to 1. This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat. If then the signal "request burner on" is set to 1 by the control and "operational message pump / cover"
=1, the burner is switched on ("burner on"=1).
For "operational message pump/cover" this does not include a command execution check as
"request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "pump" or "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Chimney sweep function
The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the"chimney sweep function time span" if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on.
If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the "chimney sweep function time span", even if the "request automatic operation" is set to
0 in this time.
When the chimney sweep function is activated the "chimney sweep function active" parameter is set to 1.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the burner can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output "burner on" is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 359
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
BrOn
BMBr
Control signal
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
The Auto request must always be switched on.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message burner", Target operating status: "Burner on", output: "Status command execution check":
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 360
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
BrOn
Control signal from the object Bsz
BMbr tCEC
acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
Y stCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) switches the outputs "request pump / cover", "request control" and "burner on" off
("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the outputs to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 361
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
AnfPK reg
BrOn
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(on/off), DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off), SM
Parameter / Value
Highest priority
SM
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"== 0
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"== 0
Z/On, chimney sweeping function "Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 362
Parameter / Value
Auto
Lowest priority
Impact
Automatic operation, "request pump / cover" = AnfAuto
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.27. H702 Burner 2 stage
Function summary
The "burner 2 stage" function block controls a two-stage burner and supports: pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Chimney sweep function
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
AnfBr1
Begin Burner level 1 ON
3
AnfBr2
Begin Burner level 2 ON
4
5
6
AnfPK
Begin Pump / Flap
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
BMBr1
Oper. msg burner level 1
7
BMBr2
Oper. msg burner level 2
8
BMPuKl
Oper. msg pump/flap
9
Bh
Operating hours
10
BhAktiv
Re: Activate oper.hrs. counting
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean
min max
---
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
init
2147483647 0
unit
deleted --
2147483647 0
--
--
--
-deleted -deleted --
0 deleted -deleted -deleted --
0
-s h
--
4.3. - 363
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 364
No. name of parameter
11
BhGw
14
15
Oper.hrs. limit value
12
Br1Ein
Burner level 1 ON
13
Br2Ein
Burner level 2 ON
DBE
Direct operating level active
Hand
Manual switch
16
17
18
19
Rep
Repare switch
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
ResSM
Unlock Malfunction catch
SF
Chimneysweep function
20
SFZeit
Continuous chimneysweep function set point integer
21
SFaktiv
Chimneysweep function is active
22
SM1
Malf. burner level 1 actual value boolean
23
SM2
Malf. burner level 2 actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
24
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
25
Verz12
Delay level 1 - level 2 set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean
parameter typ
set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
0
init
2147483647 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
4
--
--
--
--
300
--
--
--
--
0
0
30
0
0
2147483647 0
unit
h
--
-deleted --
0 value,text
9,Manual Auto
0,Manual OFF
1,Manual level 1
2,Manual level 2 deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted -min
-deleted -deleted --
-min
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 365
No. name of parameter
26
VzBAK
stBAK1 or stBAK2 delayed
27
Z
Z- influence
28
Zw
Forced control
29
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
30
reg
Begin Control
31
stBAK1
Status BAK burner level 1
32
stBAK2
Status BAK burner level 2
33
tBAK
Time BAK
34
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer set point multistate
min max
0
init
2147483647 0
-4 0 set point multistate actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value boolean
--
--
--
--
--
4
--
--
--
--
0
0 2147483647 30
--0
0
0
0
0
-s
--
--
--
unit
s value,text
9,Z-Auto
0,Z Manual OFF
1,Z-Level 1
2,Z/Level 2 value,text
9,Zw Auto
0,Zw OFF
1,Zw Level 1
2,Zw Level 2
--
Function description
The Auto request must always be switched on.
Burner level 2 always follows burner level 1, burner level 2 is never activated without burner level 1.
A "request burner level 2 on" before a "request burner level 1 on" first activates burner level 1.
The plant delay "Verz12" is only included in automatic operation. In all other cases level 2 is switched immediately.
Pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the burner is to be switched on the "pump/cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational message pump/cover" = 1 if this input is wired.
At the same time as "request pump/cover" the "request control" is set to 1. This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat. If then the signal "request burner level 1 on" is set to 1 by the control and "operational message pump /
cover" =1, the burner 1 is switched on ("burner level 1 on"=1).
For "operational message pump/cover" this does not include a command execution check as
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 366
"request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "pump" or "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Chimney sweep function
The chimney sweep function switches on burner level 1 and 2 for the "chimney sweep function
time span" when the burner is automatic mode.
If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the "chimney sweep function time span", even if the "request automatic operation" is set to
0 in this time.
When the chimney sweep function is activated the "chimney sweep function active" parameter is set to 1.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of burner level 1 can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output "burner 1 on" is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
Br1On
Control signal
BMBr
Operating message
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 367
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResBh
Reset operating hours
Bh
BhActive
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set operating hours activate
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
In automatic mode burner level 2 is only activated after a minimum time at level 1 ("Delay Level 1 ->
Level 2").
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status for both burner levels: "Operating
message burner 2 or 2", Target operating status: "Burner 1 or 2 on", output: "Status command
execution check 1 or 2".
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled.
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Br1On or Br2On
Control signal from the object Bsz
BMBr1 or BMBr2
acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 368
HWO parameter
VzCEC corresponding general CEC parameter
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Br1On and Br2On
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC1 or stCEC2
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM1 and SM2 or stCEC1 and stCEC2 may affect the output control.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) switches the outputs "request pump / cover", "request control" and "Burner 1 on" and
("Burner 2 on".
("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the outputs to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter
ResSM
SM1 and SM2 stCEC1 and stCEC2
StLock
AnfPK reg
Br1On
Br2On corresponding general operating hour parameter
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 369
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(Off/Level 1/Level 2), DOL, Manual(Off/Level 1/Level 2), Zw(Off/Level 1/Level 2), SM1 and SM2
Parameter / Value
Highest priority
SM1, SM2
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Manual/Level 2, Zw/Level 2
Manual/Level 1, Zw/Level 1
Z/closed, DOL
Z/Level 2, chimney sweeping function
Z/Level 1
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner level 1 on"= 0
"Burner level 2 on"= 0
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
If nec activate burner level 1 and level 2 (without Delay12)
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. activate burner level 1
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner level 1 on"= 0
"Burner level 2 on"= 0
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
Activate burner level 1 and level 2 (without Delay12)
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. activate burner level 1
Automatic operation, "request pump / cover" = AnfAuto
Auto
Lowest priority
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 370
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 371
4.3.3.28. H703 Burner modulating 3 point
Function summary
The "burner modulating" function block controls a modulating burner using 3-point control
The implementation of the analog setting signal (0..100 %) in the 3-point control is described at "3point valve".
The inputs "final position open" and "final position closed" are not available in the "burner modulating" function block, therefore there is no synchronization using these final positions.
The function block supports:
pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Chimney sweep function
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
2
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
AnfBrEin
Begin Burner ON
3
4
AnfPK
Begin Pump / Flap
AnlVerz
Startup delay of the automatic
5
6
7
8
BMBr
Burner plant message
BMPuKl
Operation pump(s)/flaps
Bh
Operating hours
BhAktiv
Oper.hrs. of activation
9
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
10
BrEin
Burner ON
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value boolean
min max
---
--
--
0
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
2147483647
--
--
2147483647
--
2147483647
--
init
deleted deleted
0
0 deleted deleted
0
0
2000
0
unit
--
--
-s
--
-h
-h
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 372
No.
name of parameter
11
DBE
Direct operating level active
12
Hand
Manual influence
13
Rep
Repair switch
14
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
15
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
16
SF
Chimneysweep function
17
SFZeit
Continuous chimneysweep function
18
SFaktiv
Cimneysweep function is active
19
SM
Burner malfunction
20
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
21
Tot
Signal change deadzone
22
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
23
Y
Burner setp. setting
24
YAuf
OPEN Impulse
25
YZu
CLOSED Impulse
26
Yist
Position display
27
Yr
Burner setting feedback
28
Ysoll
Setp burner automatic
29
Z
Z- influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point integer actual value float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value float actual value deletable float set point float set point deletable float
min max
---
0
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
0
0
0
0
100
--
--
--
--
300
--
--
--
50
2147483647
100
--
--
100
100
100
100
init
deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
30
0 deleted
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 deleted
0 deleted
unit
--
%
--
--
--
-min
--
--
--
% s
%
--
--
%
%
%
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 373
No.
name of parameter
30
Zw
Forced control
31
ZwSw
Setp. valve forced control
32
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
33
reg
Begin Control
34
stBAK
Status BAK Burner
35
tBAK
Time BAK
36
tMotAuf
Motor runtime OPEN
37
tMotZu
Motor runtime CLOSED
38
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point deletable boolean set point deletable float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
min
--
0
max
--
100
---
--0
0 ---
0
1
2147483647 30
2147483647 120
init unit
deleted -deleted %
0 --
--
-s s
1
--
2147483647 120
-0 s
--
Function description
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
burner" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
burner" is used. This may come from "Target burner position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the burner is to be switched on the "pump/cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational message pump/cover" = 1 if this input is wired.
At the same time as "request pump/cover" the "request control" is set to 1. This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat. If then the signal "request burner on" is set to 1 by the control and "operational message pump / cover"
=1, the burner is switched on ("burner on"=1).
For "operational message pump/cover" this does not include a command execution check as "request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "pump" or "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 374
Chimney sweep function
The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the"chimney sweep function time span" if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on.
If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the "chimney sweep function time span", even if the "request automatic operation" is set to
0 in this time. Here the Y signal goes to 100%.
When the chimney sweep function is activated the "chimney sweep function active" parameter is set to 1.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the burner can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output "burner on" is used for counting.
Note: The parameter names of the operating hour counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
BrOn
BMBr
Control signal
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 375
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
BhGw
Set limiting value
Bh gBh
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message burner", Target operating status: "Burner on", output: "Status command execution check":
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter
BrOn
BMBr corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Br1On and Br2On
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC
CEC status stCEC
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 376
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) switches the outputs "request pump / cover", "request control" and "Burner on" off
("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the outputs to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
SM stCEC
StLock
AnfPK reg
BrOn
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and SwZw, SM
Parameter / Value
Highest priority
SM
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 377
Parameter / Value
Rep
Zw
Manual
DOL
Impact
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"= 0
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = SwZw
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = Manual
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"== 0
Z
Auto
Lowest priority
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
If nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = Z
Chimney sweep function
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
"Burner on"== 1
Y = 100%
Automatic operation, "request pump / cover" = AnfAuto
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 378
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 379
4.3.3.29. H704 Burner modulating
Function summary
The "burner modulating" function block controls a modulating burner and supports:
pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
Chimney sweep function
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic operation
2
3
AnfBrEin
Begin Burner ON
AnfPK
Begin Pump / Flap
4
5
AnlVerz
Startup delay of the automatic
BMBr
Burner plant message
6
7
BMPuKl
Plant message Pump/Flap
Bh
Operating hours
8
9
BhAktiv
Active opr. hours
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
10
BrEin
Burner ON
11
DBE
Direct operating level active
12
Hand
Manual influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable float
min max
---
--
--
0
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
0
--
--
2147483647
--
--
2147483647
--
2147483647
--
--
100
init
deleted deleted
0
0 deleted deleted
0
0
2000
0 deleted deleted
unit
--
--
-s
--
-h
-h
--
--
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 380
No.
name of parameter
13
Rep
Repare switch
14
ResBh
Reset opr. hours
15
ResSM
Unlock Malfunction catch
16
SF
Chimneysweep function
17
SFZeit
Continuous chimneysweep function
18
SFaktiv
Cimneysweep function is active
19
SM
Burner malfunction
20
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
21
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
22
Y
Burner setp. setting
23
Yist
Position display
24
Yr
Burner setting feedback
25
Ysoll
Setp burner automatic
26
Z
Z- influence
27
Zw
Forced control
28
ZwSw
Setp. valve forced control
29
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
30
reg
Begin Control ON
31
stBAK
Status BAK Burner
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer actual value float actual value float set point deletable float set point float set point deletable float set point deletable boolean set point deletable float actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean
min max
---
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
300
--
--
--
2147483647
100
100
100
100
100
--
100
--
--
--
init
deleted deleted deleted deleted
30
0 deleted
0
0
0
0 deleted
0 deleted deleted deleted
0
0
0
unit
--
--
--
-min
--
--
-s
%
%
%
%
%
--
%
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 381
No.
name of parameter
32
tBAK
Time BAK
33
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer actual value boolean
min max
0 2147483647
init
30
--0
unit
s
--
Function description
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
burner" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
burner" is used. This may come from "Target burner position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Pump and cover control during the warm-up phase / request for control
If the burner is to be switched on the "pump/cover request" is first set to 1.
Then there is a pause for the "operational message pump/cover" = 1 if this input is wired.
At the same time as "request pump/cover" the "request control" is set to 1. This signals the subsequent control beyond the hardware object that the burner is standing by to produce heat. If then the signal "request burner on" is set to 1 by the control and "operational message pump / cover"
=1, the burner is switched on ("burner on"=1).
For "operational message pump/cover" this does not include a command execution check as "request pump / cover" should always be linked to a "pump" or "cover" hardware object that contains its own command execution check.
Chimney sweep function
The chimney sweep function switches the burner on for the"chimney sweep function time span" if the burner is in automatic mode and is not already switched on.
If the burner is in automatic mode and already switched on the plant ensures that the burner stays on for the "chimney sweep function time span", even if the "request automatic operation" is set to
0 in this time. Here the Y signal goes to 100%.
When the chimney sweep function is activated the "chimney sweep function active" parameter is set to 1.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the burner can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the burner operating message is not switched the control output "burner on" is used for counting.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 382
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
BrOn
BMBr
Control signal
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching on the automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message burner", Target operating status: "Burner on", output: "Status command execution check":
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 383
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter
BrOn
BMBr tCEC
VzCEC corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Br1On and Br2On
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM or stCEC may not influence the control of outputs.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) switches the outputs "request pump / cover", "request control" and "Burner on" off
("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the outputs to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 384
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM stCEC
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
AnfPK reg
BrOn
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and SwZw, SM
Parameter / Value
Highest priority
SM
Rep
Impact
Zw
Manual
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"= 0
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = SwZw
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1 if nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = Manual
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 385
Parameter / Value
DOL
Impact
"Request pump / cover" = 0
"Request regulation" = 0
"Burner on"== 0
Z
Auto
Lowest priority
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
If nec. "Burner on"== 1
Y = Z
Chimney sweep function
"Request pump / cover" = 1
"Request regulation" = 1
"Burner on"== 1
Y = 100%
Automatic operation, "request pump / cover" = AnfAuto
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 386
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 387
4.3.3.30. H801 Volume flow regulator constant
Function summary
The "constant volume flow controller" function block controls a cover that can be opened or closed and considers a cover run time.
The function block supports:
Final position replication
Command execution check
Trouble-shooting
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
4
6
Yr
Servo back fan
Y
Actuation of fan
9
DBE
DBE Status
10
Hand
Manual influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
---
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
100
--
--
3
14
ResSM
Enter malf. msg
16
StSperr
StLock
17
VzBAK
StBAK delayed
18
Z
Z- influence actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point multistate
--
--
0
--
init unit
deleted -deleted -deleted -deleted %
0 -deleted --
--
-0
2147483647 0
0 value,text
9,Manual Auto
1,Manual OPEN
0,Manual SHUT deleted --
-s
3 0 value,text
9,Z-Auto
1,Z OPEN
0,Z SHUT
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 388
No.
name of parameter
19
Zw
Forced control
parameter typ
set point multistate
21
reg
Release.Reg. VVS
25
stBAK
Status BAK
26
tBAK
TimeBAK
27
tMot
Motor runtime
30
Stell
Setting actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer actual value multistate
min max
-3
init
0
-s
unit
value,text
9,Forced Auto
1,Forced OPEN
0,Forced SHUT
-s value,text
1,OPEN
0,SHUT
24,Running
Function description
A new output reg that visualizes the request for the volume flow regulator (AnfAuto) was added.
Final position replication
The "final position open", "final position closed" and "position feedback signal valve" inputs can be wired if required.
If the "position feedback signal valve" is wired, but not the"final position open" and "final
position closed", both final position are determined via the "position feedback signal valve". If
"position feedback signal valve" < 3% a "closed" final position is assumed, if "position feedback
signal valve" > 97% an "open" final position is assumed, otherwise "running".
If the plant in addition to "position feedback signal valve"is also wired for "final position open" or
"final position open" these inputs have higher priority.
If only one of the "final position open" or "final position closed" is switched but not "position
feedback signal valve", the final position that is not switched is determined via the "motor
operating time".
If e.g. only "final position closed" is switched after an "open" control the "Setting" output is first set to "running" and after the end of the "Motor operating time" set to "open".
If both "final position open" and "final position closed" are not switched the final positionreplication occurs in the same way for both final positions but a command execution check is not however effective.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
No input "Valve malfunction" (SM).
4.3. - 389
An adjoining command execution check may optionally influence the control of the "control valve" output a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) the output "Control valve" switches to "closed" ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "control valve" to "closed" this can only be reset by activating the
"unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM stCEC
StLock
Y
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check section for description and parameters) for the actual operating status "Setting" that is formed as described above.
The target operating status is "control valve"; the output is "Status command execution check".
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 390
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
Y
Yr
Control signal from the object Bsz
Acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Y stCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Control valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
AnfAuto(open/closed), Z(open/closed), DOL, Manual(open/closed), Zw(open/closed), stCEC
The statuses Z, manual, forced and that of the DOL are considered.
(Z-closed, Manual-closed, Zw-closed or DOL => reg = 0)
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest
stCEC
Action
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/Closed, Zw/Closed
Control valve: "closed"
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/open
lowest
Auto
Control valve: "open"
Control valve: "closed"
Control valve: "open"
Automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 391
4.3.3.31. H802 Volume flow regulator constant
Function summary
The "volume flow regulator constant" function block controls a constant cover with target setting of
0...100%.
The function block supports:
Trouble-shooting/malfunction catch
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Auf
End pos. OPEN
2
3
Zu
End pos. SHUT
Ysoll
Yset
4
5
6
7
Yr
Servo back fan
Yist
Setting no.
Y
Setp. valve
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
9
DBE
DBE Status
10
Hand
Manual influence
14
ResSM
Enter malf. msg
15
SM
Valve malf.
16
StSperr
StLock
18
Z
Z- influence
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point float actual value deletable float actual value float actual value deletable float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point deletable float actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point deletable integer
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
100
100
100
100
--
--
100
--
--
--
100 deleted
0 deleted
0 deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
0 deleted
--
%
%
%
%
--
--
%
--
--
--
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 392
No.
name of parameter
19
Zw
Forced control
20
SwZw
Setpoint forced control
21
reg
Release.Reg. VVS
22
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
0
--
--
100
--
--
100
0
0
%
--
--
Function description
Parameter "AnfAuto" was added in which for example the "release control" for a PID control can be set. The corresponding output regVVS therefore produces a release for the VVS control. If a malfunction occurs this release is set to zero.
Position display
There is a "position display" output. This indicates this value if the "position feedback signal
valve" input is occupied. If this acknowledgement is not occupied the value of the "target position
valve" is used. This may come from "Target valve position in automatic operation", "Z
influence", "set point forced control" or "manual influence", i.e. from the input with the highest active priority.
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
A malfunction that occurs SM may not influence the control of outputY a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) sets the output Y to 0% ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output Y to 0% this can only be reset by activating the "Unlock malfunction
catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 393
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
ResSM
Release malfunction catch
SM
StLock
Y
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Switching priorities
The function block supplies an output signal "Target setting valve". The following input parameters influence the control of this output:
Ytarget, Z, DOL, Manual, Zw and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value Action
Highest
SM
See "effects of malfunctions on operating behavior" section.
Zw
Y = ZwSw
Manual
DOL
Z
lowest
Auto
Y = Manual
Y = 0%
Y = Z
Y = Ytarget
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 394
4.3.3.32. H901 Pump single stage
Function summary
The "pump single stage" function block controls a single-stage pump and supports:
Switching delays
Pump blocking protection
Operating hours / limiting value
Command execution check
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, direct operating level(DOL), manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Attention! "malfunction blocked"
An important note:
How does "malfunction blocked" work?
The "malfunction blocked" parameter can be set to yes or no. If a malfunction occurs either the output is switched off or the malfunction does not affect the outputs.
The malfunction catch is activated by linking a source on ResSM (Reset malfunction message).
Only in this case is it possible to reset a malfunction message. Here a link creates a function.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic
2
3
BM
Re: msg. Pu
pbs
Status blocking prot.
5
Hand
Manual
7
8
9
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
ResSM
Unlock Fault
reg
Begin Control
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean set point multistate set point boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min max
---
--
--
--
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
init unit
deleted -deleted --
0 --
0
0 deleted -value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON
--
0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 395
15
DBE
Dir. oper. level
16
BhGw
Total opr.hours
17
BhAktiv
BHActive Y/N
18
ResBh
Reset Operating
19
Pu
Pump ON
20
gBh
Limit value viol.
21
AnlVerz
Start delay Aut
22
tBAK
Time BAK
23
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
24
StzPBS
Block start time
25
LzPBS
Block run time
26
stBAK
Command Status
No.
name of parameter
10
Rep
Rep.switch
11
SM
Pump malfunction
12
PuNach
Pump coasting
13
Z
Z- influence
14
Zw
Forced control
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point multistate set point multistate set point deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
0
--
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
0
min max
---
--
--
120
3
-3
init unit
deleted -deleted --
0 min
0
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON deleted ---
--
--
2147483647 0
0 deleted -h
--
--
--
2147483647
2147483647
0
0
0
30
--
-s s
2147483647 0
2147483647 720
2147483647 0
-0 s min min
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 396
No.
name of parameter
27
Bh
Oper.hrs.
28
SMout
SMout
parameter typ
set point integer actual value boolean
min max
0 2147483647
init
0
--0
unit
h
--
Function description
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation ("Delay automatic start"). This can be used for example to avoid peak loads.
It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation ("Pump hunting").
Pump blocking protection
In order to avoid blocking the pump if it is inactive for longer periods of time this function can be used to run the pump once a day even if it is otherwise not required. "Start time block" corresponds to the minutes of the day calculated from midnight. "Run time block" is also stated in minutes.
If the value 0 is entered for the LzPBS operating time this function does not work.
The pump blocking protection switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time "Start
time block" and automatic operation is activated, "Status blocking protection" is set to 1 in this time.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 397
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the pump can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded the parameter "limiting value
infringement" is set. If the input for the pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting. When setting the "Reset operating hours" parameter the operating hour value is set to 0.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 398
Command execution check
If a "Pump operating message" is switched up the operating message status is checked for a switching command after the time tCEC. In cases of malfunction the "Status command execution
check" parameter is set. The malfunction is caught by itself. "Release malfunction catch" resets the "command execution check malfunction".
Target operational status: "Pump operating message"
Target operational status: "Pump ON"
Output: "Status command execution check":
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 399
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the "Pump ON" output.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) the output "Pump ON" switches to "closed" ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "Pump ON" to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock
malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(on/off), DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off), Rep, SM
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest
SM
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 400
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep Pu = 0
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/On
lowest
AnfAuto
Pu = 1
Pu = 0
Pu = 1 if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Request regulation
If the pump (not as a result of the pump blocking protection pbs) is switched on (PU=1) and the operating message whose proper function is shown, the signal reg (request regulation) is set to 1.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 401
4.3.3.33. H903 Pump variable transformer
Function summary
The function block ("pump variable transformer" (also called "pump frequency converter" or "pump
FC") controls a rev-controlled pump with optional bypass switch as per a set point Ptarget. The function block supports:
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Pump blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic operation
2
3
4
5
6
7
Psoll
Pump setpoint
PuFu
Pump FU ON
PuBy
Pump Bypass ON
reg
Begin Control
Y
Setp. setting of FU
BM
Pump operation
8
SM
Pump fault
9
Rep
Repare switch
10
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer
min max
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
100
--
--
--
100
--
--
--
init unit
deleted --
0
0
0
0
0
%
--
--
--
% deleted -deleted -deleted --
2147483647 0 s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 402
No. name of parameter
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Hand
Manual switch (Autom./OFF/FU ON/Bpass
ON)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
BMFu
FU operation
Bh
Oper.hrs. presetting
BhAktiv
Oper.hrs.cnt. activation
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
ByAktiv
Bypass activation
DBE
Direct operating level active
LzPBS
Run time blocking prot.
PuNach
Pump coasting
RMAna
Servo feedback from the FU
ResBh
Reset oper. hours
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
RzByFu
Switch-back time bypass FU
SMFu
Malfunction FU
StFuBy
Malf. FU requires bypass set point integer set point integer actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value integer actual value deletable boolean set point boolean
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
--
init
2147483647 0
--
4 0
unit
deleted --
0
2147483647 0
--
--
0 h
-h
-deleted --
0 2147483647 0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
21,FU_ON
31,BY_ON min
0
0
--
--
0
--
--
120
100
--
--
120
--
--
0 deleted % deleted -deleted --
30 deleted --
0 min s
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No. name of parameter
26
StFuSper
Malf. FU blocked
27
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
28
StzPBS
Start time blocking prot.
29
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
30
VzBAKFu
stBAKFu delayed
31
Z
Z- influence
32
ZW
Forced control
33
Zs
Pump Z-influence setpoint
34
ZwSw
Setpoint forced control
35
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
36
pbs
Blocking prot. active
37
stBAK
Status pump command exe control
38
stBAKFu
Status FU command exe control
39
tBAK
Time BAK
40
tBAKFu
Time BAKFu
41
SMout
SMout
Objects 4.3. - 403 parameter typ
set point boolean set point boolean set point integer actual value integer set point integer set point multistate
min max
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
--
2147483647 720
2147483647 0
2147483647 0
4
init
0
0
0 set point multistate
-set point integer set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer set point integer actual value boolean
0
0
--
--
--
--
0
0
--
3
100
100
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2147483647 30
2147483647 30
0 s s
--
--
--
--
--
unit
--
-min s s value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
21,FU_ON
31,BY_ON value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON
%
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 404
Function description
Bypass
The optional bypass branch secures pump operation; if a frequency converter malfunction occurs the pump runs without control in this case. The outputs "Pump FC ON" and "Pump Bypass ON" are never active at the same time. The bypass function is switched on or off using the ByAktiv parameter.
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation ("Pump hunting").
The transfer from bypass to FC operation can be equipped with a delay: RzByFu, this delay only works in automatic operation.
Pump blocking protection
The function block includes the "pump block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzPBS operating time this function does not work. The pump blocking protection switches the FC mode Y on with a fixed set point of 10%. The pump blocking protection only switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time and automatic operation is activated, "Blocking protection
active" is set to 1 in this time.
The function block delivers an output signal "request control" that switches when the pump output and not the"Blocking protection active" is due.
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the pump can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting. Operating hours are counted in bypass and FC operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 405
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
PuFu or PuBy
BM
Control signal
Operating message
ResBh
Bh
BhActive
Reset operating hours
Set operating hours activate
BhGw
Bh gBh
Set limiting value
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
Command execution checks (refer to command execution check section for description and parameters) exist for
Target operational status: "Operating message pump", Target operating status: ("Pump FC ON" ||
"Pump Bypass ON"), output: "Status pump command execution check"
Target operational status: "Operating message FC", Target operating status: "Request FC
control", output: "Status FC command execution check"
If the actual operating statuses are not switched, no corresponding command execution check
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 406
malfunction is signaled (stCECorstCECFu).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter
PuFu or PuBy
BM
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
tCEC
VzCEC
Y stCEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
HWO parameter corresponding general CEC parameter reg
Control signal from the object Bsz
BMFu tCECFu
VzCECFu
PuFu stCECFu
acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 407
Malfunction messages that occur SM and SMFu or stCEC and stCECFu may affect the operation of the switching outputs.
a) not at all("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) if the relevant outputs are switched off or changed ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If the parameter "malfunction pump blocked" is set, a malfunction that occurs must switch off the outputs "Pump FC ON" and "Pump Bypass ON".
If the parameter "malfunction FC blocked" is set the output "Pump FC ON" is switched off.
If the parameter "malfunction FC requires bypass" is set the output "Pump bypass ON" is activated when the automatic functions require the pump. In manual operation there is no automatic malfunction switch to bypass mode.
If a malfunction sets the output "Pump FC ON" to off or bypass operation is activated, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
HWO parameter corresponding general operating hour parameter
SM, SMFu stCEC, stCECFu
Release malfunction catch
SM
Malfunction(s) occurring
StLock
PuFu, PuBy
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(off/Fu on/bypass on) and Zs, DOL, Rep, Manual(off/Fu on/bypass on), Zw(off/on) and ZwSw, Rep, SM and SMFu
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Impact
PuFu = 0, PuBy = 0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 408
Priority Parameter / Value
SM, SMFu
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/Fu On, Z/FC On, Zw/On PuFu = 1, PuBy = 0
Zw/On: if no malfunction FC (SMFu): PuFu = 1, PuBy = 0 otherwise PuFu = 0, PuBy = 1
ZwSw vs. Zs: if Zw/On and Z/FC On are active, ZwSw is used as Y
Manual/Bypass on
PuFu = 0, PuBy = 1
DOL, Z/closed
Z/Bypass on
lowest
AnfAuto
PuFu = 0, PuBy = 0
PuFu = 0, PuBy = 1 if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Manual influence
In this object "32 force control ZW" and "34 set point force control ZwSw" must be used for the manual influence.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 409
4.3.3.34. H904 Pump BUS
Function summary
The "pump bus" function block controls a rev-controlled bus pump with a set point Ptarget. The function block supports:
Minimum pump operation
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Pump blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic operation
2
3
5
6
7
Psoll
Pump setpoint
Pu
Pump ON
reg
Begin Control
Y
Pump setp. setting
BM
Pump operation
8
SM
Pump fault
9
AnfMin
Begin Minimum oper.
10
AnlVerz
Start delay Automatic
11
PuMinEin
Minimum Oper. ON
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean
min max
---
0
--
--
0
--
--
--
0
--
100
--
--
100
--
--
--
2147483647 0
--
init
0
0
0
0
0
unit
deleted --
%
--
--
% deleted -deleted -deleted -s
--
Version 05/06
Software structure
No. name of parameter
12
Bh
Operating hours
13
BhAktiv
Oper.hrs.cnt. activation
14
BhGw
Oper.hrs. limit value
16
DBE
Direct operating level active
17
Hand
Manual switch
18
LzPBS
Pump blocking prot. run time
19
PuNach
Pump coasting
20
RMAna
RM Setting FU
22
ResSM
Unlock malfunction catch
27
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
28
StzPBS
Start time blocking prot.
29
VzBAK
stBAK delayed
31
Z
Z- influence
32
ZW
Forced control
33
Zs
Spoint Z-influence
Objects 4.3. - 410
actual value deletable integer actual value deletable boolean set point boolean set point integer set point integer set point multistate
parameter typ
set point deletable integer
0
min max init unit
2147483647 deleted h
--0 -set point boolean set point integer
0 2147483647 0 h actual value deletable boolean
--deleted -set point multistate
-3 0
0 2147483647 0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON min actual value integer set point integer
0 120 0 min
0 100 deleted %
--
--
0
0
--
--
--
2147483647 0
2147483647 0
3 deleted --
0
0
-min s set point multistate set point integer
--
0
3
100
0
0 value,text
9,AUTO
0,Z-OFF
1,Z-ON value,text
9,AUTO
0,FORCED OFF
1,FORCED ON
%
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 411
No. name of parameter
34
ZwSw
Setpoint forced control
35
gBh
Limit value error by opr.hrs.
36
pbs
Blocking prot. active
parameter typ
actual value integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
37
stBAK
Status pump command exe control actual value boolean
39
tBAK
Time BAK
40
SMout
SMout set point integer actual value boolean
min max
0 100
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
--
init
0
0
0
0
2147483647 30
0
-s
--
--
--
unit
%
Function description
Minimum pump operation
If the pump is in automatic mode and the input AnfMin is activated the pump is operated in a pumpspecific minimum mode (usually minimal transport height ( "Minimal operation On" = On).
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation ("Pump hunting").
Pump blocking protection
The function block includes the "pump block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the
LzPBS operating time this function does not work. The pump blocking protection switches the pump on with a fixed set point Y of 10%. The pump blocking protection only switches the pump on if this is not running at the switch on time and automatic operation is activated, "Blocking protection active" is set to 1 in this time.
The function block delivers an output signal "request control" that switches when the pump output and not the"Blocking protection active" is due.
Operating hours / limiting value
The pump operating hours can be counted, the operating time counter can not be preset but rather is only adopted by the pump hardware. The operating hours counter can be occupied with a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 412
Note: The parameter names of the operating hours counter are different from those described in the
"Repeating function elements" section.
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) for the actual operating status: "Operating message pump", Target operating status: "Pump ON", output: "Status command execution check":
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
An adjoining malfunctionSM or stCEC may influence the control of the "Pump ON" output.
a) not ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) the output "Pump ON" switches to "closed" ("malfunction blocked" = 1)
If a malfunction sets the output "Pump ON" to off, this can only be reset by activating the "unlock
malfunction catch".
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(on/off) and Zs, DOL, manual(on/off), Zw(on/off) and ZwSw, SM
Priority Parameter / Value
Highest
SM
Zw/Off, Manual/Off
Impact
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Pu = 0
Manual/open, Zw/open
Pu = 1
Z/closed, DOL
Pu = 0
Z/On
Pu = 1
AnfMin
lowest
AnfAuto
if AnfAuto = 1, and AnfMin =1 then Min operation if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
4.3.3.35. H905 Double pump
Function summary
The "double pump" function block controls a switchable double pump, and supports:
pump switching (varies with operating hours, per switching parameter or for malfunctions)
Operating hours / limiting value
Switching delays
Command execution check
Pump blocking protection
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
Status control unit using Z influence, DOL, manual influence, repair switch, forced control
Parameters
No. name of parameter
1
AnfAuto
Begin Automatic operation
2
3
4
5
7
Bh2
Oper.hrs. Pump 2
Pu1
Pump 1 ON
Pu2
Pump 2 ON
reg
Begin Control
BM1
Operation msg pump 1
8
SM1
Pump 1 fault
9
Rep1
Repair switch pump 1
10
AnlVerz
Startup delay of the automatic
11
BM2
Operation msg pump 2
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean
min max
---
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
--
init
deleted --
2147483647 0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0 deleted -deleted -deleted --
2147483647 0
--
unit
h
--
--
-s deleted --
4.3. - 413
Version 05/06
Software structure
No. name of parameter
12
Bh1
Oper.hrs. Pump 1
13
BhAktiv
Oper.hrs.cnt. activation
14
BhGw1
Oper.hrs. limit value pump 1
15
PuUm
Pump switching
16
DBE
Dir. oper. level active
17
Hand
Hand switch AUTO
18
LzPBS
Pump blocking prot. run time
19
PuNach
Pump coasting
20
BhGw2
Oper.hrs. limit value Pump 2
21
ResBh1
Reset oper.hrs. pump 1
22
ResSM
Unlock Malfunction catch
23
BhGwU
Pump switch-over limit value
24
Rep2
Repair switch pump 2
25
ResBh2
Reset oper.hrs. Pump 2
27
StSperr
Malfunction blocked
Version 05/06
Objects 4.3. - 414
set point integer set point integer set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point boolean
parameter typ
set point integer set point boolean set point integer actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
min max
0
--
0
--
--
--
--
init
2147483647 0
-0
2147483647 168
---
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
1
--
--
--
--
4 deleted -deleted --
0
2147483647 0
120 0
2147483647 168 deleted -deleted --
2147483647 72
-min h h deleted -deleted --
0
-h
unit
h value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,Pump1_ON
2,Pump2_ON min
--
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 415
No. name of parameter
28
StzPBS
29
VzBAK
30
RzU
31
32
Start time blocking prot.
stBAK1 or stBAK2 delayed
Rest time to switch-over
Z
Z- influence
Zw
Forced control
parameter typ
set point integer set point integer actual value integer set point multistate set point multistate
33
SM2
Pump 2 fault
34
UZeit
Overlap time actual value deletable boolean set point integer
35
gBh1
Limit value violation oper. hrs. pump 1 actual value boolean
36
pbs
Blocking prot. active actual value boolean
37
stbak1
Command exe. control status pump 1
38
stbak2
Command exe. control status pump 2
39
tBAK
Time BAK
40
gBh2
Limit value violation oper. hrs. pump 2
41
SMout
SMout actual value boolean actual value boolean set point integer actual value boolean actual value boolean
min max
0
init
2147483647 0
0
0
--
--
--
0
--
--
--
--
0
--
--
2147483647 0
2147483647 0
4
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,Pump1_ON
2,Pump2_ON
0 value,text
9,Auto
0,OFF
1,ON deleted --
2147483647 0
0
0
0
0
2147483647 30
0
0
unit
min s min s
--
--
--
-s
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 416
Function description
Pump switching
If the input "Pump switching" is not switched operation changes between the two pumps in automatic mode and for Zw/On depending on the operating hours. For this the pump that is not running is activated when the operating time of the currently operating pump exceeds the "limiting
value pump switching" since the last pump switching. At the same time "Remaining time to
switching" is set to "limiting value pump switching" and starts to count down.
If the parameter "Pump switching" is switched, in automatic mode and for Zw/On the relevant pump is activated depending on the value of the parameter, "Pump switching"= 0 -> Pump 1,
"Pump switching"= 1 -> Pump 2.
The malfunction-dependent pump switching is described in the trouble-shooting section; the input
"Pump switching" has no influence on the malfunction-dependent pump switching.
Priorities for the various pump switchings
Highest priority
malfunction-dependent pump switching parameter-dependent pump switching operating time-dependent pump switching
Lowest priority
Switching delays
It is possible to delay switching the pump on in automatic operation ("Delay automatic start").
It is possible to delay switching the pump off in automatic operation ("Pump hunting").
When switching from "Pump 1 On" to "Pump 2 On" or vice versa the pump to be switched on is activated; the pump to be switched off still operates for the "overlay time" so as to prevent a fall in pressure when building up the pressure in the pump that is to be switched on.
Pump blocking protection
The function block includes the "pump block protection" function. If the value 0 is entered for the LzPBS operating time this function does not work.
The pump blocking protection is only activated when neither of the two pumps is running at the switch on time and automatic mode is activated, "Blocking protection active" is set at this time to 1. Both pumps are subsequently switched on for a time by "operating time pump blocking protection"; the switching from pump 1 to pump 2 takes place without an "overlay time".
The function block delivers an output signal "request control" that switches when the pump outputs and not the"Blocking protection active" are due.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 417
Operating hours / limiting value
The operating hours of the pumps can be counted, the operating hours counter can be preset and occupied by a limiting value. If the limiting value is exceeded a message is produced. If the input for the relevant pump operating message is not switched the pump output is used for counting.
HWO parameter
Pu1 or Pu2 corresponding general operating hour parameter
Control signal
BM1 or BM2
Operating message
ResBh1 or ResBh2
Reset operating hours
Bh1 or Bh2
BhActive
Set operating hours activate
BhGw1 or BhGw2
Set limiting value
Bh1 or Bh2 gBh1 or gBh2
Operating hours
Limiting value exceeded
Command execution check
The function block contains a command execution check (refer to the command execution check for description and parameters) both pumps for the actual operating status: "Operating message pump
1 or 2", Target operating status: "Burner 1 or 2 ON", output: "Status pump command execution
check 1 or 2".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 418
If the actual operating status is not switched no corresponding command execution check malfunction is signaled (stCEC1orstCEC2).
"Release malfunction catch" resets the command execution check malfunction.
Note: The parameter names of the command execution check are different from those described in the "Repeating function elements" section.
HWO parameter
Pu1 or Pu2
BM1 or BM2 tCEC corresponding general CEC parameter
Control signal from the object Bsz acknowledgement from hardware CEC
Monitoring time tCEC
VzCEC
Pu1 or Pu2
Alarm delay time VzCEC
Control signal to the hardware Bst
stCEC1 or stCEC2
CEC status stCEC
Malfunction catch / malfunction handling
If "unlock malfunction catch" is wired malfunctions that occur are saved and can be reset by activating the "unlock malfunction catch".
Malfunctions that occur SM1 or SM2 or stCEC1 or stCEC2 may influence the control of the outputs "Pump 1 ON" and "Pump 2 ON" as follows: a) switches the pump that is not currently being used ("malfunction blocked" = 0) b) switches the outputs "Pump 1 ON" and "Pump 2 ON" off ("malfunction blocked" =
1)
The switch due to a malfunction only occurs in automatic mode or for Zw/On.
When switching to the pump that is not currently being used the pump operating at the time of the malfunction is switched off after the end of the "overlay time". If the malfunction is resolved (SM1 or
SM2 and stCEC1 or stCEC2 returns again to 0), the pump requested at this time (refer to parameterdependent pump switching or operational hours pump switching) is re-used to reset to this.
If the malfunction switches off the outputs "Pump 1 ON", and "Pump 2 On" this can only be reset by activating the "release malfunction catch".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
If "unlock malfunction catch" is not wired malfunctions that occur are not saved, i.e. if the malfunction disappears the malfunction handling disappears.
4.3. - 419
HWO parameter
ResSM
SM1 and SM2 stCEC1 and stCEC2
StLock
Pu1 and Pu2 corresponding general operating hour parameter
Release malfunction catch
Malfunction(s) occurring
Malfunction blocked
Hardware control signal
Status control/switch priorities
The following input parameters influence the control of the outputs:
AnfAuto, Z(off/pump 1 on/pump 2 on), DOL, manual(off/pump 1 on/pump 2 on), Zw(off/on),
Rep1, Rep2, SM1, SM2
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Highest Manual/Off, Zw/Off Pu1 = 0, Pu2 = 0
Rep1, Rep2
SM
Rep1 = 1 -> Pu1 = 0
Rep2 = 1 -> Pu2 = 0
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
"Malfunction blocked" = 1: Pu1 = 0, Pu2 = 0
!!! "Malfunction blocked" = 0):
As per malfunction dependent pump switching pump is only activated for automatic operation or Zw/On
Manual/Pump 1 on,
Manual/Pump 2 on
Pu1 = 1, Pu2 = 0
Pu1 = 0, Pu2 = 1
Zw/On
Pump is activated as per pump switching
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 420
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Z/closed, DOL
Pu1 = 0, Pu2 = 0
Z/Pump 1 on,
Z/Pump 2 on
lowest
AnfAuto
Pu1 = 1, Pu2 = 0
Pu1 = 0, Pu2 = 1 if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
"Status command execution check ..." malfunctions that occur are not reset by "non-automatic" operation.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 421
4.3.4. Basic objects (flags, timers, AE, AA, BE, BA)
Basic objects are e.g. markers, timers and switches. Following short descriptions and parameters.
S_21
S_22
S_23
S_31
S_32
L
M
P
S
S_11
S_12
object no.
name of object
Lamp
Marker
Pin
Switch
ON/OFF switch
ON/OFF switch
AUTO/MAN ON/OFF
AUTO/ON
MANUAL/OFF
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
AUTO/ON/OFF 0.1.9
AUTO/MANUAL 1/2EA 0.1.9
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
S_41
S_42
S_51
T
AUTO/0/1/2
AUTO/0/D/N
AUTO/0/T/N/Heatg
Timer
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
4.3.4.1. BO L - Lamp
To control an LED on a module.
Function summary
Dieses Objekt repräsentiert eine LED auf der Frontblende eines Moduls. Wobei die "Frontblende" als
Darstellungselement von physikalischen als auch logischen Blenden zu sehen ist (SBM21 oder ein
Bildschirm der Oberfläche im Bereich Kunden des Gerätes). Die Funktionalität einer Lampe wurde aus dem DDC3000 System übernommen und für die logische Darstellung erweitert. Es werden ungültige und gelöschte Werte über die Lampen in der entsprechenden Darstellungsform ausgegeben.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
l
State
2
3
Q D
Permanent light
Q B
Blinking light
4
Farbe
Color selection
Objects parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean set point multistate
4.3. - 422
--
--
min max init unit
--0 --
--
--
--
8
0
0
0
--
-value,text
0,Red-RedOFFBl
1,Green-RedOFFBl
2,Green-Red
3,Green-Yellow
4,Yellow-Red
5,undefined
6,undefined
7,undefined
4.3.4.2. BO M - Markers
Function summary
This object represents a control link (marker). Variable:= e1 e2 e3 e4 m Expressions OR, AND,
NOT, XOR, brackets ( [ ] ) are optional parts of the link.
Depiction of the marker's parameters (Version 0.3.33 and
1.0.x)
The marker is displayed better from Version 1.1.xx.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 423
same marker with clearer depiction
If the "inputs" flap is pressed the technician can view all the inputs with their source assignments at a glance.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
E1
Input 1
2
3
E2
Input 2
E3
Input 3
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean actual value deletable boolean
min max init unit
--0 --
--
--
--
--
0 --
0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 424
No.
name of parameter
4
E4
Input 4
5
6
V
Vector
m
Status marker
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point text actual value boolean
min max init unit
--0 --
--
--
--
-0
--
--
4.3.4.3. BO P - Pin
Function summary
Das Pin-Objekt steht für eine I/O-Klemme. Über den Parameter, der hinter Par_Config steht, wird ein
Subobjekt installiert. Je nach Subobjekt werden genau die Möglichkeiten eines analogen Einganges, eines analogen Ausganges, eines binären Einganges oder eines binären Ausganges angeboten.
Welche Funktionen möglich sind, hängt vom übergeordneten Modul-Objekt ab, das die Möglichkeiten des betreuten Busmoduls (oder der IO-Karte) kennt. Es sorgt dafür, dass die Auswahl-Möglichkeiten bezüglich der Subobjekte eingeschränkt werden. Der Parameter hinter Par_Config bestimmt, welches Subobjekt angehängt wird: 0 = kein Subobjekt = keine Funktion 1 = CDI = Binärer Eingang 2
= CDO = Binärer Ausgang 3 = CAI = Analoger Eingang 4 = CAO = Analoger Ausgang.
The function of a PINS is stipulated by attaching a sub-object e.g. CAI for analog input.
For this depending on the hardware of the PIN it is possible to select several sub-objects.
For example, a PIN can be an output that can then be read back.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
1
Typ
Pin type selection set point multistate
min max init
-5 0
2
AN
Pin type selection
3
AI
Pin type selection set point multistate set point multistate
-3 0
-2 0
unit
value,text
0,no function
1,Binary input
2,Binary output
3,Analog input
4,Analog output value,text
0,no function
3,Analog input
4,Analog output value,text
0,no function
3,Analog input
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No.
4
5
6
7
8
name of parameter
AO
Pin type selection
DN
Pin type selection
DI
Pin type selection
DO
Pin type selection
Kn
Pin connection
parameter typ
set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate set point deletable text
min
--
--
--
--
--
max
2
3
2
2
--
init
0
0
0
unit
value,text
0,no function
4,Analog output value,text
0,no function
1,Binary input
2,Binary output value,text
0,no function
1,Binary input
0 value,text
0,no function
2,Binary output deleted --
4.3. - 425
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 426
4.3.4.4. BO S - Switches
Function summary
Is there for the sake of completeness. This switch aims to integrate the switches of the SBM into the
DDC4000 system.
Jede der Tasten auf den Modulen kann als Taster (T), Schalter (S) oder als Teil einer Schaltergruppe mit gegenseitiger Auslösung definiert werden.
Schaltergruppen bestehen aus mindestens 2 aufeinanderfolgenden Schaltern. Die Schaltergruppen werden der Reihe nach durchnummeriert. Nach Anwahl des entsprechenden Parameters lassen sich die Tasten in ihrer Funktion festlegen.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Type
Type
2
s
Switch Status
parameter typ
set point multistate set point deletable boolean
min
--
--
max
18
--
init
0
unit
value,text
0,Push-button switch
1,Switch
2,Group_1
3,Group_2
4,Group_3
5,Group_4
6,Group_5
7,Group_6
8,Group_7
9,Group_8
10,Group_9
11,Group_10
12,Group_11
13,Group_12
14,Group_13
15,Group_14
16,Group_15
17,Group_16 deleted --
4.3.4.5. BO S_11 - Switch single stage ON/OFF
Function summary
Ein einstufiger Schalter mit dem Text EIN/AUS - Eltako-Funktion (rastender Taster).
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 427
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
ON/OFF
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-2 0 value,text
0,MANUAL OFF
1,MANUAL ON set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.6. BO S_12 - Confirmation switch
Function summary
A sensor with confirmation function. Resets to 0 after 1 second.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
Receipt
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-2 0 value,text
0,OFF
1,Receipt set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.7. BO S_21 - 2 push-button MANUAL/AUTO, ON/OFF
Function summary
Dieser Schalter hat die Funktion, mit dem ersten Knopf Auto/Hand und mit dem zweiten Knopf
Ein/Aus zu schalten.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO/Manual s.02
s.02
OFF/ON
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-3 2 value,text
9,AUTO
1,Manual ON
0,Manual OFF
--0 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.8. BO S_22 2 push-buttons AUTO, Manual On
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 2 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 EIN
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
MANUAL ON
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-2 0 value,text
9,AUTO
1,ON
--1 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.9. BO S_23 (as 22)
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 2 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 AUS
4.3. - 428
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
Manual OFF
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-2 0 value,text
0,MANUAL OFF
9,AUTO
--0 -set point boolean set point boolean
--1 --
4.3.4.10. BO S_31 - 3 push-buttons AUTO, Manual off, Manual on
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 3 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 HAND AUS
Zustand Taste 3 HAND EIN
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
MANUAL OFF s.03
s.03
MANUAL ON
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-3 0 value,text
9,AUTO
0,MANUAL OFF
1,MANUAL ON
--1 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 -set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.11. BO S_32 - 3 push-buttons AUTO/manual, Level1 ON/OFF, Level 2 ON/OFF
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 3 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO/HAND
Zustand Taste 2 STUFE1 EIN/AUS
Version 05/06
4.3. - 429
Software structure Objects
Zustand Taste 3 STUFE2 EIN/AUS
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO/MANUAL s.02
s.02
MANUAL LEV 1 s.03
s.03
MANUAL LEV 2
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-4 1 value,text
9,AUTO/MANUAL
0,OFF
1,MANUAL ON LEV 1
2,MANUAL ON LEV 2
--0 -actual value boolean actual value boolean
--0 -actual value boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.12. BO S_41 - 4 Push-buttons AUTO, OFF, Manual Level 1, Level 2
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 4 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 AUS
Zustand Taste 3 HAND STUFE 1
Zustand Taste 4 HAND STUFE 2
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
OFF s.03
s.03
MANUAL ON LEV 1
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-4 0 value,text
9,AUTO
0,OFF
1,MANUAL ON LEV 1
2,MANUAL ON LEV 2
--1 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 -set point boolean
--0 --
Version 05/06
4.3. - 430
Software structure Objects
No.
name of parameter
s.04
s.04
MANUAL ON LEV 2
parameter typ min max init unit
set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.4.13. BO S_42 - 4 Push-buttons AUTO, DAY, NIGHT, OFF
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 4 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 Fern Tag
Zustand Taste 3 Fern Nacht
Zustand Taste 4 Fern Aus
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
DAY s.03
s.03
NIGHT s.04
s.04
OFF
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-4 0 value,text
9,Remote Auto
0,Remote OFF
1,Remote Day
35,Remote Night
--1 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 -set point boolean set point boolean
--
--
--
--
0
0
--
--
4.3.4.14. BO S_51 - 5 Push-buttons Auto, off, Manual Level 1, 2, 3
Function summary
Eine Schaltergruppe mit 5 Schaltern:
Zustand Taste 1 AUTO
Zustand Taste 2 AUF
Zustand Taste 3 TAG
Zustand Taste 4 NACHT
Zustand Taste 5 Aufheizen
Version 05/06
4.3. - 431
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
h
hand
Switch Status s.01
s.01
AUTO s.02
s.02
OFF s.03
s.03
DAY s.04
s.04
NIGHT s.05
s.05
HEATING
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value multistate
-5 0 value,text
9,Z AUTO
0,Z-OFF
1,Z DAY
35,Z NIGHT
36,Z Heating
--1 -set point boolean set point boolean
--0 --
--0 -set point boolean set point boolean set point boolean
--
--
--
--
0
0
--
--
4.3. - 432
4.3.4.15. BO T - Timer
Function summary
Die Timer können von 1 Sekude bis 35999 Sekunden (99:59:59) jeweils Einschalt- und/oder
Ausschaltverzögert eingestellt werden.
Die Startzeit wird in Parameter Tstart SzT angezeigt. Timer können während ihrer Laufzeit durch eine erneute Triggerung (auf 0 gesetzt und) neu gestartet werden.
Parameters
f
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
e
E
Input actual value deletable boolean f
f
set point multistate
min max
---
-3 t reset
ResT
Reset Timer
t
Status Timer set point boolean actual value boolean
---
---
0
0
init
0
0
unit
-value,text
0,Timer
1,Switch-on impulse
2,On/Off switch impulse
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 433
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
Toff
VzA
Switch-off delay set point integer
Ton
VzE
Switch-on delay
Tstart SzT
Start time set point integer actual value deletable integer
min max
0 359999
0
0
359999
init
0
0 s
2147483647 deleted s
unit
s
4.3.5. System objects
4.3.5.1. System objects
The system objects are located in plant "0" of the DDC Central Unit and are used for general settings.
Network structures are stipulated here and the peripherals are also administrated (fax, modem, printer ...)
object no.
SY_BACnet
SY_B_AI
SY_B_AO
SY_B_AV
SY_B_BI
SY_B_BO
SY_B_BV
SY_CAN
SY_Central
name of object
External BACnet
Ext. BACnet AE
Ext. BACnet AA
Ext. BACnet AW
Ext. BACnet DE
Ext. BACnet DA
Ext. BACnet DW
CAN Bus
Central
SY_Clock
SY_Config
SY_D4DML
SY_D4PML
SY_Datsi
System time 0.1.9
System configuration 0.1.9
Def.data
unreleased
Planning save data
0.1.9
unreleased
SY_DDC110 SY_DDC110
SY_DDC3000 DDC3000 operating
SY_DSub D-SUB config
SY_Email Email unreleased unreleased unreleased
0.3
0.4.0
0.4.0
0.4.0
0.1.9
0.1.9
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.4.0
0.4.0
0.4.0
0.4.0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects object no.
name of object
SY_ExtCent
SY_FAX
SY_FBM38
SY_FBM48
SY_File
SY_Hosts
SY_I18N ext.Central Unit
FAX
System FBM38
System FBM48
File
Hosts
Localisation
SY_Lon System LON
SY_ModConf Modem-Config.
SY_Modul System
SY_MsgMan Message_Storage
SY_MsgOut Message output
SY_Network
SY_Printer
SY_Route
Network config.
Printer
Route
SY_SBM51 System SBM51
SY_SBM52S System SBM52S
SY_Serial
SY_Shadow
SY_Simu
SY_SMS
SY_Stat ser. Interface
Shadow
Simulation value
SMS
Statistics
SY_TelChar
SY_Trace
SY_TrMan
SY_User
TelCosts Limit
Trace
Trend storage
Usergroup
0.4.0
unreleased
1.0.4
0.2.0
unreleased
0.4.0
unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased
0.4
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.3
0.2.0
unreleased unreleased
0.2.0
unreleased
release stage: 24.07.2006
unreleased
0.2.0
0.4.0
unreleased unreleased
0.2.0
unreleased
Version 05/06
4.3. - 434
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 435
4.3.5.2. SY_Module Module settings general
Function summary
This system object contains the setting parameters above all that are important for each DDC Central
Unit (BMR) and also bus modules (IO cards).
This includes in particular the software version number in parameter 899 and the Bacnet device ID.
Parameters
No.
899
name of parameter parameter typ min
Prog. Version actual value text
--
AnmCount LogonCounter
max
--
-2147483648 2147483647 0
BACPrio BACnet-Prio.
actual value integer set point integer
1 16
init unit
Revision: Head --
9
--
--
DevId BACnet DeviceId 0 4194303 0 --
DubAdr
ErrNo
Error
Address double
Fault Code
Fault module set point integer actual value boolean actual value integer actual value boolean
--
0
--
-0
2147483647 0
-0
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 436
No.
HwRev
SetFree
name of parameter parameter typ min
HardwareVersion actual value text
--
Send release --
State set point boolean actual value multistate
--
max
--
--
init
-.-
1
unit
--
--
State 3 2 value,text
0,passive
1,active
99,virtual
BACPrio: The parameter describes the priority used to change a DDC parameter.
The following peculiarity is important:
If parameters are changed via the DDC interface, priority 9 applies to it for example.
Then it is stipulated that the DDC should be given priority 10. If the BACPrio parameter is now set to
10 all the values changed in the DDC are moved to priority 10.
Warning! This may mean that superordinate setting commands etc. take sudden effect if their priority is now larger.
4.3.5.3. SY_Config plant configuration
Function summary
DDC central parameters can be viewed (internal temp) and set in this object.
The most important parameter here is the central unit address. Many program process are based on this address so if it is changed a cold start is required.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 437
The screen shot is from Version 1.0.19. Here the "network" and "XMLPrettyPrint" parameters are found in the object. These two parameters will not be available in future versions.
Parameters
No.
3
4
name of parameter parameter typ
XmlPret
XmlPrettyPrint
CF Type set point boolean actual value text
Address Central U address
Battery Battery voltage set point integer actual value float
BeepD ToneDuration
Brightn
CalA
CalB
CalC
Brightness
Calibration A
Calibration B
Calibration C set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer set point integer
min
--
max
--
init
0
--
1
--
99
-infinity
0
+infinity
5000
10 100
-2147483648 2147483647 0
60
98
1
0
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 0
%
--
V ms
--
--
--
--
unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 438
No.
CalD
CalE
CalF
CalS dbg0
Hostnam
Logserv
name of parameter parameter typ
Calibration D set point integer
Calibration E
Calibration F set point integer set point integer
Calibration S
Internal
Host name
Logserver set point integer set point text actual value text set point deletable text
Restart
Temp
Voltage
Warm start
Inside temperature
Backup Voltage set point boolean actual value float actual value float
min max init
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 0
-2147483648 2147483647 0
--
--
--
--
-infinity
0
--
--
--
--
+infinity
5
DDC4000.01
deleted
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
C
V
unit
--
4.3.5.4. SY_CAN CAN bus
Function summary
This object is used to configure the CAN busses.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 439
This defines whether a bus supports Field bus modules or BMD/BMA.
This object can be set twice. Index 1 is responsible for the first bus - Index 2 for the second.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min max
AutoAnm Auto logon set point boolean
---
Baudr Baud rate set point multistate
-3
Error Error count 0
init unit
1 --
0
2147483647 0 value,text
1,20 KBaud
2,40 KBaud
3,80 KBaud
--
FP3000
Mode
FB3000 Release
Mode
RXFrame RX Frames
SB3000 SB3000 Release
TXFrame TX Frames actual value integer set point boolean set point boolean actual value integer set point boolean actual value integer
--
--
0
--
0
--
--
--
0 --
0 --
2147483647 0 --
0 --
2147483647 0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 440
* Nr.
Beschreibung
1) AutoAnm Ist dieser Parameter auf true, werden alle an diesem Can-Bus vorhandenen Module automatisch Angemeldet. Ist dieser Parameter false, werden nur projektierte Module
Angemeldet.
2) Baudr
3) Error
Es sind 3 verschiedene Baudraten zulässig im System, hier können für den CAN-Bus diese gewählt werden.
Errors ist ein Statistik-Parameter. Er zeigt die Anzahl der vom CAN-Controller gemeldeten
Fehler an. Es ist die Summe der BUS-OFFs.
4) FP3000 Die Zentrale kann mehrere Protokolle gleichzeitig auf dem CAN-Bus bearbeiten, hiermit kann die Funktion des DDC3000 Feldbusses "EIN" oder "AUS" geschaltet werden.
5) RXFrame RX Frames ist ein statistik Parameter. Er zeigt die Anzahl empfangener Frames an.
6) SB3000 Die Zentrale kann mehrere Protokolle gleichzeitig auf dem CAN-Bus bearbeiten, hiermit kann die Funktion des DDC3000 Schaltschrankbusses "EIN" oder "AUS" geschaltet werden.
7) TXFrame TX Frames ist ein statistik Parameter. Er zeigt die Anzahl gesendeter Frames an.
4.3.5.7. SY_Host
In SY_Host all possible 99 DDC Central Units are saved with their related IP addresses. Only when a
DDC Central Unit is saved here can it be reached via a remote control and through superordinate parameterizing.
For the entries to become valid the Ethernet should be switched off and on again after a change (as of Version 1.10.19)
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 441
4.3.5.8. SY_FAX
The fax system object is used to stipulate the fax numbers that are to be dialed via a message.
The corresponding fax number is used via the output definition (SY_MsgOut) relating to the message.
For this please observe a special binary coding. Refer to SY_MsgOut.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 442
4.3.5.9. SY_MsgMan
This system object is to be used for setting up the message memory. With the aid of the possible settings here the size of the memory can be stipulated and the messages deleted.
Via "Quit MS" you can confirm messages that have accumulated. Entry must be set briefly to 1.
Via "Delete MS " you can delete all message pairs (malfunction and normal messages). Entry must be set briefly to 1.
A small trick for deleting the memory: set memory size to 1 - then the memory only holds 1 message.
Mark this with a normal message and delete.
A new value message can be connected via "new message".
4.3.5.10. SY_EMAIL
As in SY_FAX you can stipulate addresses for the output here. Under "name" there should be a user name for simpler identification.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 443
The SMTP address is set in SY_ModConf. (Version 1.0.19)
Up to version 1.2 there will only be the option of sending a mail within an intranet. The Internet dialing procedure and the required authentification algorithms have not been implemented yet.
4.3.5.11. Sy_Clock
In Sy_Clock (plant time) you can enter the time zone and current time.
By entering the time zone you define whether the clock is altered for summer/winter time.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 444
Entering the date
4.3.5.12. SY_Serial
SY_Serial (Modem operation)
Go to "ser. interf.".
In the "mode" parameter enter a "3" for RS232 modem. (1 means inactive).
Or from Version 1.1.X select "RS232 modem".
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 445
4.3.5.13. Sy_ModConf
The modem access is configures in the SY_ModConf system object.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 446
Hier kann für den jeweiligen SMS-Provider das Protokoll eingestellt werden.
Z.B. Parameter 9 Einwahl SMSC E+
Hier wird die Einwahlnummer angegeben.
Z.B. Parameter 13 SMSProtokoll E+
Hier kann das benutzte Protokoll umgestellt werden. Zur Zeit (Version 1.1) sind 2 Protokolle implementiert.
Außerhalb Deutschlands kann hier das Protokoll eingestellt werden und in den Einwahlnummern die ortsübliche Nummer.
4.3.5.14. SY_Network
The network interfaces are configured in this object.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 447
Below you can see the setting options for the J-Y(St)Y network. The "2" default setting for the subnetwork can be seen.
The active IP address is visible in parameter "4". It is comprised of "1" the IP sub-string, the network
"2" and the DDC Central Unit address.
If the network or network administrator stipulates another IP, a special IP address can be stated in parameter "8".
If an IP changes, the network switches itself off automatically (Version 1.0 + 1.1 ).
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 448
4.3.6. Attachment functions
Function objects
To expand (influence) parameters function objects (F_**) etc. are used. This should for example enable a parameter to be scaled without losing the reference to an output parameter.
F013
F014
F015
F016
F017
F019
FAIMO
FB_AI
FB_AO
FB_AV
FB_BI
FB_BO
FB_BV
F008
F009
F010
F011
F012
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
F006
F007
object no.
name of object
Polynomial
Operating hours
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.43
0.1.9
Input limit
Self holding
0.4.0
0.4.0
Command execution check 0.4.0
Damping
Delay
0.2.0
0.2.0
Limit value monitoring
Blocking protection
Block prot. st.
Z-contact
Scaling
0.1.9
0.2.0
0.2.0
unreleased unreleased
Simulation
Inverting
Counter
Replace value
Object status
Adjustment
Sensor over
BACnet Analog-Input
BACnet AA
BACnet Analog Value
BACnet Binary-Input
BACnet BA
BACnet BV
1.0.4
0.3.33
unreleased unreleased
0.1.9
0.4.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 449 object no.
name of object
FB_IR
FB_MI
FB_MO
FB_MV
FB_TR
FDest
FMSG
FSelMO
FSource
BACnet message
BACnet Multistate-Input
BACnet MA
BACnet MW
Trend
Destination message
Selection signal set
Source
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
0.1.9
release stage: 24.07.2006
unreleased
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.2.0
unreleased
4.3.6.1. F001 Scaling
Function summary
This object has parameters that are used for scaling the target parameter. The calculated "new" value is entered in the current value of the target parameter.
F001 Skalierung kann an einem Float Parameter installiert werden. Mit dem Polynom y = Ax² + Bx +
C wird der Parameter skaliert.
Bsp.: Eine Fühlerkorrektur von 1,5 K hätte folgende Einstellung. A=0.0, B=1.0, C=1.5 Bsp.: Ein 0-10
V Eingang auf den Bereich -20 bis +20 skaliert A=0.0, B=4.0, C=-20.0
Function description
The function object F001 Scaling assign a new value range to an analog signal. The value range is defined by a start and an end value.
The scaling refers to the value range of the input magnitude. The "start scaling" and "End scaling" parameters stipulate the value range. The scaled value is provided directly to the object output of the relevant, analogue value.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Example 1:
A 0..10V signal should be converted to 0..350 m³/h
(depicted as 0..100%)
Start of range 0.0 (0%)
End of range 350.0 (100%) unit m³/h
Objects
Example 2:
Any analog signal should be calculated in Fahrenheit
Start of range -58.0 (=-50°C)
End of range 302.0 (= 150°C)
4.3. - 450
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
A
AX2
2
3
C
C
B
BX
parameter typ min
set point float
max init unit
-infinity +infinity 0 --
-infinity +infinity 1 -set point float set point float
-infinity +infinity 0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 451
4.3.6.3. F003 Limitation
Function summary
This object has parameters that are used for limiting the target parameter. The calculated "new" value is entered in the current value of the target parameter. The limitation is used for analog values.
e.g. the customer should be able to set set point <xs> only between 19 ... 23°C although the value range envisages a greater range of values for the parameter <xs>.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
OG
GWO
Upper limit value
UG
GWU
Lower limit value
parameter typ min
set point float
max init unit
-infinity +infinity 0 -set point float
-infinity +infinity 0 --
4.3.6.4. F004 catch
Function summary
Used to maintain a status of a parameter. The setting of another parameter releases the status of the parameter that is to be retained on which the catch works.
Function description
Die Selbsthaltung kann nur an einen Parameter vom Typ "Boolean" angehängt werden. Dies bewirkt, wenn der Parameter auf "1" wechselt, dass er durch die Selbsthaltung auf diesem Wert bleibt, bis ein separates Rücksetzsignal (Reset Störungsselbsthaltung) aktiviert wird. Erst nach Quittierung der
Änderung durch diese binäre Quelle wird der neue Wert gültig.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
res
Reset SH
parameter typ min max init unit
set point boolean
--0 --
4.3.6.5. F005 Command execution check
Function summary
Sie dient der Überwachung von binären Betriebs-Ist-Zuständen. Ein Betriebs-Ist-Zustand (oder
Betriebsmeldung) muss innerhalb einer bestimmten Zeit tCEC dem Wert eines Betrieb-Soll-
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 452
Zustandes entsprechen, anderenfalls wird ein binärer Ausgang FehlerBAK auf 1 gesetzt. Ist der
Betriebs-Ist-Zustand nicht beschaltet, wird kein FehlerCEC signalisiert. Der FehlerCEC wird zurückgesetzt, wenn der ResCEC-Eingang von 0 auf 1 wechselt. Ist der ResCEC-Eingang nicht beschaltet, wird FehlerCEC zurückgesetzt, wenn der Betriebs-Ist-Zustand dem Betriebs-Soll-
Zustand wieder entspricht. Die 0/1-Flanke von FehlerCEC wird um die Zeit VzCEC verzögert ausgegeben. (siehe Pkt. 4.3.3.4 CEC)
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
reset
Reset
2
3
4
zeit
Time
Fehler
Error input
Aktor
Feedback
parameter typ
set point deletable boolean set point integer set point deletable boolean set point deletable boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
1
--
--
60
--
--
10 deleted deleted s
--
--
4.3.6.6. F006 Damping
Function summary
This object has parameters that are used for damping the target parameter. The calculated "new" value is entered in the current value of the target parameter.
Function description
Es kann eine Beruhigung eines analogen Signals, z.B. eines Fühlerwertes, realisiert werden. Der
Parameter „tn“ wirkt dabei wie ein PT1-Glied. Ändert sich der Wert des Eingangssignals sprunghaft, so wird nach der Dämpfungszeit eine Änderung des Wertes von 63% des ursprünglichen
Eingangssprunges erreicht.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
tn
tn(63%)
parameter typ
set point deletable integer
min max init
1 3600 deleted
unit
s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 453
4.3.6.7. F007 Delay
Function summary
This object can be installed on Boolean and multistate parameter types. Delays the setting of a value when the mode changes.
Clarification:
You can change the previous value for multistate parameters without having to change the subsequent value.
Example:
Fan is to be switched from level 1 to level 2. But two statuses may not be active at the same time.
The following statuses are possible: 0=OFF, 1=Level1, 2=Level2
1st step: Parameter status 1 "active"
à change to the control
2nd step: Parameter status 1 "passive"
à time delay
Step 3: Parameter status 2 "passive"
Step 4: Parameter status 2 "active"
Hinweis: Die Verzögerungen werden in Sekunden parametriert. (Die Basiswerte für die Schaltzeiten sind Null Sekunden - womit eine zeitliche Verzögerung nicht wirksam ist!)
Typischer Anwendungsfall: Merker für Lichtsteuerung.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
tnOff
tnAus
Switch-off delay tnOn
tnEin
Switch-on delay
parameter typ min max init unit
set point integer
0 3600 0 s set point integer
0 3600 0 s
4.3.6.9. F017 Object status
"Object status" defines what the LEDs in the superordinate groups and plants should display. (auch im Anlagen-Schnellzugriff der Kundenansicht)
Function summary
Wird ein Objektstatus gesetzt, so gilt für den Objektstatus aktiv bzw. nicht aktiv jeweils ein Zustand.
Ein Objektstatus besitzt somit immer ein Zustandspaar.
1. Zustandspaar: Auto/Hand setzbar durch F017 Status "Hand"
2. Zustandspaar: Ein/Aus setzbar durch F017 Status "Anlage Ein" bzw. "Anlage Aus"
Der unter Status gewählte Zustand tritt ein, wenn der logische Zustand des Parameters dem Input-
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 454
Parameter entspricht. Ist das nicht der Fall, so gilt der entsprechend andere Zustand des
Statuspaares.
Beispiel:
Ein Objektstatus am Parameter hat für den Input-Parameter den Wert "1" und für den Status-
Parameter den Wert "Anlage Ein"
Ist der Parameter "1", so gibt der Objektstatus den Zustand "Ein" aus. Der Zustand "Aus" wird ausgegeben, wenn der Parameter den Wert "0" annimmt.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
Input
Input
Input valus
State
Status
Status
parameter typ
set point integer set point multistate
min max init unit
0 1023 1 --
-4 0 valu e,tex t
1,Pla nt
ON
2,Pla nt
OFF
3,Aut omat ic
4,Ma nual
4.3.6.12. FSelMO Selection message set
Function summary
(for each 99x can be set to any scalable parameters). This object activates the message monitoring of a scalar parameter. The object described below SY_MsgMan.01 is used as a message memory. If the monitored parameter is a BoolPar 0 or 1 can be defined as a ok. If an integer or float is monitored, the limiting value and switch back difference is stated for releasing a normal message.
Parameters
No. name of parameter parameter typ
1
MSet
Selection MSet set point deletable text
min
--
max
--
init unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
No. name of parameter parameter typ
2
überw
Monitoring open set point multistate
min
--
max
8
3
E/A
On / Off
4
5
6
oGw
Upper limit value
Xdz
Switchback diff
Txt_K
Text coming set point deletable boolean set point float set point float set point multistate
7
Txt_G
Text going
8
Delay
Delay set point multistate set point deletable integer
--
-infinity
0
--
--
0
4.3. - 455 init
2
unit
value,text
0,no monitoring
1,Switch to 0
2,Switch to 1
3,Exceeding
4,Falling below
5,Equality
6,Exceed or below
7,Invalid deleted ---
+infinity
+infinity
17
8
3600
95
1
--
--
6 value,text
0,Controller damaged
1,Winter
2,Manual
3,active
4,abnormal
5,Maintenance
6,Malfunction
7,Alarm
8,Danger
9,Initial.
10,Optimization
11,ON
12,CLOSE
13,too low
14,too high
15,too hot
16,too cold
4 value,text
0,Controller OK
1,Summer
2,Auto
3,inactive
4,normal
5,Normal operation
6,OFF
7,OPEN deleted s
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 456
No. name of parameter parameter typ
9
uGw
Lower limit value set point float
10
Testw
Test value
101 u
Signaling output
102 Status internal Status set point integer actual value boolean actual value multistate
min
-infinity
max
+infinity
-2147483648 2147483647 0
--
--
--
6
0
0
init
0
--
--
unit
-value,text
0,Start
1,1. Success msg active
2,normal
3,Error msg active
4,Failure
5,Success msg active
4.3.6.13. FAIMO Sensor monitoring
Function description
(settable 99 times) The functional object FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput is used to monitor the sensor and generate sensor failure messages. For this purpose it is to be attached to the "b" parameter of a CO_AnalogInput. As such events as sensor breaking, short circuit, poling etc. are detected from this object only the validity of the "b" value is monitored but not whether limiting values are exceeded or undershot.
No sensor failure message is generated if the value of "b" has become invalid due to a module failure
(or I/O card failure). Alternatively: sensor failure messages only make sense for registered modules
(or I/O cards).
If a general failure monitoring is desired for all sensors within the central unit each related Type
CO_AnalogInput object should have a FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput attached.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
MSet
Selection MSet
2
E/A
ON / OFF
101
u
Signaling output
parameter typ
set point deletable text set point deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
-deleted
0
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 457
No.
name of parameter
102
Status
internal Status
parameter typ
actual value multistate
201
Delay
Delay
202
MTxt
Message text set point integer actual value multistate
min max init
-6 0
1
--
3600 600
5 0
unit
value,text
0,Start
1,1. Logon running
2,Logged on
3,Logoff running
4,Logged off
5,Feedback running s value,text
0,OK
1,Malfunction
2,Short-circuit
3,Sensor break
4,wrong poles
4.3.6.14. Set parameters
4.3.6.14.1. FSource
Function summary
This object has a source parameter type. Entries can be made in this parameter as per the general conditions of the source parameter type. The value of the source parameter is transferred to the value of the target parameter.
Hinweis: Das Objekt kann auf analoge und digitale Parameter angewendet werden. Es realisiert eine
Verbindung zu systemweiten Datenpunkten innerhalb der DDC-Zentralen.
Ausnahmen sind Ausgänge von Soft- und Hardware- sowie Basisobjekten.
Unit:
If the target parameter has its own unit, this is displayed. If the unit is deleted (ZERO), the unit of the source parameter is displayed.
Parameter text:
If the target parameter has a set text (not default), this is displayed as the parameter text. If this is not the case, the source parameter text is displayed.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
s
Q
Source address
parameter typ min max init unit
actual value reference
-----
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 458
4.3.6.14.3. F013 Simulation value
Function summary
This object has a target parameter type (property as set point). A value that affects the target parameter can be entered in this parameter. The "simulation value" object is deleted automatically after a warm start, after power off (failure) and communication break, if it was entered externally.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
Simuwert
Simulation value
2
Loeschen
Delete after
parameter typ
set point deletable float set point selection list
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted --
--1 selection list
No.,text
0,after warm start
1,after decimal point
4.3.6.14.4. F014 Test value
Function summary
This object has a target parameter type (property as set point). A value that affects the target parameter can be entered in this parameter. The "test value" object is also in effect after a warm start or if the power is switched off or fails. It must either be deleted on the parameter or via a central parameter that causes the deletion that applies to all the set test values in the same central unit. If the object is entered to the parameter online it is retained even if communication fails with the entering partner.
Parameters
-
Nr.
Parametername
-
Parametertyp Min Max Init Einheit
-
4.3.6.15. BACnet function objects
4.3.6.15.1. FB_AI analog input
To transfer the DDC4000 parameters via BACnet the DDC4000 parameter must be assigned a
BACnet ID and a BACnet type. To assign the BACnet types there are the following function objects:
FB_AV - BACnet Analog Value
FB_AI - BACnet Analog Input
FB_AO - BACnet Analog Output
FB_BV - BACnet Binary Value
FB_BI - BACnet Binary Input
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 459
FB_BO - BACnet Binary Output
FB_MV - BACnet Multistate Value
FB_MI - BACnet Multistate Input
FB_MO - BACnet Multistate Output
The appropriate function object must be selected in line with the value to be transferred. Within the function object a unique BACnet object ID must be assigned.
Alarms for BACnet??? such as are described in Start up ppt DDC3550-BACnet / COV...?
Function summary
BACnet-Analog-Input-Object" für das Anhängen an Parameter. Signaleingänge an Geräten (Inputs), die stetige Werte liefern, werden in BACnet als Analog-Input-Objekte abgebildet.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
--
4.3.6.15.2. FB_AO analog output
Function summary
"BACnet-Analog-Output-Object" für das Anhängen an Parameter. Es wurde für Werte entworfen, die ein Ansteuersignal eines Aktuators darstellen. Im DDC4000-System werden diese Objekte benutzt um Parameter für die GLT analoge Sollwerte darzustellen.
Dies ist ein Anhangsobjekt, dass heißt, dass der Wert des Parameters an dem dieses Objekt angehangen worden ist auf einem BACnet als Datenpunkt erreichbar wird.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId z z
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
-actual value boolean
--0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 460
4.3.6.15.3. FB_AV analog parameters
Function summary
Dieses Objekt soll an Parameter angehangen werden können, die ein BACnet-Analog-Value nach außen repräsentieren.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId z z
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
-actual value boolean
--0 --
4.3.6.15.4. FB_BI binary input
Function summary
Signaleingänge an Geräten (Inputs), die zwei diskrete Werte liefern, werden in BACnet als Binary-
Input-Objekte abgebildet.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
--
4.3.6.15.5. FB_BO binary output
Function summary
Binäre Zustände bzw. Werte, die auf einen Geräteausgang wirken, werden in BACnet als Binary-
Output-Objekte repräsentiert.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId z z
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
-actual value boolean
--0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 461
4.3.6.15.6. FB_BV binary parameters
Function summary
Dies ist ein an Parameter anhängbares DDC-Funktions-Objekt oder auch Anhangsobjekt. Es bewirkt, dass der Wert eines Parameters als ein BACnet-Binary-Value-Objekt auf dem BACnet sichtbar wird.
Dieses Objekt ist als Anhangsobjekt für Parameter vom Typ Boolean konzipiert.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId z z
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
-actual value boolean
--0 --
4.3.6.15.7. FB_MI multistate input
Function summary
Signaleingänge an Geräten (Inputs), die mehr als zwei diskrete Werte liefern, können in BACnet als
Multistate-Input-Objekte abgebildet werden.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
--
4.3.6.15.8. FB_MO multistate output
Function summary
Analoge Werte, die auf einen Geräteausgang wirken, werden im BACnet als Multistate-Input-Objekte abgebildet.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 462
No.
z
name of parameter
z
parameter typ min max
actual value boolean
---
init unit
0 --
4.3.6.15.9. FB_MV multistate parameters
Function summary
Dieses Objekt kann an Parameter des Typs Multistate angehangen werden.
Dies bewirkt, dass der Parameter, an dem dieses Objekt angehangen worden ist, auf dem BACnet als BACnet-Multistate-Value-Objekt sichtbar wird.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
ObjId BACnet ObjId z z
parameter typ min max
set point integer
0 4194303
init
0
unit
-actual value boolean
--0 --
4.3.7. Sub-objects
4.3.7.1. Sub-objects
Sub-objects are definitions for the functions of certain objects. These sub-objects are used for example for outputs and inputs. A PIN object only receives its function by stipulating the type of subobjects (e.g. binary input or output).
Sub-objects are used for example for
SBM51
PIN objects
FBM38
object no.
name of object
CAI
CAO
CB_NC
CDI
CDO
Analog input
Analog output
BACnetMsgDest
Binary input
Binary output
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.9
0.1.9
unreleased
0.1.9
0.1.9
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
CLI112
CLI117
CLO088
CLO095
CLO106
CLO108
CLO109
CLO112
CLO117
CModMO
CPort
CRS232
CRS485
object no.
name of object
CD_EL Electrical counter
CD_PU01 Basic fos max.
CD_PU02 Wilo Pump
CD_PU03 Double pump
CD_SB51 SBM51 Menu
CD_SB51S Sim
CD_WA Water counter
CD_WA01 Water counter
CD_WA02 Water counter
CD_WM
CD_WM01
CEth
CLI088
CLI095
CLI106
CLI108
CLI109
Heat counter
Heat counter
Ethernet unreleased unreleased
0.2.0
0.2.0
0.3.33
SNVT Alarm
SNVT Switch
SNVT Setpoint unreleased unreleased unreleased
SNVT HVAC Mode unreleased
SNVT Occupancy unreleased
release stage: 24.07.2006
unreleased
0.3.33
0.3.33
unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased
HVAC Status
SNVT Setting
SNVT Alarm
SNVT Switch
SNVT Setpoint
SNVT Occupancy
HVAC Status
SNVT Setting
Module message
Port
RS485 IP-conf.
RS485 IP-conf.
unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased
SNVT HVAC Mode unreleased unreleased unreleased unreleased
0.3
0.3.33
0.3
0.3
Version 05/06
4.3. - 463
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 464 object no.
name of object
CUser User
release stage: 24.07.2006
0.1.9
4.3.7.2. CAI analog input
Function summary
Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines analogen Eingangs zur Verfügung. Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations-Parameter aktiviert werden.
Parameters
No.
b
name of parameter b
b
SType
FTyp
Sensor type
parameter typ
actual value deletable float set point multistate
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted C
-10 1 value,text
0,0_10V
1,KP10
2,Pt100
3,Pt1000
4,Ni100
5,Ni1000 (DIN)
6,Ni1000 (L&G)
7,KP250
8,ML2
255,off
4.3.7.3. CAO analog output
Function summary
Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines analogen Ausgangs zur Verfügung. Es ist Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations-Parameter aktiviert werden.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ
y
y
y Input actual value deletable float
Y
Y
Y Output set point float
min max init unit
-infinity +infinity deleted %
0 100 0 %
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 465
4.3.7.4. CDI binary input
Function summary
Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines binären Eingangs zur Verfügung. Es ist
Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations-Parameter aktiviert werden.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
k
akt.k
Value BE
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
4.3.7.5. CDO binary output
Function summary
Dieses Subobjekt stellt alle Funktionen und Parameter eines binären Ausgangs zur Verfügung. Es ist
Bestandteil des PIN Objektes und kann dort durch den Konfigurations-Parameter aktiviert werden.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
k
akt.K
Actual value BA
K
K
Binary output
parameter typ
actual value deletable boolean set point boolean
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--0 --
4.3.7.6. CModMO
Function summary
(99x settable) This object is attached to objects from the Type SY_Module and is used to produce
"module failure" plant messages. The "malfunction", "ErrNo", "DubAdr" and "Active" parameters for each SY_Module are monitored and if there is an ongoing malfunction in one of these parameters a corresponding plant message is generated. This message is distributed as per the plant messages by selecting a relevant message set.
Version 05/06
Software structure
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
MSet
Selection MSet
2
E/A
ON / OFF
101
u
Module message
102
Status
internal Status
201
Delay
Delay
202
MTxt
Message text
Objects 4.3. - 466 parameter typ
set point deletable text set point deletable boolean actual value boolean actual value multistate set point integer actual value multistate
1
--
--
--
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
--
--
6 deleted
0
0
--
--
3600
5
600
0 value,text
0,Start
1,1. Logon running
2,Logged on
3,Logoff running
4,Logged off
5,Feedback running s value,text
0,OK
1,double address
2,Fault module
3,Malfunction
4,Fault Code
4.3.8. Device objects
4.3.8.1. Gateway Objects
4.3.8.2. Volume counter
4.3.8.2.1. CD_WA volume counter
Function summary
Dies ist ein Subobjekt für die wichtigsten Parameter eines Wasser-Zählers. Die hier enthaltenen
Parameter sind das Minimum, das man von einem Wasserzähler erwarten kann.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
2222
StörZähl
Fault counter
parameter typ min
actual value boolean
--
max
--
init unit
0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 467
No.
name of parameter
2251
Ser-nr
Serial number
2258
Volumen
volume
parameter typ min
actual value text
-actual value float
max
--
-infinity +infinity 0
init unit
-m
4.3.8.2.2. CD_WA Volume counter 01
Function summary
Dieses sind die Standard-Parameter eines Wasser-Zählers am M-Bus. Viele Wasser-Zähler am M-
Bus bieten die hier enthaltenen Parameter an. Somit sind diese für viele Zähler geeignet, insbesondere auch für unbekannte Zähler.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min
2212
Betr.std
Operating time actual value integer
max init unit
-2147483648 2147483647 0 h
--0 -2222
StörZähl
Fault counter
2251
Ser-nr
Serial number actual value boolean actual value text
----
2253
Volstrom
Volume current
2258
Volumen
volume actual value float actual value float
-infinity
-infinity
+infinity
+infinity
0
0 m/h m
4.3.8.2.3. CD_WA Volume counter 02
Function summary
Die speziellen Parameter für den Wasser-Zähler "IZWM" von Allmess Schlumberger.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min
2212
Betr.std
Operating time actual value integer
max init unit
-2147483648 2147483647 0 h
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 468
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min
2215
Volumen1
Volume 1 actual value float
-infinity
-2222
StörZähl
Fault counter
2251
Ser-nr
Serial number actual value boolean actual value text
--
2252
Volumen2
Volume 2 actual value float
-infinity
--
--
max
+infinity
+infinity
init unit
0 m
0 --
--
0 m
4.3.8.3. Electrical counter
4.3.8.3.1. CD_WM Electrical counter
Function summary
Die wichtigsten Parameter eines Wärme-Zählers. Die hier enthaltenen Parameter sind das Minimum, das man von einem Wärmezähler erwarten kann.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
2211
Energie
energy
2222
StörZähl
Malfunction message
2251
Ser-nr
Serial number
parameter typ min
actual value float
max init unit
-infinity +infinity 0 kWh
--0 -actual value boolean actual value text
----
4.3.8.3.2. CD_WM Electrical counter 01
Function summary
Die Standard-Parameter eines Wärme-Zählers am M-Bus. Viele Wärme-Zähler am M-Bus bieten die hier enthaltenen Parameter an. Somit sind diese für viele Wärme-Zähler geeignet, insbesondere auch für unbekannte Zähler.
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
2211
Energie
energy
2212
Betr.std
Operation time
2222
StörZähl
Malfunction message
2251
Ser-nr
Serial number
2253
Volstrom
Volume current
2254
Leistung
Power
2255
Vorl
Feed temp.
2256
Rückl
Return-flow temp.
2258
Volumen
volumes
parameter typ min
actual value float
-infinity
max
+infinity
-2147483648 2147483647 0 actual value integer actual value boolean
---
init unit
0 kWh
0 h
--
---actual value text actual value float actual value float actual value float
-infinity
-infinity
-infinity
+infinity
+infinity
+infinity
0
0
0 m/h kW
C actual value float actual value float
-infinity
-infinity
+infinity
+infinity
0
0
C m
4.3. - 469
4.3.8.4. SBMs
4.3.8.4.1. SBM51
4.3.8.4.1.1. SY_SBM51 SBM51 control unit
Function summary
Parameters
No.
Cycle
name of parameter
Cycle
Readout cycle
Enable
Enable
Bus release
parameter typ min max init unit
set point boolean
--0 -set point boolean
--0 --
Version 05/06
Software structure Objects 4.3. - 470
4.3.8.4.1.2. H004 SBM51_04
Function summary
Jedes installierte Objekt ist für genau ein Gerät am M-Bus zuständig. Der Objekt-Index der technischen Adresse ist mit der Busadresse am M-Bus identisch. Über den Parameter Config wird die Geräte-Klasse des konkreten M-Bus-Zählers ausgewählt, woraufhin ein zweiter Config-Parameter
"ConfigYY" installiert wird, über den der Geräte-Typ ausgewählt wird. Aufgrund beider Auswahlen wird ein passendes Subobjekt installiert. ConfigYY steht für ConfigEL, ConfigWA oder ConfigWM.
Siehe dort. Die Subobjekte CD_WM und CD_WA stehen für die "Generischen Parameter" der
Geräte-Klasse, das sind die Parameter, die wirklich jeder Wäremzähler bzw. jeder Wasserzähler bieten sollte. Alle anderen Subobjekte haben mehr Parameter als nur die generischen.
Parameters
No.
Active
Anfrage
name of parameter aktiv
Device active
Counter inquiry
Config
Medium
Counting medium
ConfigEL
Elt-Typ
Elt-Counter type
ConfigWA
H²O-Typ
Water counter type
ConfigWM
WMZ-Typ
Heat counter type
parameter typ
actual value boolean set point boolean set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate
--
--
min max init unit
--0 --
---
5
0
0
--
--
--
2
3
2
0
0
0 value,text
0,none
1,Electricity counter
2,Heat counter
3,Water counter
4,DDC3000-Menu value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum
2,Allmeas ISWZ value,text
0,Standard
1,Standard-Maximum
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 471
4.4. parameterizing
4.4.1. Plant structuring
The "plant" and "group" address components can be used for later reuse and structured approach.
4.4.1.1. Plants
Why plants?
All the functions of a technical building plant can be summarized in "plants". This may include a contact output or a full air conditioning plant.
The term "plant" is just a sorting criterion. It is mainly used for structured visualization. All plants are offered to the user in the first operating page.
4.4.1.2. Groups
Why groups?
A group is a grouping of the functions from part of a plant. For example, a heating register can be summarized under a group. This would include e.g. the valve, sensor and pump. Within the "switch" page the group name would be inserted as a divider from the other LEDs.
A controller can be found in each group. Therefore an air conditioning plant for example can have a temperature control circuit in one group and a humidity control circuit in another group.
4.4.2. Malfunction message management
4.4.2.1. Plant messages
4.4.2.1.1. Messages
A message in the DDC4000 system is depicted via an attachment function FSelMo. The information for malfunctions (incoming message) and normal operation (outgoing message) are administrated.
Plant messages are generated if an appropriate parameter monitoring has been set.
Plant messages are generated in line with the status of the hardware of the separate control technology. Plant messages have a delay so that only ongoing failures are reported.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 472
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 473
Plant messages
Plant messages are used to monitor e.g. such malfunction statuses as malfunction messages or values exceeded e.g. for level monitoring.
The following must be defined for plant monitoring:
1. which parameter is to be monitored,
2. where the message is displayed or to where it is transferred.
Re (1)
To monitor a parameter a sub-object FSelMO is installed on the relevant parameter. The type of monitoring can be stipulated with the parameters for the FSelMO object.
Via parameter 3 E/A you switch the monitoring on or off.
Parameter 2 monit stipulates,
- whether '0' or '1' is the normal response (e.g. for binary parameters)
- whether monitoring is for falling above or exceeding a limit (for numbers) or
- whether equality or lack of equality is being monitored (for selection parameters or numbers).
In parameter 4 value the comparison value is entered; this is compared with that of the monitored parameter, such as parameter 2 monit.
A hysteresis for the comparison value can be set in parameter 5 Xdz (switch back difference). This prevents the occurrence of many messages if the parameter being monitored moves around the comparison value. This would produce messages time and again.
In order to provide operating staff with useful information if a message is produced, a text can be defined in parameter 6 Txt_IN and this is output with the message if the monitored status occurs.
Correspondingly a further text 7 Txt_OU can be defined when a malfunction state is resolved. These are referred to as "incoming" and "outgoing" messages.
The current monitoring result is shown on message output 101.
After defining when a plant message is created, you must still define where and how it is displayed.
For this a reference is entered on a s. g. message set (see below) in parameter 1 MSet.
Re (2)
Up to 20 message sets (system object SY_MesgOut) can be defined and these define separately from the message where and how messages are processed.
Plant messages
Plant messages are produced by the plant automatically.
Plant messages can only be displayed on the relevant central unit; they are not transmitted to other central units. Certain groups of messages can be suppressed or displayed to facilitate troubleshooting.
Potential groups of plant messages:
Central unit hardware
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 474
modules of CAN buses,
Ethernet bus (central bus)
4.4.2.1.3. Message memory SY_MsgMan
Function summary
(n x settable) This object is used as to save messages. When starting the plant in //000/00/00 the object SY_MsgMan.01 of this type is created. All messages are attached to parameter 103 "akt Anz
Meld".
Function description
If the maximum number of messages is reached a new message pushes out the message with the lowest priority. For this the following priority rules apply:
Priority class Message status Display on DDC4000 screen
1 (High)
2
3
4 (Low)
incoming, not quit incoming, quit outgoing, not quit outgoing, quit red flashing triangle red constant triangle green flashing triangle green constant triangle
Within a priority class the oldest message has the lowest priority, and logically the newest message the highest.
If the maximum number of messages in the message memory is reset to a value that is smaller than the current number of messages deletions are also made as per the rules described above until the new maximum number is reached.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
101
neuM
new message
102
quMS
MS receipt
103
aktM
act number msg
104
löMS
MS delete
105
maxM
max number msg
parameter typ
actual value boolean set point deletable boolean actual value integer set point deletable boolean set point integer
min max init
--0
--
0
--
99 deleted --
0 --
unit
--
--
1
--
99 deleted --
64 --
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 475
No.
name of parameter
106
voll
Memory full
107
kmdM
coming notification
108
glob Lö
global delete
109
vip-I
VIP Index
parameter typ
actual value boolean actual value boolean set point deletable boolean actual value deletable integer
min max init
--0
--
--
0
--
--
0 deleted
--
--
unit
--
99 deleted --
4.4.2.1.4. Output definition SY_MsgOut
Function summary
(20x settable) In this object the output destinations ("message sets") are defined for messages.
In diesem Objekt werden die Ausgabe-Ziele („Melde-Sets“) von Meldungen definiert. Im
Meldeüberwachungs-Objekt (FO_SelectionMessageOutput) kann im Parameter 1 „Auswahl Mset“ ein
Melde-Set eingetragen werden, welches die Ziele der generierten Meldungen festlegt. Weiterhin kann zur Verzögerung bzw. Verhinderung von Meldeschauern eine Master-Meldung generiert werden.
Falls das Versenden von Meldungen fehlgeschlagen ist, kann ein Ersatz-Meldeset eingetragen werden.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
3
glob
Dest. global
5
SMS
Selection SMS
parameter typ
set point boolean set point selection list
min max init
--0
--0
unit
-selection list
No.,text
0,SMS No. 1
1,SMS No. 2
2,SMS No. 3
3,SMS No. 4
4,SMS No. 5
5,SMS No. 6
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 476
8
9
No.
name of parameter
6
FAX
Selection FAX
7
201
Drucker
Selection printer
Ersatz
Replacement MSet
weiter
Forwarding
intMS
Goal Msp intern
parameter typ
set point selection list set point selection list set point deletable text set point multistate
-set point boolean
min
--
--
--
max
--
--
--
init
0
unit
selection list
No.,text
0,FAX-No. 1
1,FAX-No. 2
2,FAX-No. 3
3,FAX-No. 4
4,FAX-No. 5
5,FAX-No. 6
0 selection list
No.,text
0,Printer 1
1,Printer 2
2,Printer 3
3,Printer 4
4,Printer 5
5,Printer 6 deleted --
--
3
--
0
0 value,text
0,no forwarding
1,destination error
2,no destination reached
--
4.4.2.1.5. Selection message set FSelMO
Function summary
(for each 99x can be set to any scalable parameters). This object activates the message monitoring of a scalar parameter. The object described below SY_MsgMan.01 is used as a message memory. If the monitored parameter is a BoolPar 0 or 1 can be defined as a ok. If an integer or float is monitored, the limiting value and switch back difference is stated for releasing a normal message.
Parameters
No. name of parameter parameter typ
1
MSet
Selection MSet set point deletable text
min
--
max
--
init unit
--
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing
No. name of parameter parameter typ
2
überw
Monitoring open set point multistate
min
--
max
8
3
E/A
On / Off
4
5
6
oGw
Upper limit value
Xdz
Switchback diff
Txt_K
Text coming set point deletable boolean set point float set point float set point multistate
7
Txt_G
Text going
8
Delay
Delay set point multistate set point deletable integer
--
-infinity
0
--
--
0
4.4. - 477 init
2
unit
value,text
0,no monitoring
1,Switch to 0
2,Switch to 1
3,Exceeding
4,Falling below
5,Equality
6,Exceed or below
7,Invalid deleted ---
+infinity
+infinity
17
8
3600
95
1
--
--
6 value,text
0,Controller damaged
1,Winter
2,Manual
3,active
4,abnormal
5,Maintenance
6,Malfunction
7,Alarm
8,Danger
9,Initial.
10,Optimization
11,ON
12,CLOSE
13,too low
14,too high
15,too hot
16,too cold
4 value,text
0,Controller OK
1,Summer
2,Auto
3,inactive
4,normal
5,Normal operation
6,OFF
7,OPEN deleted s
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 478
No. name of parameter parameter typ
9
uGw
Lower limit value set point float
10
Testw
Test value
101 u
Signaling output
102 Status internal Status set point integer actual value boolean actual value multistate
min
-infinity
max
+infinity
-2147483648 2147483647 0
--
--
--
6
0
0
init
0
--
--
unit
-value,text
0,Start
1,1. Success msg active
2,normal
3,Error msg active
4,Failure
5,Success msg active
4.4.2.1.6. Sensor failure message FAIMO
Function description
(settable 99 times) The functional object FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput is used to monitor the sensor and generate sensor failure messages. For this purpose it is to be attached to the "b" parameter of a CO_AnalogInput. As such events as sensor breaking, short circuit, poling etc. are detected from this object only the validity of the "b" value is monitored but not whether limiting values are exceeded or undershot.
No sensor failure message is generated if the value of "b" has become invalid due to a module failure
(or I/O card failure). Alternatively: sensor failure messages only make sense for registered modules
(or I/O cards).
If a general failure monitoring is desired for all sensors within the central unit each related Type
CO_AnalogInput object should have a FO_AnalogInputMessageOutput attached.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
MSet
Selection MSet
2
E/A
ON / OFF
101
u
Signaling output
parameter typ
set point deletable text set point deletable boolean actual value boolean
--
--
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
-deleted
0
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 479
No.
name of parameter
102
Status
internal Status
parameter typ
actual value multistate
201
Delay
Delay
202
MTxt
Message text set point integer actual value multistate
min max init
-6 0
1
--
3600 600
5 0
unit
value,text
0,Start
1,1. Logon running
2,Logged on
3,Logoff running
4,Logged off
5,Feedback running s value,text
0,OK
1,Malfunction
2,Short-circuit
3,Sensor break
4,wrong poles
4.4.2.1.7. Modem configuration SY_ModConf
Function summary
The modem task provides all communication routes between a DDC4000 centre and the V.24
interface. For the DDC4000 message plant it means that the message destinations SMS, email, fax and BMS can be used by the modem task.
Function description
The configuration of the modem connected to the DDC4000 Central Unit occurs via the system object
SY_ModemConfiguration.01. The modem's general operating parameters and the SMS dial numbers and protocols for the supported providers are shown here.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min max init
1
Sender
Sender set point text
--+49-30-60095-0
unit
--
2 --AT| --
3
init1
1. Initstring
init2
2. Initstring set point text set point text
--atz| --
4
init3
3. Initstring set point text
--att| --
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing
No.
name of parameter parameter typ min max init
5
esc
Modem Escape set point text
--+++
6 --ath|
7
hup
Modem Hangup
SMSC_D1
Login SMSC D1 set point text set point text
--001712521002
--001722278020 8
9
SMSC_D2
Login SMSC D2
SMSC_E+
Login SMSC E+
10
SMSC_A1
Login SMSC A1
11
Prot_D1
SMSProtocol D1 set point text set point text set point text set point multistate
--
--
--
--
--
2
001771167
0w0
0
12
13
14
Prot_D2
SMSProtocolD2
Prot_E+
SMSProtocol E+
Prot_A1
SMSProtocol A1
15
IP SMTP
IP_AdrSMTP Serv
16
AbsEmail
Sender E-mail
17
FAX ID
FAX ID set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate set point text set point text set point text
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
2
2
--
--
--
1
0
0
--
--
--
--
unit
--
-value,text
1,TAP8
2,UCP51 value,text
1,TAP8
2,UCP51 value,text
1,TAP8
2,UCP51 value,text
1,TAP8
2,UCP51
--
--
--
4.4. - 480
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing
4.4.2.1.10. Plant status - signalizing
Assignment of symbols and statuses in the quick start bar
Plant overview with quick start bar
4.4. - 481
With regard to the stated number for the priority, the highest value represents the highest priority.
Off / automatic active
Priority 1
On / automatic active
Priority 2
Malfunction / automatic active - not confirmed (symbol flashes)
Priority 3
Malfunction / automatic active - confirmed (symbol does not flash)
Priority 3
Off / manual influence available
Priority 4
O / manual influence available
Priority 5
Malfunction /manual influence available - not confirmed (symbol flashes)
Priority 6
Malfunction /manual influence available - not confirmed (symbol does not flash)
Priority 6
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 482
4.4.2.1.11. SMS
4.4.2.1.11.1. SMS numbers SY_SMS
Function summary
(1s settable) This object administrates 6 different SMS connections. The SMS numbers and the related participant names are saved as string parameters. There is no default entry.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1 SMS Provider 1
4
7
SMS Provider 2
SMS Provider 3
10 SMS Provider 4
13 SMS Provider 5
16 SMS Provider 6
parameter typ min max init unit
set point multistate
-4 1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1 set point multistate
-4 1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1 set point multistate
-4 1 set point multistate set point multistate set point multistate
--
--
--
4
4
4
1
1
1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1 value,text
1,D1
2,D2
3,Eplus
4,A1
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 483
4.4.2.1.12. Email
Email in the DDC4000 takes place like this:
The DDC4000 has an email server that can send but not receive emails.
The email client communicates with an email server in the BMS that can forward the email as appropriate.
In place of the BMS it is also possible to state a different email server.
It is not possible to dial in by modem to an Internet provider to send an email.
4.4.2.1.12.1. Email recipient SY_Email
Function summary
(1s settable) This object administrates 6 different email connections. The email addresses and the related participant names are saved as string parameters. There is no default entry.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1 EmailAdr 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name 1
EmailAdr 2
Name 2
EmailAdr 3
Name 3
EmailAdr 4
Name 4
EmailAdr 5
10 Name 5
11 EmailAdr 6
parameter typ
set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 484
No.
name of parameter
12 Name 6
parameter typ
set point deletable text
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
4.4.2.1.13. Fax recipient SY_FAX
Function summary
(1s settable) This object administrates 6 different fax connections. The fax addresses and the related participant names are saved as string parameters. There is no default entry.
Parameters
No.
name of parameter
1
FaxNr 1
FAX Number 1
2
3
Name 1
Participant Name 1
FaxNr 2
FAX Number 2
4
5
Name 2
Participant Name 2
FaxNr 3
FAX Number 3
6
7
8
9
Name 3
Participant Name 3
FaxNr 4
FAX Number 4
Name 4
Participant Name 4
FaxNr 5
FAX Number 5
10
Name 5
Participant Name 5
11
FaxNr 6
FAX Number 6
12
Name 6
Participant Name 6
parameter typ
set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text set point deletable text
min max init
--deleted
unit
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted deleted
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 485
4.4.2.2. Plant messages
Plant messages are saved in the message memory SY_MsgManIntern.01 that is created in //
000/00/00 when starting the plant. This object is used as an internal message memory. Messages with internal message memory destinations (e.g. messages during the start-up phase) are attached to parameter 103 of the SY_MsgManIntern.01. It is only possible to write in the local, internal message memory, not in the internal memories of other central units.
Object status
Each object has an object status with fixed defined priority statuses. The object status of a parent object is the result of the highest priority object status of its child objects.
Object statuses stating the priority
Lowest priority
1. Off / automatic active
2. On / automatic active
3. Malfunction / automatic active // not confirmed
3. Malfunction / automatic active // confirmed
4. Off / manual influence available
5. On / manual influence available
6. Malfunction / manual influence available // not confirmed
6. Malfunction / manual influence available // confirmed
Highest priority
Creating an incoming message
If a message monitoring was set up for any object's parameter and an incoming message was created the object status of the attached FO_SelectionMessageOutput changes to the value of 3 (not confirmed). If the object does not already have a higher priority object status this object status is adopted as per the mechanism described above.
By transferring the object status to the superior object, the object status is transferred up with the result that the operation during navigation by the plant tree indicates the constantly applicable plant status of the selected sub-tree (e.g. flashing warning triangle etc.).
The generated incoming message is written in the message memory and also has object status 3
(not confirmed).
Confirming a message
If the related message is confirmed in the message memory the object statuses of this message and the related message monitoring change to 3 (confirmed).
Creating a normal message
If the monitored parameter changes again to an uncritical value a normal message (=outgoing message) is generated by the message monitoring and the generated message taking on the object status 2 (ON/automatic active). The time stamp and message text of the normal event are inserted in the message.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 486
The hardware components (module, sensor, component) are monitored using plant messages.
Each hardware component to be monitored has parameters that describe the operating status. These parameters are controlled by a monitoring object for plant messages. The object has a delay function so that changing the value of these parameters releases a plant message after a delay.
Message monitoring object
The sub-object CO_ModulMessageOutput acts as a plant message monitoring object for all bus modules. It is attached as a child object to the SY_Module object of the module to be monitored. If the value of one of the malfunction parameters stated above is changed the attached child object
CO_ModulMessageOutput is calculated and a message is generated if necessary after a delay
Each group of plant messages requires specific solutions due to special requests and structures.
Module messages
All bus modules have such parameters as "Active", "malfunction", "ErrNo" and "DubAdr". Each of these parameters is analyzed by the plant message monitoring. If an ongoing Active=0, malfunction=1, ErrNo!=0 or DubAdr=1 is detected after all three have previously had the inverted status, a malfunction message is generated. The normal message is then produces as appropriate.
Bus messages
If all the modules connected to a bus are constantly inactive within a time frame this is interpreted as a bus failure. Instead of individual module failure messages a single bus failure message is generated in this case. As soon as a module registers on an ongoing manner on a bus a bus normal message is generated. In this case a check is made as to whether all previously registered bus participants have logged in again. Failure messages are generated for those modules that are still inactive.
Sensor messages
Everything is viewed as a "sensor" that is connected to analog inputs. In this case the relevant pin object has a sub-object of type CO_AnalogInput with parameter "b". If this sensor is to be monitored a functional object of type FO_AnalogInputMessageOutputmust be attached to parameter b. If b takes on an invalid value on an ongoing basis after it was permanently valid previously, a malfunction message is generated. The normal message is then produced as appropriate.
Component messages
not yet stipulated
Plant message settings
not yet stipulated
4.4.3. Creating the customer interface
The user interface is created exclusively with the PS4000 parametering tool.
The first operating page is stipulated by structuring the plant. Therefore there is a summary of the plants in the DDC4000 Central Unit and a quick start bar on the first page.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 487
Depiction of opening page with summary of all plants and the quick start bar
Groups may be located within the plants. The "switch" page is given the title that the group has in the
DDC Central Unit. All binary information that have a tick under the "visualization in DDC" command is found under this title, e.g. "supply air fan". Switch groups or LEDs are inserted correspondingly.
The formation of the "values" page is similar. Here all the parameters that are displayed behind each other must also receive a command "visualizing in DDC".
As the depiction is set in the DDC Central Unit a change to the visualization regulations can only be made via the tool. The page settings are generated here and stored as a data backup in the DDC
Central Unit.
It is not possible to generate these pages in the DDC.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing
Relationship between address structure and operation
4.4. - 488
4.4.4. Integrating touch screen switches
The touch screen switches can be integrated in two ways.
1. a function object switch can be attached to a multistate input. The output and input should match in terms of the values transferred.
2. switches can be set for basic object. This basic object can receive additional functions with other links.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing
Link switch S_42 with the PID basic program (fan)
4.4. - 489
Link with additional outside influence in automatic operation
If the manual switch on the display is set to "Auto" the inputs are queried. Thus "day" was passed on to the control circuit. If the "Night" switch has been pressed the switch would have a higher priority and the "night" command would be sent to the control circuit.
Version 05/06
Software structure
How is the manual switch superposed?
parameterizing 4.4. - 490
By attaching a "source" function object to in input of the control circuit the switch content can be overloaded?. So for example the control circuit can be switched by frost or a similar "Off".
The sources are also prioritized. If a further source is attached to the input parameter it finally describes the parameter and therefore has the highest priority.
4.4.5. Manual analysis
A "manual" input is found on the hardware objects. The input can receive the information
"visualization = YES". This makes this parameter changeable in the interface of the DDC4000 Central
Unit.
Then for "non-auto mode" the status is visualized in the quick start bar (right) by the hand symbol if a corresponding F017 was attached.
The value can also be used for visualization in the BMS.
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 491
4.4.6. Converting multistate to binary
Multistate parameters are used in the DDC4000 system. If a status is to be used from these parameters, e.g. for links, this status must be filtered out and converted to a binary parameter. For this each multistate parameter in the PS4000 can be entered in a source that is normally designed for a binary value. By selecting the connection line there is the option of assigning a multistate value a
1 and other values a 0.
Schematic depiction of conversion
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 492
Depiction of conversion in the tool
The forced control (Zw) parameter is a multistate parameter. If the forced control is to have no effect on the HWO's output "Pu" "Zw" is to be set to "Auto".
In the upper image the "Zw" is switched via a binary input. By defining the value conversion two multistate values are to be stipulated for the two binary statuses (off, on). The result is that for binary=0 the HWO is switched from "Zw" to "Off". The manual switch and the auto request have no influence on the "Pu" output.
The status control takes place as per the following priority: (Example: H901)
Priority Parameter / Value Impact
Highest
SM
Refer to "Trouble-shooting" section
Manual/open, Zw/open, Rep
Pu = 0
Manual/open, Zw/open
Z/closed, DOL
Z/On
Pu = 1
Pu = 0
Pu = 1
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 493
Priority Parameter / Value
lowest
AnfAuto
Impact
if AnfAuto = 1, then automatic operation
The switching is correct in the lower image. If binary is 0, "Zw"="Auto". If binary=0 the manual switches and the auto requests also affect the "Pu" output.
Conclusion:
When using binary switching of "Zw" always observe the value conversion. If the forced control should not act one of the binary statuses should retain the value "Auto".
4.4.7. Network return
Network return in the DDC4000 system
A timer 92 is located in the DDC Central Unit. It is found in plant 0, Group 0. This timer is set automatically and starts up when the DDC Central Unit starts the control program. The parameter "t" on the T.92 becomes 1 after 60 seconds. "t" can be used for further connection (like I137 in the
DDC3000 system).
Version 05/06
Software structure parameterizing 4.4. - 494
Controlled DDC Central Unit start up
There is a "setfree" source parameter in each insert card and module.
This parameter includes a source.
If this source = 0, it blocks the physical outputs. This source is linked automatically with timer 92. If the DDC Central Unit is switched on, the time is 0. This blocks all the outputs. After the timer ends all outputs are released by this source link.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 495
4.5. Service level, data (restore) backup, updates
4.5.1. Service level
4.5.1.1. Service level, access to parameterizing
Service level
The service level is offered when you log in with the relevant code. The screen is switched over by pressing the "service" button. This process may take a few seconds so that the pages to be displayed can be completed.
You can use the second column to navigate within the service level. If DDC4000 is activated you can then select the desired plant.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 496
By selecting the central unit, plant "0" and then group "0" you enter the system object level.
Here you can select the desired system object.
The current value is in the right column in the parameter level. This field must be selected if you want to change the parameter value.
You move to a higher level by pressing ESC.
4.5.1.2. User administration
The user administration is not currently (2006) active. As a base of 3 users were introduced that match the code levels.
Users are administrated on various levels:
Users with the same name on various DDC4000 devices and a connected BMS are seen as the same user.
Users can be assigned various rights (code levels) on various DDC4000 devices. This assignment also applies to remotely controlled DDC Central Units, no matter whether via a different DDC or browser.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 497
So for example it is possible to give a heating technician code level 3 on the "heating DDC" and only code level 1 on the "fan DDC".
Later for protocolling in line with FDA CFR21 Part 11 it will be possible to log any changes by a user to a DDC4000 on the BMS.
4.5.2. Import data, backups, software updates
4.5.2.1. Cold start, warm start, reset
Cold start
The process after removing the cover is as follows:
The button in the hole is pressed with a pen and held down (refer to image, lower button). Then press and hold the pen button (upper button).
Now release the button in the hole and hold the pen button for a further 3 seconds.
After finally releasing the pen the central unit will boot. A long acoustic signal is generated. This means that the cold start was successful.
Warm start
The process after removing the cover is as follows:
Simply press the pen button (refer to image, upper button).
The warm start saves for example current set point changes or time program changes and reboots the DDC4000.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 498
Reset
The process after removing the cover is as follows:
The button in the hole is simply pressed (refer to image, lower button).
4.5.2.2. Import data - PS4000
The PS400 planning tool is used to import a projection.
The BACnet file object is used for transfer.
Prerequisites
Laptop with network card, RJ45 connection
Cross-over network cable (for a 1 to 1 connection from laptop to PC) or patch network cable (when connecting the DDC4000 e.g. via switches)
Pre-selections
The DDC4000 and laptop must be in the same network. For this it is necessary to set the IP addresses of the DDC 4000 and the laptop to the same sub-network.
Laptop settings (using Windows XP as the example)
In the Windows taskbar click on <Network connections> via the following path:
Start --> Settings> --> Control panel --> Network connections
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 499
Select the corresponding connection from network connections (e.g. LAN connection) and right click on
<Properties>.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 500
In the properties window displayed click on the <Internet protocol (TCP/IP)> element under <General> and click on properties.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 501
A properties window for the internet protocol (TCP/IP) opens. Click on the "Use following IP address" option.
Enter the relevant IP address (e.g. 192.168.0.30) and the appropriate sub-network mask (e.g.
255.255.255.0).
For the example above the DDC4000's IP address may only contain 192.168.0.xxx for communication to be established.
After changing a firmly assigned IP address the laptop must be restarted.
DDC4000 settings
In the DDC4000 the IP address and sub-network mask must be adapted in the following parameters:
xx central unit
000 Module (Module 000)
00 plant (plant 0)
00 group (group 0)
SY_Network.01 Object.Index
EtIPAddr Parameter (IP address)
EtMask Parameter (Sub-network mask)
EtActive Parameter (switching the Ethernet to active in the DDC4000)
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 502
The sub-network mask must be the same as in the laptop. The IP address must not be the same as in the laptop but must match the sub-network mask. The Ethernet must still be switched on via the
<EtActive> parameter.
Now it is possible to access the DDC4000 from the laptop via Explorer. To do so enter the
DDC4000's IP address in the address field in Explorer. If it is not possible to access the DDC4000 this may be due to the "Java 2 Runtime Environment" software not being installed on the laptop. This software must be installed and can be downloaded from the intranet from the following path:
Documents --> Technical --> DDC4000 system --> Network technology
It can also be found on the Internet by entering the search term "j2re".
Please note: Access from the browser to the DDC4000 is not required for importing data to the DDC.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 503
Send data
After making the default settings and an existing physical network connection, the projection is sent as follows in the PS4000:
In Project move to "TAB4000" and using the right mouse button click on a DDC4000 and select
"Create projection file (D4PML)...". Ensure that the set IP and central unit address in the properties of the DCC4000 in the PS4000 agree with the settings on the DDC4000 device. The BACnet device ID set in the PS4000 is written in the DDC4000 and must not be set on the device.
Now the data backup can be assigned a name and saved. Then an automatic query appears as to whether the projection file should be transmitted. If you confirm this dialog box with "yes" the transmission of the file to the DDC4000 starts.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 504
If a projection file has already been created you can send this immediately to the DDC4000. To do so in Project move to "TAB4000" and using the right mouse button click on a DDC4000 and select
"Send projection to device...". Now the projection can be selected from a dialog (for example see image above) and then be sent.
4.5.2.3. Data (restore) backup CF card
Data backup/file restoration with compact flash card
A CF (compact flash) card with 128 MB (32 MB in beta phase) is used as a data medium in the
DDC4200.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 505
This card is inserted into the slot behind the front cover. The card's recessed grip is on the left.
This compact flash card provides data backup/file restoration. To do so the object Sy-Datsi in
01/000/00/00 (central unit/Module 0/plant 0/Group 0) must be opened.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 506
As of August 2004:
Command is a set point. This value is set to 4 in order to force data backup on the front CF (compact flash) card.
The status state (6 - backup running) changes and in procBar you can see the progress from
0..100%.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 507
This value is set to 5 in order to force data file restoration on the front CF (compact flash) card.
The status state (7 - backup running) changes and in procBar you can see the progress from
0..100%.
For Command = 6 a firmware or program update of the card takes place. Refer also to software update.
In order to ensure problem-free data file restoration a cold-start must be carried out before data file restoration.
Please note:For data file restoration the planning should be saved as an xml file with the file name
"Datasave" on the CF card. Other file names are not considered for data file restoration with the aid of the CD card.
4.5.2.4. Data format
The data format of the backup is XML. XML means Extensible Markup Language. This stores the data backup in well structured plain text.
Please do no change this file. Even saving it with a normal editor can make this file unusable for the
DDC Central Unit.
For interested parties: more information from:www.xml.com
4.5.2.5. Plant software update
Insert the card with the new firmware (software version) into the slot on the DDC4000 Central Unit and press Reset (place pen into the hole and activate hidden button with it).
The yellow LED should flicker for around 90 seconds and then "OK" will be displayed on the LCD.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 508
Then remove the card and press Reset again.
The device will now be booted with the new version of the program.
4.5.2.6. Update bootloader
How is the boot loader renewed?
The compact flash card is inserted into the opening behind the front cover. Then a cold start is carried out.
During loading the screen turns grey. Then "OK" appears. Boot loader and program updates are made at the same time and register after completion.
Version 05/06
Software structure Service level, data (restore) backup, updates 4.5. - 509
To restart the DDC Central Unit, you must carry out a reset.
Version 05/06
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Ethernet communication
Flexible user interface
BACnet native
Structured parameterizing
Remote control via any Windows PC
Checked controls
2 CAN buses
Switch modules
Separate customer and service interface
Integration in the planning tool
Frequently asked questions
The DDC4000 Central Units and bus modules are extensions to the Kieback&Peter product range providing a plant with new options.
The DDC4000 communicates via the standardized protocol BACnet.
To operate and project a DDC4000 central unit you only need a network connection and Internet explorer. No plug-in or additional programs are required.
The field bus can be used for distances up to 2000 meters.
BMA4024, BMD4032, BMD4064, SBM51_04, and FBM
User questions
Patricia G.
Do cold start, warm start, or reset actions erase existing configurations?
No votes
No, performing a cold start, warm start, or reset does not erase the existing configuration. Configuration data is preserved outside of these startup processes, typically on a CompactFlash card.
